This is a modern-English version of Cyclopedia of Commerce, Accountancy, Business Administration, v. 05 (of 10), originally written by American School of Correspondence. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Transcriber's Note:

Transcriber's Note:

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

The cover image was made by the transcriber and is in the public domain.

A VIEW IN UNION STOCK YARDS, CHICAGO, ILL.
The Greatest Live Stock Market in the World

A VIEW IN UNION STOCK YARDS, CHICAGO, ILL.
The Largest Livestock Market in the World

1

Cyclopedia
of
Commerce, Accountancy, Business Administration

A General Reference Guide on
ACCOUNTING, AUDITING, BOOKKEEPING, BUSINESS LAW, BUSINESS
Management, Admin, and Industrial Org
BANKING, ADVERTISING, SALES, OFFICE, AND FACTORY
Records, cost tracking, organizing, etc.
Created by a team of
AUDITORS, ACCOUNTANTS, LAWYERS, AND BUSINESS SPECIALISTS
Methods and Management
Featuring more than two thousand engravings
10 VOLUMES
CHICAGO
AMERICAN TECHNICAL SOCIETY
1910
Copyright, 1909
BY
AMERICAN SCHOOL OF CORRESPONDENCE
Copyright, 1909
BY
AMERICAN TECHNICAL SOCIETY
Entered at Stationers' Hall, London
All Rights Reserved
2

Authors and Collaborators

JAMES BRAY GRIFFITH, Managing Editor
Head, Dept. of Commerce, Accountancy, and Business Administration, American School of Correspondence.
ROBERT H. MONTGOMERY
Of the Firm of Lybrand, Ross Bros. & Montgomery, Certified Public Accountants.
Editor of the American Edition of Dicksee's Auditing.
Formerly Lecturer on Auditing at the Evening School of Accounts and Finance of the University of Pennsylvania, and the School of Commerce, Accounts, and Finance of the New York University.
ARTHUR LOWES DICKINSON, F. C. A., C. P. A.
Of the Firms of Jones, Caesar, Dickinson, Wilmot & Company, Certified Public Accountants, and Price, Waterhouse & Company, Chartered Accountants.
Of the Firm of Lybrand, Ross Bros. & Montgomery, Certified Public Accountants.
F. H. MACPHERSON, C. A., C. P. A.
Of the Firm of F. H. Macpherson & Co., Certified Public Accountants.
CHAS. A. SWEETLAND
Consulting Public Accountant.
Author of "Loose-Leaf Bookkeeping," and "Anti-Confusion Business Methods."
E. C. LANDIS
Of the System Department, Burroughs Adding Machine Company.
Editor-in-Chief, Textbook Department, American School of Correspondence.
CECIL B. SMEETON, F. I. A.
Public Accountant and Auditor.
President, Incorporated Accountants' Society of Illinois.
Fellow, Institute of Accounts, New York.
3
JOHN A. CHAMBERLAIN, A. B., LL. B.
Of the Cleveland Bar.
Lecturer on Suretyship, Western Reserve Law School.
Author of "Principles of Business Law."
HUGH WRIGHT
Auditor, Westlake Construction Company.
GLENN M. HOBBS, Ph. D.
Secretary, American School of Correspondence.
JESSIE M. SHEPHERD, A. B.
Associate Editor, Textbook Department, American School of Correspondence.
GEORGE C. RUSSELL
Systematizer.
Formerly Manager, System Department, Elliott-Fisher Company.
OSCAR E. PERRIGO, M. E.
Specialist in Industrial Organization.
Author of "Machine-Shop Economics and Systems," etc.
DARWIN S. HATCH, B. S.
Assistant Editor, Textbook Department, American School of Correspondence.
CHAS. E. HATHAWAY
Cost Expert.
Chief Accountant, Fore River Shipbuilding Co.
CHAS. WILBUR LEIGH, B. S.
Associate Professor of Mathematics, Armour Institute of Technology.
L. W. LEWIS
Advertising Manager, The McCaskey Register Co.
MARTIN W. RUSSELL
Registrar and Treasurer, American School of Correspondence.
4
HALBERT P. GILLETTE, C. E.
Managing Editor, Engineering-Contracting.
Author of "Handbook of Cost Data for Contractors and Engineers."
R. T. MILLER, JR., A. M., LL. B.
President, American School of Correspondence.
WILLIAM SCHUTTE
Manager of Advertising, National Cash Register Co.
E. ST. ELMO LEWIS
Advertising Manager, Burroughs Adding Machine Company.
Author of "The Credit Man and His Work" and "Financial Advertising."
RICHARD T. DANA
Consulting Engineer.
Chief Engineer, Construction Service Co.
P. H. BOGARDUS
Publicity Manager, American School of Correspondence.
WILLIAM G. NICHOLS
General Manufacturing Agent for the China Mfg. Co., The Webster Mfg. Co., and the Pembroke Mills.
Author of "Cost Finding" and "Cotton Mills."
C. H. HUNTER
Advertising Manager, Elliott-Fisher Co.
FRANK C. MORSE
Filing Expert.
Secretary, Browne-Morse Co.
H. E. K'BERG
Expert on Loose-Leaf Systems.
Formerly Manager, Business Systems Department, Burroughs Adding Machine Co.
EDWARD B. WAITE
Head, Instruction Department, American School of Correspondence.
5

Authorities Consulted

The editors have freely consulted the standard technical and business literature of America and Europe in the preparation of these volumes. They desire to express their indebtedness, particularly, to the following eminent authorities, whose well-known treatises should be in the library of everyone interested in modern business methods.

The editors have consulted the standard technical and business literature from America and Europe in creating these volumes. They want to express their gratitude, especially to the following respected authorities, whose well-known works should be in the library of anyone interested in modern business methods.

Grateful acknowledgment is made also of the valuable service rendered by the many manufacturers and specialists in office and factory methods, whose coöperation has made it possible to include in these volumes suitable illustrations of the latest equipment for office use; as well as those financial, mercantile, and manufacturing concerns who have supplied illustrations of offices, factories, shops, and buildings, typical of the commercial and industrial life of America.

Grateful acknowledgment is made also of the valuable service rendered by the many manufacturers and specialists in office and factory methods, whose cooperation has made it possible to include in these volumes suitable illustrations of the latest equipment for office use; as well as those financial, mercantile, and manufacturing companies that have provided illustrations of offices, factories, shops, and buildings, typical of the commercial and industrial life of America.

JOSEPH HARDCASTLE, C. P. A.
Formerly Professor of Principles and Practice of Accounts, School of Commerce, Accounts, and Finance, New York University.
Author of "Accounts of Executors and Testamentary Trustees."
HORACE LUCIAN ARNOLD
Specialist in Factory Organization and Accounting.
Author of "The Complete Cost Keeper," and "Factory Manager and Accountant."
JOHN F. J. MULHALL, P. A.
Specialist in Corporation Accounts.
Author of "Quasi Public Corporation Accounting and Management."
SHERWIN CODY
Advertising and Sales Specialist.
Author of "How to Do Business by Letter," and "Art of Writing and Speaking the English Language."
FREDERICK TIPSON, C. P. A.
Author of "Theory of Accounts."
CHARLES BUXTON GOING
Managing Editor of The Engineering Magazine.
Associate in Mechanical Engineering, Columbia University.
Corresponding Member, Canadian Mining Institute.
F. E. WEBNER
Public Accountant.
Specialist in Factory Accounting.
Contributor to The Engineering Press.
6
AMOS K. FISKE
Associate Editor of the New York Journal of Commerce.
Author of "The Modern Bank."
JOSEPH FRENCH JOHNSON
Dean of the New York University School of Commerce, Accounts, and Finance.
Editor, The Journal of Accountancy.
Author of "Money, Exchange, and Banking."
M. U. OVERLAND
Of the New York Bar.
Author of "Classified Corporation Laws of All the States."
THOMAS CONYNGTON
Of the New York Bar.
Author of "Corporate Management," "Corporate Organization," "The Modern Corporation," and "Partnership Relations."
THEOPHILUS PARSONS, LL. D.
Author of "The Laws of Business."
E. ST. ELMO LEWIS
Advertising Manager, Burroughs Adding Machine Company.
Formerly Manager of Publicity, National Cash Register Co.
Author of "The Credit Man and His Work," and "Financial Advertising."
T. E. YOUNG, B. A., F. R. A. S.
Ex-President of the Institute of Actuaries.
Member of the Actuary Society of America.
Author of "Insurance."
LAWRENCE R. DICKSEE, F. C. A.
Professor of Accounting at the University of Birmingham.
Author of "Advanced Accounting," "Auditing," "Bookkeeping for Company Secretary," etc.
FRANCIS W. PIXLEY
Author of "Auditors, Their Duties and Responsibilities," and "Accountancy."
CHARLES U. CARPENTER
General Manager, The Herring-Hall-Marvin Safe Co.
Formerly General Manager, National Cash Register Co.
Author of "Profit Making Management."
7
C. E. KNOEPPEL
Specialist in Cost Analysis and Factory Betterment.
Author of "Systematic Foundry Operation and Foundry Costing," "Maximum Production through Organization and Supervision," and other papers.
HARRINGTON EMERSON, M. A.
Consulting Engineer.
Director of Organization and Betterment Work on the Santa Fe System.
Originator of the Emerson Efficiency System.
Author of "Efficiency as a Basis for Operation and Wages."
ELMER H. BEACH
Specialist in Accounting Methods.
Editor, Beach's Magazine of Business.
Founder of The Bookkeeper.
Editor of The American Business and Accounting Encyclopedia.
J. J. RAHILL, C. P. A.
Member, California Society of Public Accountants.
Author of "Corporation Accounting and Corporation Law."
FRANK BROOKER, C. P. A.
Ex-New York State Examiner of Certified Public Accountants.
Ex-President, American Association of Public Accountants.
Author of "American Accountants' Manual."
CLINTON E. WOODS, M. E.
Specialist in Industrial Organization.
Formerly Comptroller, Sears, Roebuck & Co.
Author of "Organizing a Factory," and "Woods' Reports."
CHARLES E. SPRAGUE, C. P. A.
President of the Union Dime Savings Bank, New York.
Author of "The Accountancy of Investment," "Extended Bond Tables," and "Problems and Studies in the Accountancy of Investment."
CHARLES WALDO HASKINS, C. P. A., L. H. M.
Author of "Business Education and Accountancy."
JOHN J. CRAWFORD
Author of "Bank Directors, Their Powers, Duties, and Liabilities."
DR. F. A. CLEVELAND
Of the Wharton School of Finance, University of Pennsylvania.
Author of "Funds and Their Uses."

GENERAL SALES OFFICES, SWIFT & CO., CHICAGO, ILL.

GENERAL SALES OFFICES, SWIFT & CO., CHICAGO, IL.

8

Foreword

With the unprecedented increase in our commercial activities has come a demand for better business methods. Methods which were adequate for the business of a less active commercial era, have given way to systems and labor-saving ideas in keeping with the financial and industrial progress of the world.

With the unprecedented growth in our business activities has come a demand for better business methods. Techniques that were sufficient for a less active commercial period have been replaced by systems and time-saving ideas that match the financial and industrial advancements of the world.

¶ Out of this progress has risen a new literature—the literature of business. But with the rapid advancement in the science of business, its literature can scarcely be said to have kept pace, at least, not to the same extent as in other sciences and professions. Much excellent material dealing with special phases of business activity has been prepared, but this is so scattered that the student desiring to acquire a comprehensive business library has found himself confronted by serious difficulties. He has been obliged, to a great extent, to make his selections blindly, resulting in many duplications of material without securing needed information on important phases of the subject.

¶ From this progress has emerged a new kind of literature—the literature of business. However, with the fast growth in the field of business, its literature has hardly kept up, at least not to the same degree as in other fields and professions. While a lot of excellent content addressing specific aspects of business activity has been produced, it's so dispersed that students looking to build a comprehensive business library face significant challenges. They often have to make their choices without clear guidance, leading to a lot of repeated material without getting essential information on crucial areas of the subject.

¶ In the belief that a demand exists for a library which shall embrace the best practice in all branches of business—from buying to selling, from simple bookkeeping to the administration of the financial affairs of a great corporation—these volumes have been prepared. Prepared primarily for 9use as instruction books for the American School of Correspondence, the material from which the Cyclopedia has been compiled embraces the latest ideas with explanations of the most approved methods of modern business.

¶ Believing there is a demand for a library that covers the best practices in all areas of business—from purchasing to sales, and from basic bookkeeping to managing the financial affairs of a large corporation—these volumes have been created. They are primarily intended as instructional books for the American School of Correspondence. The content that makes up the Cyclopedia includes the latest concepts along with explanations of the most widely accepted methods in modern business.

¶ Editors and writers have been selected because of their familiarity with, and experience in handling various subjects pertaining to Commerce, Accountancy, and Business Administration. Writers with practical business experience have received preference over those with theoretical training; practicability has been considered of greater importance than literary excellence.

¶ Editors and writers have been chosen for their knowledge and experience in dealing with various topics related to Commerce, Accounting, and Business Administration. Writers with real-world business experience were preferred over those with just academic training; practicality was seen as more important than literary skill.

¶ In addition to covering the entire general field of business, this Cyclopedia contains much specialized information not heretofore published in any form. This specialization is particularly apparent in those sections which treat of accounting and methods of management for Department Stores, Contractors, Publishers and Printers, Insurance, and Real Estate. The value of this information will be recognized by every student of business.

¶ In addition to covering the whole general area of business, this Cyclopedia includes a lot of specialized information that hasn't been published anywhere else. This specialization is especially noticeable in the sections that discuss accounting and management methods for department stores, contractors, publishers and printers, insurance, and real estate. Every business student will see the value of this information.

¶ The principal value which is claimed for this Cyclopedia is as a reference work, but, comprising as it does the material used by the School in its correspondence courses, it is offered with the confident expectation that it will prove of great value to the trained man who desires to become conversant with phases of business practice with which he is unfamiliar, and to those holding advanced clerical and managerial positions.

¶ The main value of this Cyclopedia is as a reference tool, but since it also includes the material used in the School’s correspondence courses, it is provided with the strong belief that it will be very beneficial for professionals who want to familiarize themselves with aspects of business practices they might not know, as well as for those in advanced clerical and managerial roles.

¶ In conclusion, grateful acknowledgment is made to authors and collaborators, to whose hearty coöperation the excellence of this work is due.

¶ In conclusion, we sincerely thank the authors and contributors, whose enthusiastic cooperation made this work outstanding.

10

Table of Contents
 
VOLUME V

Wholesale, Commission, and Storage Accounts By James B. Griffith[1] Page [2]11
 
Wholesale Business—Controlling Accounts—Sample Transactions—Order and Sales Record—Abstract of Sales—Sales Expense—Trial Balance Book—Commission and Brokerage Business—Merchandise Broker—Manufacturer's Agent—Shipments—Agents' or Factors' Account—Principal's Account—Commission Account—Produce Shipper's Books—Commission Merchants' Books—Consignment Ledger Account—Storage Accounts—Special Records  
 
Single-Entry Bookkeeping By James B. Griffith Page 91
 
Distinctive Features—Books Used—Debit and Credit—Posting—Proprietor's Account—Proving Work—Model Set—Determining Profit—Closing Books—Changing to Double Entry—Trial Balances and Comparative Statements—Comparative Statements—Proof without Trial Balance—Book Inventories—Demonstration of Proof—Reverse or Slip Posting—Special Accounting Forms—Cash Books—Cash Journals—Tabular Sales Books—Pay-Roll Records  
 
Trustees and Executors Accounts By James B. Griffith Page 163
 
Executors' Accounting—Inventory—Intermediate Account—Final Account—Schedules—Form of Account—Sample Accounts—Accounts with Trust Provisions—Exercise—Realization and Liquidation Account—Statement of Affairs—Resources and Liabilities—Balance Sheet—Affairs of a Bankrupt—Appraiser—Statement of Affairs—Deficiency of Account  
 
Brokerage Accounts By Chas. A. Sweetland Page 195
 
Grain Purchases—Bulls and Bears—Broker's Commission—Securities—Transfers—Clearing House—Ring Settlement—Commodities Handled—Cornering Market—Value of Wire—Settlement of Contracts by Offset—Adjustment of Balances or Settlement—Commission Allowed Brokers—Books and Forms Used—Glossary of Board of Trade Terms  
 
Billing and Order Management By Geo. C. Russell Page 235
 
European Methods—Machines for Manifolding—Development of Billing Machines—Loose-Leaf Sales Sheets and Invoices—Duplicate Invoices—Condensed Billing—Traffic Department Records—Analysis of Quantities and Amounts—Unit Billing—Back Orders—Split Orders—Loose-Leaf Sheets—Binders—Designing Stationery—Styles of Type—Carbon Papers—Blinds—How to Handle Orders on Billing Machine—Invoices in Blanket Form—Tabulators—Computing Machines in Billing—The Colored Sheet System—Compound Forms—Retail Dry Goods Billing—Devices of the Future  
 
Review Questions   Page 303
 
Index   Page 319

1.  For professional standing of authors, see list of Authors and Collaborators at front of volume.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.For the professional credentials of authors, check the list of Authors and Collaborators at the front of the volume.

2.  For page numbers, see foot of pages.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.For page numbers, check the bottom of the pages.

OFFICE, FARWELL, OZMUN, KIRK & CO. (WHOLESALE HARDWARE), ST. PAUL, MINN.

OFFICE, FARWELL, OZMUN, KIRK & CO. (WHOLESALE HARDWARE), ST. PAUL, MINN.

11

WHOLESALE, COMMISSION, AND STORAGE ACCOUNTS

WHOLESALE BUSINESS

In this section complete methods of bookkeeping as practiced in wholesale houses are demonstrated. Numerous modern methods that are readily adaptable to other lines of business are illustrated and explained in detail.

In this section, complete bookkeeping methods used in wholesale businesses are demonstrated. Several modern techniques that can be easily adapted to other types of businesses are illustrated and explained in detail.

DIVIDING THE LEDGER

1. There are many advantages in dividing the ledger into sections. The subdivisions most commonly used are purchase ledger, sales ledger, and general ledger. Such divisions greatly facilitate posting and reduce the chances of error. While it is advisable in most cases to use a separate book for each division, the three ledgers may be combined in one book by setting aside a section for each. This practice is not recommended except where the number of accounts is small, when general and purchase ledgers or purchase and sales ledgers may be combined. The division of the ledger into three sections does not necessitate radical changes, either in form or method of handling, in the other books.

1. There are many benefits to dividing the ledger into sections. The most common subdivisions are the purchase ledger, sales ledger, and general ledger. These divisions make posting much easier and lower the chances of mistakes. While it's usually best to have a separate book for each section, the three ledgers can be put together in one book by allocating a section for each. This approach is not recommended unless the number of accounts is small, in which case the general and purchase ledgers or purchase and sales ledgers can be combined. Dividing the ledger into three sections doesn't require major changes in either the format or method of handling other books.

2. Purchase Ledger. The purchase ledger contains only accounts with those from whom we are making purchases. The balances of the accounts in this ledger will be on the credit side and represent a liability. The total balance of the purchase ledger is the amount we owe on open accounts. If, for example, our purchases on account during a stated period amount to $964.50, and the amount paid on account by us is $320.30, we still owe $644.20. If the work is correct the combined balances of all open accounts in the purchase ledger will exactly equal this amount.

2. Purchase Ledger. The purchase ledger includes only accounts with the suppliers from whom we are buying. The account balances in this ledger will be on the credit side and represent a liability. The total balance of the purchase ledger is the amount we owe on outstanding accounts. For instance, if our purchases on account during a specific period total $964.50, and we’ve paid $320.30 on those accounts, we still owe $644.20. If everything is accurate, the combined balances of all outstanding accounts in the purchase ledger will match this amount perfectly.

123. Sales Ledger. The sales ledger contains only accounts with customers to whom goods are sold on account. The balances of the accounts in the sales ledger will be on the debit side and represent an asset. The total balance of the sales ledger is the amount that our customers owe us on open accounts. Suppose that a business is started with no open accounts receivable—during a stated period the sales on account amount to $1,427.75, and the total payments received on account are $965.50—the amount still outstanding is $462.25, and this amount should exactly equal the combined balances of all the open accounts in the sales ledger.

123. Sales Ledger. The sales ledger includes only accounts for customers to whom goods are sold on credit. The balances of the accounts in the sales ledger will show on the debit side and represent an asset. The total balance of the sales ledger is the sum that our customers owe us on open accounts. For example, if a business starts with no open accounts receivable—and during a specific period sales on credit total $1,427.75, while the total payments received amount to $965.50—the outstanding amount is $462.25. This amount should exactly match the combined balances of all the open accounts in the sales ledger.

The sales ledger is sometimes subdivided into two or more parts. The divisions may be City and Country or they may be according to the letters of the alphabet—as A-K, L-Z, etc.

The sales ledger is sometimes divided into two or more sections. The divisions might be by City and Country or they could be based on the letters of the alphabet—like A-K, L-Z, etc.

4. Accounts in Both Ledgers. Occasionally one from whom we are purchasing goods will also be a customer. For reasons which will appear later, accounts should, in these cases, be opened in both the purchase ledger and the sales ledger. When settlement of such an account is made, the necessary adjusting entries are made through the journal.

4. Accounts in Both Ledgers. Sometimes, a supplier we're buying goods from is also a customer. For reasons that will be explained later, we should open accounts in both the purchase ledger and the sales ledger in these situations. When it's time to settle such an account, the necessary adjusting entries are made through the journal.

5. General Ledger. The general ledger contains the investment accounts of the proprietor or partners, and all real, representative, and nominal accounts. Accounts with the purchase and sales ledgers are also kept in this ledger. These are controlling accounts which represent at all times the total balances of the purchase and sales ledgers.

5. General Ledger. The general ledger includes the investment accounts of the owner or partners, as well as all real, representative, and nominal accounts. Accounts related to the purchase and sales ledgers are also maintained in this ledger. These are controlling accounts that consistently reflect the total balances of the purchase and sales ledgers.

When statements of the other ledgers have been made and proved correct, a trial balance of the general ledger is made.

When the statements from the other ledgers have been completed and verified, a trial balance of the general ledger is created.

CONTROLLING ACCOUNTS

6. A controlling account is one which exhibits a summary of all of the accounts in a ledger, or of all accounts of the same class.

6. A controlling account is one that shows a summary of all the accounts in a ledger or all accounts of the same type.

The sales account, with which the student has been made acquainted, exhibits net sales, while a sales controlling account exhibits a summary of all accounts in the sales ledger. The debits to the sales controlling account represent the total debits to customers' accounts as shown by the sales book or the journal. The credits to the sales controlling account represent the total credits to customers as shown by the cash book and the journal. This account is variously styled 13Sales Ledger Account, Accounts Receivable Account, or Sales Controlling Account.

The sales account that the student has learned about shows net sales, while a sales controlling account provides a summary of all accounts in the sales ledger. The debits in the sales controlling account indicate the total debits to customers' accounts, as recorded in the sales book or journal. The credits in the sales controlling account represent the total credits to customers, as noted in the cash book and journal. This account is commonly known as the 13Sales Ledger Account, Accounts Receivable Account, or Sales Controlling Account.

A purchase controlling account exhibits a summary of all accounts in the purchase ledger. It is called a Purchase Ledger Account, Accounts Payable Account, or Purchase Controlling Account.

A purchase controlling account shows a summary of all accounts in the purchase ledger. It's referred to as a Purchase Ledger Account, Accounts Payable Account, or Purchase Controlling Account.

These controlling accounts are kept in the general ledger and show at all times the totals of accounts receivable and accounts payable, without the necessity of listing the individual balances. At the end of the month statements of the balances of the accounts in purchase and sales ledgers are made, and the totals of these balances must agree with the balances of the controlling accounts.

These control accounts are maintained in the general ledger and always display the totals for accounts receivable and accounts payable, without needing to list each individual balance. At the end of the month, statements of the balances in the purchase and sales ledgers are created, and these totals must match the balances in the control accounts.

The operation of these controlling accounts demonstrates one of the most apparent advantages of the division of the ledger. If an error is made in posting to an account in the sales ledger it is discovered as soon as the statement of the sales ledger is made, and can be located without referring to purchase or general ledger accounts. Without the ledger division and the use of controlling accounts, there would be nothing to assist in locating an error in the trial balance in any particular section of the ledger.

The operation of these controlling accounts shows one of the clearest benefits of splitting the ledger. If there's a mistake in posting to an account in the sales ledger, it’s spotted as soon as the sales ledger statement is prepared, and it can be found without needing to check the purchase or general ledger accounts. Without the ledger division and the use of controlling accounts, it would be challenging to identify an error in the trial balance within any specific part of the ledger.

ORDER BLANKS

7. In a wholesale business it is customary to have all orders entered on specially ruled order blanks of a uniform size. These orders are filed in a binder designed for the purpose, which takes the place of the old style order book.

7. In a wholesale business, it's standard to have all orders recorded on specially designed order forms of a consistent size. These orders are stored in a binder made for that purpose, replacing the old-fashioned order book.

These order blanks are furnished to salesmen who send in their orders on them. When an order is received direct from the customer it, also, is transcribed on one of these blanks so that all order records will be uniform. One very appreciable advantage in the use of this loose sheet system of order blanks is that all unfilled orders are kept in a binder by themselves.

These order forms are provided to salespeople who submit their orders using them. When an order comes directly from the customer, it is also written on one of these forms to ensure that all order records are consistent. One significant benefit of using this loose sheet system for order forms is that all pending orders are stored in a binder separately.

8. Filling Orders. Each day the orders to be filled should be placed in a temporary binder or holder and sent to the warehouse. The packer will check quantities shipped and return the order, together with the shipping receipt from the railroad or express company, to the bookkeeping department.

8. Filling Orders. Each day, the orders to be filled should be placed in a temporary binder or holder and sent to the warehouse. The packer will check the quantities shipped and return the order, along with the shipping receipt from the railroad or express company, to the bookkeeping department.

The amounts are extended, and the invoice is made out from this order blank. The sale is next recorded in the sales book. Instead 14of entering each item in the sales book the totals for each department are entered in the proper column. Each sale is numbered in the sales book as illustrated and the same number is placed on the order. These orders are then filed in the binder for filled orders in exact numerical order, which brings them also in the order of the dates of shipment.

The amounts are extended, and the invoice is created from this order blank. The sale is then recorded in the sales book. Instead of entering each item in the sales book, the totals for each department are entered in the appropriate column. Each sale is numbered in the sales book as shown, and the same number is assigned to the order. These orders are then filed in the binder for completed orders in exact numerical order, which also organizes them by the dates of shipment.

Order Blank

Order Form

SALES BOOK

9. The sales book used in this set exhibits some features not heretofore shown. At the right are three columns for the distribution of sales. At the left, in addition to columns for number, date, and folio, are two columns headed cash and sales ledger. All cash sales are entered in the cash column, and all sales on account are entered in the sales ledger column. At the end of the week or month the total of the sales ledger column is posted to the debit of the sales ledger account in the general ledger, while the totals of the sales columns at the right are posted to the credit of the sales account in the general ledger.

9. The sales book used in this set has some features that haven't been shown before. On the right, there are three columns for tracking sales distribution. On the left, in addition to columns for number, date, and folio, there are two columns labeled cash and sales ledger. All cash sales are recorded in the cash column, while all sales on account are recorded in the sales ledger column. At the end of the week or month, the total from the sales ledger column is posted as a debit to the sales ledger account in the general ledger, and the totals from the sales columns on the right are posted as a credit to the sales account in the general ledger.

15

INVOICE REGISTER

10. A form of purchase book, which also combines an invoice register, is shown in this set. Unlike the forms of purchase book with which the student has been made familiar, this invoice register gives full particulars as to terms, discount, when due, and when and how paid.

10. This set includes a type of purchase book that also serves as an invoice register. Unlike the purchase book forms the student is used to, this invoice register provides complete details on terms, discounts, due dates, and information on when and how payments are made.

The combined footings of the two department columns must of course agree with the footing of the amount column. At the end of the month the total of the amount column is posted to the credit of purchase ledger account in the general ledger, and the totals of the department columns are posted to the debit of the purchase account in the general ledger.

The combined footings of the two department columns must obviously match the footing of the amount column. At the end of the month, the total of the amount column is entered as a credit in the purchase ledger account in the general ledger, and the totals of the department columns are entered as a debit in the purchase account in the general ledger.

The details of payment are kept in the invoice register as a memorandum only. This provides a convenient record of unpaid invoices, showing when each is due.

The payment details are recorded in the invoice register as a memo only. This gives a handy record of unpaid invoices, indicating when each one is due.

CASH BOOK

11. In this set we introduce a columnar cash book which also serves as a journal for cash transaction and is known as a cash journal. The principal advantage of a columnar book lies in the opportunity to introduce columns with special headings for accounts to which entries are frequent. Not only does this permit of carrying footings to the end of the month with one posting to the ledger account, but it provides a convenient classification of receipts and expenditures with a complete segregation of items of a given class.

11. In this section, we introduce a columnar cash book that also functions as a journal for cash transactions, referred to as a cash journal. The main benefit of a columnar book is that it allows for the addition of columns with specific headings for accounts that have frequent entries. This not only enables month-end totals to be posted to the ledger account with a single entry but also offers an organized way to classify receipts and expenses, keeping items of the same type clearly separated.

In the form illustrated, columns are provided on the debit side for cash, purchase ledger (subdivided for discount and amount), bank deposits, and sundries; on the credit side, cash, sales ledger (subdivided for discount and amount), cash sales, bank withdrawals, and sundries. At first glance it might appear that this form is a departure from the regular form of cash book, but it should be remembered that the cash columns are the only ones having anything to do with the cash account. A cash receipt is entered in the cash debit column, but the amount is credited to its source through the proper credit column; thus a payment received on account is debited to cash and credited through the sales ledger column. A deposit is credited to cash and debited to bank deposits; the payment of a purchase ledger 16account by check is credited to bank withdrawals, and debited to purchase ledger account.

In the form shown, there are columns on the debit side for cash, purchase ledger (broken down into discount and amount), bank deposits, and miscellaneous items; on the credit side, there are columns for cash, sales ledger (broken down into discount and amount), cash sales, bank withdrawals, and miscellaneous items. At first glance, it might seem like this form is different from the usual cash book, but it's important to note that the cash columns are the only ones related to the cash account. A cash receipt is recorded in the cash debit column, but the amount is credited to its source through the appropriate credit column; for example, a payment received on account is debited to cash and credited through the sales ledger column. A deposit is credited to cash and debited to bank deposits; a purchase ledger account payment made by check is credited to bank withdrawals and debited to the purchase ledger account.

The discount columns are memorandum columns only, the net cash being entered in the amount columns under purchase and sales ledger. These columns are included that the total payment may be posted to personal accounts in purchase or sales ledger. The totals of these columns are to be posted to discount and interest columns at the end of the month.

The discount columns are just for records; the actual cash will be recorded in the amount columns under the purchase and sales ledger. These columns are included so that the total payment can be posted to personal accounts in the purchase or sales ledger. The totals from these columns will be posted to the discount and interest columns at the end of the month.

The total amount to be posted to the debit of the purchase ledger account and to the credit of sales ledger account is made up of the totals of the discount and amount columns.

The total to be charged to the purchase ledger account and credited to the sales ledger account consists of the totals from the discount and amount columns.

The sundries columns are provided for all entries for which there are no special columns and are used principally for transactions affecting general ledger accounts. These columns are sometimes used for ordinary journal entries not involving an exchange of cash, but their use for this purpose is strongly advised against. The cash book should be used exclusively for recording cash transactions. When columnar purchase, sales, and cash books are used, the journal is only needed for adjusting and closing entries, and for this purpose it is best to provide an ordinary two-column journal.

The sundries columns are meant for any entries that don't have specific columns and are mainly used for transactions impacting general ledger accounts. These columns can sometimes be used for regular journal entries that don't involve cash transactions, but it's highly recommended not to use them for this purpose. The cash book should only be used for recording cash transactions. When using columnar purchase, sales, and cash books, the journal is only required for adjusting and closing entries, and it's best to have a standard two-column journal for this purpose.

SUBDIVISION OF EXPENSE ACCOUNT

12. In every business there are several classes of expense and it is very useful to know the exact amount of each class. When all expenses are charged under one head, it is impossible to determine without considerable checking, whether or not any particular class of expense is more than it should be. It is customary, therefore, to subdivide expense and to open accounts in the ledger for different classes of expense. Some subdivisions in common use are rent (paid), insurance, taxes, interest and discount, in freight, out freight, salaries, labor, fuel, office supplies, telegraph and telephone, postage, general expense, etc. The exact subdivisions used must of necessity be governed by the nature of the business. For instance, the item of telegraph and telephone charges may be of importance in one business, while in another, the number of such charges would be so small that a separate account is not warranted.

12. In every business, there are different types of expenses, and it’s really helpful to know the exact amount for each type. When all expenses are grouped together under one category, it’s hard to figure out—without a lot of checking—if any specific type of expense is higher than it should be. So, it’s common practice to break down expenses and create separate accounts in the ledger for various types of expenses. Some common categories include rent (paid), insurance, taxes, interest and discount, incoming freight, outgoing freight, salaries, labor, fuel, office supplies, telegraph and telephone, postage, general expenses, and so on. The exact categories used should depend on the nature of the business. For example, telegraph and telephone charges might be significant in one business, while in another, those charges might be so minimal that a separate account isn’t necessary.

17

PETTY CASH VOUCHER

13. A form of envelope voucher for petty cash is illustrated. A strong manilla envelope in what is known as size #10 takes the place of the petty cash book. It is ruled for a record of payments, and a receipt for each payment is placed in the envelope. At the bottom is a space for a distribution of the amounts to the proper accounts. When the petty cash fund is depleted—or at stated intervals—a check is drawn for the amount expended and it is charged through the cash book, leaving petty cash intact. The amount of the petty cash fund is considered as cash on hand, and the voucher envelope accounts for any part of the fund not actually in the cash drawer. Petty cash should be used sparingly, as it is intended only for small expense items when it is inconvenient to give a check. When the books are closed, the petty cash expenditures may be charged through the cash book as cash payments, instead of drawing a check.

13. An example of an envelope voucher for petty cash is shown. A sturdy manila envelope in size #10 serves as the petty cash book. It's designed to keep track of payments, and a receipt for each payment is placed inside the envelope. At the bottom, there’s a space to allocate the amounts to the appropriate accounts. When the petty cash fund runs low—or at scheduled times—a check is issued for the amount spent, and it is recorded in the cash book, keeping the petty cash balance unchanged. The amount in the petty cash fund is treated as cash on hand, and the voucher envelope accounts for any part of the fund that isn’t physically in the cash drawer. Petty cash should be used carefully, as it’s meant only for small expenses when giving a check isn't practical. When the books are closed, petty cash expenditures can be recorded in the cash book as cash payments instead of issuing a check.

Petty Cash Voucher

Petty Cash Receipt

18

TREATMENT OF PROTESTED PAPER

14. When a note, draft, or check is protested, the bank will charge us with the protest fee in addition to the face of the paper. The total amount must then be charged to the one from whom the paper was received. Suppose the check of Jones & Laughlin for $100.00 goes to protest and is returned to us with a protest fee of $2.50—the entry will be:

14. When a note, draft, or check is protested, the bank will charge us the protest fee plus the amount of the paper. The full amount then needs to be charged to the person from whom we received the paper. For example, if a check from Jones & Laughlin for $100.00 gets protested and is returned to us with a protest fee of $2.50, the entry will be:

Jones & Laughlin $102.50  
Bank   $102.50
Check No. 16 given to First Nat.    
Bank to cover J. & L. check for    
$100.00, protest fee $2.50.    

SAMPLE TRANSACTIONS

15. D. A. Hall is engaged in the business of a wholesale dealer in men's and boys' clothing. On Feb. 1st. his balance sheet is as follows:

15. D. A. Hall is in the wholesale business of selling men's and boys' clothing. On February 1st, his balance sheet is as follows:

Balance Sheet, Feb. 1st, 1909.
Assets
Cash        
In Bank   $1,765.20    
In Office   125.00    
       
Total Cash     $1,890.20  
 
Accounts and Bills Receivable        
Bills Receivable   850.00    
Henry James, Due        
Feb. 5 350.00      
David Traver & Co., Due        
Feb. 15 500.00      
Accounts Receivable   1,124.00    
Frank Weitz 234.00      
John Gorham 150.00      
George Golden 300.00      
Clayton & Co. 275.00      
Henry Ames 165.00      
     
Total Accounts and Bills Rec.     1,974.00  
 
19Inventory        
Men's clothing   $2,240.00    
Boys'    "   1,200.00    
       
Total Inventory     $3,440.00  
       
Total Assets       $7,304.20
 
Liabilities
Accounts and Bills Payable        
Bills Payable   650.00    
Henry Weir & Co., Due        
Feb. 7 450.00      
A. Stein & Co., Due        
March 1 200.00      
       
Accounts Payable   675.00    
       
D. Meyer & Bro. 150.00      
Altman & Sons 350.00      
Garson & Co. 175.00      
       
Total Accounts and Bills        
Payable     1,325.00  
Total Liabilities       1,325.00
       
Present Worth       5,979.20

The following transactions are entered on the books:

The following transactions are recorded in the books:

—Feb. 1st—
Sold to D. A. Marcus & Son
10 overcoats 7.50 75.00  
10 men's suits 6.75 67.50 142.50
     
—1st—
Sold to H. A. Branch
15 boys' suits 3.50 52.50  
 
—1st—
Rec'd from Geo. Golden
Cash on account   150.00  
 
—2nd—
Deposited in 1st Nat. Bank   150.00  
 
20—2nd—
Sold to John Gorham
10 men's suits 7.00 70.00  
10 men's suits 6.50 65.00 $135.00
     
—2nd—
Sold to Larson & Anderson
5 boys' suits 2.75 13.75  
10 men's suits 6.50 65.00 78.75
     
—2nd—
Sold for cash
Men's clothing   37.50  
 
—3rd—
Sold to Tallman & Co.
15 men's overcoats 7.25 108.75  
 
—3rd—
Paid 1 month's rent, Ck.
No. 1   75.00  
 
—3rd—
Received from John Gorham
Cash on account   150.00  
 
—4th—
Bought from Carson & Scott
36 men's corduroy coats 3.00 108.00  
12 men's corduroy coats 3.50 42.00 150.00
Terms 2/10, 1/30, n/60    
 
—4th—
Deposited in 1st Nat. Bank   187.50  
 
—4th—
Sold to Harris & Rogers
12 men's corduroy coats 3.75 45.00  
5 overcoats 8.00 40.00 85.00
 
—4th—
Received from Frank Weitz
Note at 30 days, 6%   234.00  
 
21—5th—
Sent to D. Meyer & Bro. Ck.
No. 2   $150.00  
 
—5th—
Received from Henry James
Cash to apply on note   200.00  
Cash for interest   1.75 $201.75
New note 30 days, 6%   150.00
 
—5th—
Bought from Adler & Co.
50 men's suits 6.25 312.50  
Terms 3/10, 1/30, n/60      
 
—5th—
Paid salesman's salary Ck.
No. 3   25.00  
 
—5th—
Drew for personal use Ck.
No. 4   50.00  
 
—7th—
Sold to Henry Ames
20 men's suits 7.50 150.00  
10 boy's suits 2.75 27.50 177.50
     
—7th—
Sold to Ackley & Son
10 boy's overcoats 3.00 30.00  
10 boy's suits 2.75 27.50 57.50
     
—7th—
Received from Clayton & Co.
Check to apply on acct.   200.00  
 
—7th—
Deposited in 1st Nat. Bank   401.75  
 
—7th—
Paid our note to H. Weir & Co.
Check No. 5   450.00  
 
22—8th—
Sold to H. J. Andrews
10 men's overcoats 8.00 80.00  
12 men's corduroy coats 4.50 54.00 $134.00
     
—8th—
Paid express on shipment from
Carson & Scott, Ck. No. 6   .90  
 
—8th—
Received from Henry Ames
Cash on account   165.00  
 
—8th—
Sold for cash
1 job lot boy's clothing   87.50  
 
—9th—
Deposited in 1st Nat. Bank   252.50  
 
—9th—
Received from bank, check of
Clayton & Co., protested
for non-payment.
Amount of check   200.00  
Protest fees   2.50  
 
—10th—
Sold to Harris & Landis
10 men's overcoats 7.75 77.50  
 
—10th—
Sold to Frank Weitz
12 men's corduroy coats 3.75 45.00  
 
—10th—
Paid Carson & Scott
Check No. 7   147.00  
Discount 2%   3.00  
 
—10th—
Paid electric light bill
Check No. 8   3.75  
 
23—10th—
Received from Clayton & Co.
Cash to redeem protested
check   $202.50  
 
—10th—
Inventory at close of business,
Feb. 10
Men's clothing   1,898.75  
Boy's clothing   1,247.75  

Journal entries are to be made to get the accounts, as shown on Feb. 1st, recorded on the books. The transactions are properly entered in journal, cash book, sales book, and invoice register, and posted to ledger. The accounts in the general ledger are closed into trading, and profit and loss—the net profit is credited to proprietor's account—a trial balance is taken after the ledger is closed, and a balance sheet is made. Statements are prepared from sales and purchase ledgers, which agree with the balances of their controlling accounts. All accounts in the general ledger are properly ruled and balances carried forward.

Journal entries need to be made to record the accounts, as shown on Feb. 1st, in the books. The transactions are correctly entered in the journal, cash book, sales book, and invoice register, and then posted to the ledger. The accounts in the general ledger are closed into trading and profit and loss—the net profit is credited to the proprietor's account. A trial balance is taken after the ledger is closed, and a balance sheet is created. Statements are generated from the sales and purchase ledgers, which match the balances of their controlling accounts. All accounts in the general ledger are properly organized, and balances are carried forward.

24

Opening Entry in Journal

Journal Entry Start

25

Adjusting Journal Entries

Adjusting Journal Entries

26

Sales Book and Invoice Register

Sales Record and Invoice Log

SCENE IN SOUTH WATER STREET, WHERE THE COMMISSION HOUSES OF CHICAGO'S GREAT PRODUCE MARKETS ARE LOCATED

SCENE ON SOUTH WATER STREET, WHERE THE COMMISSION HOUSES OF CHICAGO'S MAJOR PRODUCE MARKETS ARE SITUATED

27

Columnar Cash Journal

Cash Journal Spreadsheet

28

Columnar Cash Journal

Cash Journal Spreadsheet

29

Sales Ledger

Sales Record

30

Sales Ledger

Sales Record

31

Sales and Purchase Ledgers

Sales and Purchase Records

32

Purchase and General Ledgers

Purchasing and General Ledgers

33

General Ledger

General Ledger

34

General Ledger

General Ledger

35

General Ledger

General Ledger

36

Statement of Sales and Purchase Ledger

Statement of Sales and Purchase Ledger

37

Balance Sheet and Trial Balance of General Ledger

Balance Sheet and Trial Balance of General Ledger

38

EXERCISES

16. The following transactions are recorded on the books of Parker and Hoadley, Omaha, Neb., wholesale dealers in tea and coffee. In recording these transactions use is made of the books and forms illustrated in this section.

16. The following transactions are logged in the records of Parker and Hoadley, Omaha, Neb., wholesale sellers of tea and coffee. When documenting these transactions, the books and forms shown in this section are used.

January 2nd, 1909

A partnership is formed on this date between K. J. Parker and D. C. Hoadley for the purpose of conducting a wholesale tea and coffee business, in the name of Parker & Hoadley, the principal place of business to be Omaha, Neb. Parker invests $3,000.00 cash. Hoadley invests $2,000.00 cash. It is agreed that profits are to be shared on the basis of capital invested, capital to draw interest at 6%, and interest at 6% to be paid on withdrawals. The books are to be closed monthly and the profits divided between the partners. Hoadley is to assume the entire responsibility for the conduct and management of the business, for which he is to receive a salary of $150.00 per month, payable in installments of $75.00 on the 15th and 31st of each month.

A partnership is established on this date between K. J. Parker and D. C. Hoadley to run a wholesale tea and coffee business under the name Parker & Hoadley, with the main office located in Omaha, Nebraska. Parker is contributing $3,000 in cash, while Hoadley is contributing $2,000 in cash. They agree that profits will be shared based on their capital investments, with the capital earning 6% interest, and 6% interest will be paid on any withdrawals. The financial records will be closed monthly, and profits will be divided between the partners. Hoadley will take full responsibility for managing the business and will receive a salary of $150 per month, paid in two installments of $75 on the 15th and 31st of each month.

Deposited in Western National Bank $5,000.00.

Deposited $5,000.00 in Western National Bank.

Withdrew from bank, Ck. No. 1 petty cash $25.00.

Withdrew from bank, Check No. 1 petty cash $25.00.

Bought from Leggitt & Co., New York, 30 chests Japan tea, 1,455# at .37½, 20 chests Oolong tea, 972# at .40; terms net 30, 2/10, f. o. b. N. Y.

Bought from Leggitt & Co., New York, 30 chests of Japanese tea, 1,455 lbs at $0.375, 20 chests of Oolong tea, 972 lbs at $0.40; terms net 30, 2/10, f.o.b. N.Y.

Bought from Laughlin & Co., Chicago, 20 sacks Rio coffee, 1,020# at .22½, 20 sacks Java coffee, 985# at .25; 20 sacks Mocha coffee, 970# at .25; terms net 30, 2/10, f. o. b. Omaha.

Bought from Laughlin & Co., Chicago, 20 sacks of Rio coffee, 1,020 lbs at $0.225, 20 sacks of Java coffee, 985 lbs at $0.25; 20 sacks of Mocha coffee, 970 lbs at $0.25; terms net 30, 2/10, f. o. b. Omaha.

Paid rent of store 1 month to James Roberts, Ck. No. 2, $60.00.

Paid rent for the store for 1 month to James Roberts, Check No. 2, $60.00.

—3rd—

Sold to Ames & Johnson, 92 12th St., on account, 3 chests Japan tea, 149# at .48; sack Rio coffee, 50# at .28; 1 sack Java coffee, 52# at .32.

Sold to Ames & Johnson, 92 12th St., on account, 3 chests of Japan tea, 149# at $0.48; 1 sack of Rio coffee, 50# at $0.28; 1 sack of Java coffee, 52# at $0.32.

Sold to Landis & Snow, So. Omaha, on account, 2 chests Oolong tea, 101# at .52; 1 sack Mocha coffee, 47# at .32; 2 sacks Rio coffee, 98# at .28.

Sold to Landis & Snow, So. Omaha, on account, 2 chests Oolong tea, 101# at $0.52; 1 sack Mocha coffee, 47# at $0.32; 2 sacks Rio coffee, 98# at $0.28.

Sold to J. C. Peters & Son, 267 Roberts St., 3 chests Oolong tea, 146# at .52, 5 sacks Rio coffee, 252# at .48.

Sold to J. C. Peters & Son, 267 Roberts St., 3 chests of Oolong tea, 146# at $0.52, 5 sacks of Rio coffee, 252# at $0.48.

39 Bought for cash from Harris & Co., 1 office desk and chair $45.00, gave Ck. No. 3 in payment.

39 Bought for cash from Harris & Co., 1 office desk and chair for $45.00, paid with Check No. 3.

—4th—

Paid freight on coffee from New York by Ck. No. 4, 12.93.

Paid freight on coffee from New York by Ck. No. 4, 12.93.

Sold to Wright & Noble, 146 7th St., 2 sacks Java coffee, 99# at .32; 2 sacks Mocha coffee, 101# at .32.

Sold to Wright & Noble, 146 7th St., 2 bags of Java coffee, 99# at .32; 2 bags of Mocha coffee, 101# at .32.

Sold to Horgis & Co., 84 Jackson St., 5 chests Japan tea, 248# at .48.

Sold to Horgis & Co., 84 Jackson St., 5 chests of Japanese tea, 248 pounds at $0.48.

Sold to Winters & James, 92 Hastings St., 4 chests Japan tea, 201# at .48; 3 chests Oolong tea, 138# at .52; 2 sacks Java coffee, 97# at .32.

Sold to Winters & James, 92 Hastings St., 4 chests of Japanese tea, 201# at .48; 3 chests of Oolong tea, 138# at .52; 2 sacks of Java coffee, 97# at .32.

Sold for cash 1 sack Rio coffee, 47# at .28; 1 chest Japan tea, 45# at .48.

Sold for cash: 1 sack of Rio coffee, 47# at $0.28; 1 chest of Japan tea, 45# at $0.48.

—5th—

Sold to Cobb & Willet, 892 Park Av., 2 chests Japan tea, 92# at .48; 1 chest Oolong tea, 47# at .52; 1 sack Rio coffee, 44# at .28; 1 sack Java coffee, 45# at .32; 1 sack Mocha coffee, 43# at .32.

Sold to Cobb & Willet, 892 Park Ave., 2 chests of Japanese tea, 92# at .48; 1 chest of Oolong tea, 47# at .52; 1 sack of Rio coffee, 44# at .28; 1 sack of Java coffee, 45# at .32; 1 sack of Mocha coffee, 43# at .32.

Sold to Young & Criger, 62 Watson St., 5 sacks Mocha coffee, 205# at .32; 3 chests Oolong tea, 127# at .52.

Sold to Young & Criger, 62 Watson St., 5 sacks of Mocha coffee, 205# at $0.32; 3 chests of Oolong tea, 127# at $0.52.

Bought from Japan Importing Co., San Francisco, 60 chests Japan tea, 2,700# at .36, f. o. b. Omaha, net cash; gave our note at 10 days without interest in payment.

Bought from Japan Importing Co., San Francisco, 60 chests of Japan tea, 2,700 pounds at $0.36, f.o.b. Omaha, net cash; provided our note for 10 days without interest as payment.

Paid account of Leggitt & Co., less 2% discount, Ck. No. 5.

Paid account of Leggitt & Co., minus 2% discount, Check No. 5.

—6th—

Ames & Johnson paid their account, less 2% cash discount.

Ames & Johnson paid their bill, taking a 2% cash discount.

Deposited cash received to date.

Cash deposited to date.

Sold to Wade & Francis, 92 Bluff St., 10 chests Japan tea, 448# at .48.

Sold to Wade & Francis, 92 Bluff St., 10 chests of Japanese tea, 448# at .48.

Paid for telegram—petty cash—.40.

Paid for telegram—petty cash—$0.40.

Received check from Landis & Snow in full settlement of their account.

Received check from Landis & Snow for the full amount owed on their account.

Sold to J. C. Peters & Son, 5 sacks Java coffee, 231# at .32.

Sold to J. C. Peters & Son, 5 sacks of Java coffee, 231 lbs at $0.32.

Sold for cash 3 sacks Rio coffee, 127# at .28; 2 sacks Mocha coffee, 89# at .32; 3 sacks Japan tea, 131# at .48.

Sold for cash 3 sacks of Rio coffee, 127# at $0.28; 2 sacks of Mocha coffee, 89# at $0.32; 3 sacks of Japan tea, 131# at $0.48.

—8th—

Deposited cash on hand, also check of Landis & Snow.

Deposited cash on hand, also a check from Landis & Snow.

40 Sold to Ames & Johnson, 2 sacks Mocha coffee, 91# at .32; 2 chests Oolong tea, 87# at .52.

40 Sold to Ames & Johnson, 2 sacks of Mocha coffee, 91# at $0.32; 2 chests of Oolong tea, 87# at $0.52.

Sold to Wright & Noble, 3 chests Japan tea, 129# at .48; 1 chest Oolong tea, 42# at .52.

Sold to Wright & Noble, 3 chests of Japanese tea, 129# at .48; 1 chest of Oolong tea, 42# at .52.

Paid for fuel by check No. 6 to Rogers Coal Co., 12.00.

Paid for fuel by check No. 6 to Rogers Coal Co., $12.00.

Paid clerk's salary, check No. 7, 10.00.

Paid clerk's salary, check No. 7, $10.00.

Paid for labor, check No. 8, 16.50.

Paid for labor, check No. 8, $16.50.

—9th—

Sold to Watkins & Fish, 64 Prairie Av., 5 chests Oolong tea, 207# at .52.

Sold to Watkins & Fish, 64 Prairie Ave., 5 chests of Oolong tea, 207 lbs at $0.52.

Bought from Western Grocer Co., Chicago, 50 chests Oolong tea, 418# at .39; 20 sacks Rio coffee, 876# at .22¼; 10 sacks Java coffee, 434# at .25; 15 sacks Mocha coffee, 653# at .25; terms 30 days net, 2/10, f. o. b. Omaha.

Bought from Western Grocer Co., Chicago, 50 chests of Oolong tea, 418 lbs at $0.39; 20 sacks of Rio coffee, 876 lbs at $0.22¼; 10 sacks of Java coffee, 434 lbs at $0.25; 15 sacks of Mocha coffee, 653 lbs at $0.25; terms 30 days net, 2% discount if paid within 10 days, freight on board Omaha.

Received from Wright & Noble cash in payment of our bill of Jan. 4th, less 2% cash discount.

Received from Wright & Noble cash to pay our bill from January 4th, minus a 2% cash discount.

—10th—

Received from bank, check of Landis & Snow protested for non-payment, protest fees added 1.90.

Received from the bank, check from Landis & Snow was protested for non-payment, protest fees added $1.90.

Sent Laughlin & Co. our check No. 9 in payment of account

Sent Laughlin & Co. our check No. 9 as payment for the account.

—11th—

Sold to Raymond H. Moss, 182 Spring St., 5 chests Japan tea, 217# at .48; 5 sacks Rio coffee, 214# at .28.

Sold to Raymond H. Moss, 182 Spring St., 5 chests of Japanese tea, 217 lbs at $0.48; 5 sacks of Rio coffee, 214 lbs at $0.28.

Sold to Watkins & Fish, 10 sacks Mocha coffee, 424# at .32.

Sold to Watkins & Fish, 10 sacks of Mocha coffee, 424 lbs at $0.32.

Cobb & Willet paid their account in full, deducting 2% for cash.

Cobb & Willet settled their bill completely, taking a 2% discount for paying in cash.

—12th—

Deposited cash on hand.

Cash deposited.

Sold to Cobb & Willet, 5 chests Japan tea, 213# at .48.

Sold to Cobb & Willet, 5 chests of Japanese tea, 213# at $0.48.

Sold for cash, 2 sacks Rio coffee, 88# at .28.

Sold for cash, 2 sacks of Rio coffee, 88 lbs at $0.28.

—13th—

Paid our note to Japan Importing Co., check No. 10.

Paid our invoice to Japan Importing Co., check No. 10.

Paid sundry office expenses from petty cash 3.60.

Paid miscellaneous office expenses from petty cash $3.60.

Sold to Wade & Francis 3 sacks Rio coffee, 123# at .28; 2 sacks Mocha coffee, 86# at .32.

Sold to Wade & Francis 3 sacks of Rio coffee, 123# at $0.28; 2 sacks of Mocha coffee, 86# at $0.32.

Paid clerk's salary, ck. No. 11, 10.00.

Paid clerk's salary, check No. 11, $10.00.

Paid for labor, ck. No. 12, 16.50.

Paid for labor, ck. No. 12, $16.50.

41 —15th—

Paid ½ month's salary to D. C. Hoadley, ck. No. 13, 75.00.

Paid half a month's salary to D. C. Hoadley, check No. 13, $75.00.

1st. Balance cash, first charging petty cash expenditures as a cash payment.

1st. Balance the cash, starting by recording petty cash expenses as a cash payment.

2nd. Post purchase book, sales book, journal, and cash book.

2nd. Purchase book, sales book, journal, and cash book.

3rd. Take a trial balance.

3rd. Prepare a trial balance.

4th. Credit interest to partner's accounts.

4th. Add interest to partner's accounts.

5th. Take an inventory of stock on hand. The records show quantities purchased and quantities sold. When the same goods have been purchased at different prices, use the last price paid in figuring inventory.

5th. Take an inventory of the stock on hand. The records show how much was purchased and how much was sold. When the same items have been bought at different prices, use the most recent price paid to calculate the inventory.

6th. Close accounts into trading and profit and loss accounts.

6th. Finalize the trading and profit and loss accounts.

7th. Distribute net profits to partners' capital accounts.

7th. Distribute net profits to the partners' capital accounts.

COMBINED ORDER AND SALES RECORD

17. Instead of keeping separate order and sales books, both records may be combined on one blank. This is accomplished by the use of order blanks provided with columns for the distribution of sales to the different departments. Before the order is filled these blanks are handled in the same manner as those without distribution columns. When filled, the amounts are extended in the proper columns and the invoice made. The orders are then filed in a binder, each day's orders being kept together, and postings made direct to customers' accounts. The footings are carried forward to the end of the month and totals posted to sales accounts. The original orders thus become a loose leaf sales book.

17. Instead of keeping separate order and sales books, both records can be combined on one form. This is done by using order forms that have columns for allocating sales to different departments. Before the order is filled, these forms are handled like those without distribution columns. Once filled, the amounts are recorded in the appropriate columns and the invoice is prepared. The orders are then organized in a binder, with each day's orders kept together, and entries are made directly to customers' accounts. The totals are carried over to the end of the month and summed up in the sales accounts. The original orders then serve as a loose leaf sales book.

ABSTRACT OF SALES

18. When the order blank is used as a sales record, making a sales book with a record of a single sale to a sheet, it is somewhat inconvenient to determine from the footings the total sales for the day. This information is of considerable value, as a knowledge of what is being done from day to day is of importance to the principals of a business. Such a record is provided for by an abstract of sales on a separate sheet. This abstract should show total sales for each day, both cash and on account, divided by departments.

18. When the order form is used as a sales record, creating a sales book with a record of one sale per sheet, it can be a bit inconvenient to figure out the total sales for the day just by looking at the footings. This information is really valuable, as knowing daily figures is important for the business owners. An abstract of sales on a separate sheet provides this record. This abstract should display total sales for each day, both cash and credit, organized by department.

The blank may be made the same size as the order blanks, and filed in the sales binder at the beginning of the month. Sales are 42recorded daily and footings carried forward to the end of the month, when the totals may be posted direct to the credit of the sales account in the general ledger. The totals of sales on account will be posted to the debit of the sales controlling account in the general ledger.

The blank can be the same size as the order blanks and filed in the sales binder at the start of the month. Sales are recorded daily and totals are carried forward to the end of the month, when the totals can be directly posted to the sales account in the general ledger. The totals of sales on account will be posted to the debit of the sales controlling account in the general ledger.

OUT FREIGHT

19. The proper treatment of freight paid on outgoing shipments is an important question in accounting. When goods are sold at delivered prices, the freight paid is one of the items of expense in selling the goods, and when the books are closed the account will be closed into profit and loss. However, in a wholesale business, freight is sometimes paid as an accommodation to the customer when the goods have been sold at f. o. b. prices. Although the amount should be added to the invoice it should not be credited to the sales account as this would be taking credit for a fictitious trading profit. Such an item should be made a special charge against the customer by means of a journal entry.

19. The correct handling of freight charges on outgoing shipments is a key issue in accounting. When goods are sold at delivered prices, the freight costs count as part of the expenses involved in selling those goods, and when closing the books, this account will be reflected in profit and loss. However, in a wholesale business, freight may be paid as a favor to the customer when the goods are sold at f.o.b. prices. Even though the amount should be included on the invoice, it shouldn’t be credited to the sales account, as that would falsely reflect a trading profit. This charge should be specifically applied to the customer through a journal entry.

Customer Dr.
Out Freight Cr.

Combined Order and Sales Record

Combined Order and Sales Log

THE GENERAL OFFICES OF THE SAMUEL C. TATUM CO., CINCINNATI, OHIO

THE GENERAL OFFICES OF THE SAMUEL C. TATUM CO., CINCINNATI, OHIO

43

Abstract of Sales by Departments

Sales Summary by Departments

44

SALES EXPENSE

20. In a wholesale or manufacturing business it is very desirable that the exact cost of selling goods be known. Broadly, this cost is covered under the general head of sales expense, but this is usually divided into several classes of expenditures. The segregation of the various items of sales expense is desirable for the purpose of determining the percentage of each. The items which properly belong in sales expense depend somewhat on the nature of the business. For example, traveling expenses are usually a direct sales expense, but in some businesses they may be chargeable to the cost of purchases. The items entering into sales expense of the average business are: advertising, salaries of salesmen, traveling expenses of salesmen, commissions paid on sales, cost of packing and shipping, out freight.

20. In a wholesale or manufacturing business, it's really important to know the exact cost of selling goods. Generally, this cost falls under the category of sales expenses, but it's typically broken down into several types of expenditures. Breaking down the different items of sales expense is useful for figuring out the percentage of each. The items that should be included in sales expense depend somewhat on the type of business. For instance, travel expenses are usually considered a direct sales expense, but in some businesses, they might be charged to the cost of purchases. The items that make up the sales expense in an average business include: advertising, salespeople's salaries, travel expenses for salespeople, commissions on sales, packing and shipping costs, and outbound freight.

21. Advertising. This account should be charged with all expenditures for publicity such as newspaper, magazine, street car, and bill board advertising, cost of printing catalogs, booklets, and circulars. Where there is any reason for so doing, the cost of the different classes of advertising can, of course, be kept in separate accounts. The aim and object of advertising being to increase the sale of goods, it is properly considered an item of sales expense.

21. Advertising. This account should include all expenses for publicity like newspaper, magazine, streetcar, and billboard ads, as well as the cost of printing catalogs, booklets, and circulars. If necessary, the costs for different types of advertising can be tracked in separate accounts. Since the purpose of advertising is to boost sales, it is rightly regarded as a sales expense.

22. Salaries of Salesmen. This account is charged with all salaries paid to salesmen whether traveling or working in the house. Commissions and bonuses are sometimes included in this account, but it is usually considered best to keep them in separate accounts.

22. Salaries of Salespeople. This account includes all salaries paid to salespeople, whether they are traveling or working in-house. Commissions and bonuses are sometimes included in this account, but it's usually best to keep them in separate accounts.

23. Traveling Expenses of Salesmen. This account is charged with all legitimate traveling expenses of salesmen, the specific items included depending largely on the nature of the business. For example, in some businesses a liberal allowance is made for the entertainment of customers, while in others this item is never allowed. In any business the traveling expense account requires careful scrutiny. Salesmen should be required to furnish an itemized statement or voucher of expenses at stated intervals. For convenience, this should be made on a form specially provided for the purpose. One of the most convenient and popular expense vouchers is in the form of a book of a convenient pocket size, with a page for each day of the week and a summary of the week's expenses on the last page.

23. Traveling Expenses of Salesmen. This account covers all legitimate travel expenses for salespeople, with specific items varying based on the type of business. For instance, some companies allow a generous budget for entertaining clients, whereas others do not permit this expense at all. Regardless of the business, the travel expense account needs careful examination. Salespeople should provide a detailed statement or receipt of expenses at regular intervals. For convenience, this should be done using a specially designed form. One of the most practical and popular expense vouchers is a compact notebook that includes a page for each day of the week and a summary of the week's expenses on the last page.

24. Packing and Shipping. This account is charged with the 45entire cost of packing goods for shipment. It includes such items as wages of shipping clerk and his assistants, crates, lumber, boxes, and all other packing materials.

24. Packing and Shipping. This account covers the full cost of packing goods for shipment. It includes expenses like the wages of the shipping clerk and their assistants, crates, lumber, boxes, and all other packing materials.

TRIAL BALANCE BOOK

Traveler's Expense Book

Travel Expense Report

25. To save rewriting the names of the accounts each month, a trial balance book can be used to good advantage. These books are made to accommodate six trial balances on a double page, and are sometimes made with alternate short leaves so that twelve trial balances may be made with one writing of the names. When the trial balance book is used, care must be exercised in providing space for the addition of new accounts in each section. Where separate sales and purchase ledgers are used, it is best to provide a trial balance book for each ledger.

25. To avoid rewriting the names of the accounts every month, you can effectively use a trial balance book. These books are designed to hold six trial balances on a double page and are sometimes made with alternating short leaves so that twelve trial balances can be recorded with one entry of the names. When using the trial balance book, it's important to ensure there's enough space for adding new accounts in each section. If you have separate sales and purchase ledgers, it's best to have a trial balance book for each ledger.

THE CHECK REGISTER

26. Large check books are cumbersome to handle and necessitating the expenditure of much needless labor. Their use is rapidly giving way in modern offices to the check register. The check register has several distinct advantages. It exhibits, in compact form, a record of all checks issued and can also be arranged to show deposits and balance in the bank. Distribution columns can be provided with headings for the different expenditure accounts, which makes of the check register a cash expenditure book. The form should be varied to suit the business in which it is to be used. A typical form is illustrated on page 37.

26. Large checkbooks are clunky to use and require a lot of unnecessary effort. Modern offices are quickly transitioning to check registers instead. The check register has several clear advantages. It provides a compact record of all issued checks and can also be organized to display deposits and bank balances. It can include columns labeled for different spending categories, making the check register work as a cash expenditure book. The format should be adapted to fit the specific business it’s being used for. A typical format is shown on page 37.

27. Checks in Pads. When the check register is used it is the usual custom to have checks put up in pads. After the check is written, it is registered and numbered to correspond to the register number. With the use of padded checks, it is not necessary for the clerk who writes the check to know anything about the bank balance.

27. Checks in Pads. When using a check register, it’s common practice to have checks in pads. After a check is written, it gets recorded and numbered to match the register number. With padded checks, the clerk who writes the check doesn’t need to know anything about the bank balance.

46

Trial Balance Book

Trial Balance Ledger

47

Check Register Combined with Cash Expenditure Book

Check Register Combined with Cash Expenditure Book

48

Cash Received Book

Cash Receipt Log

49

Checks in Pads

Checks in Pads

CASH RECEIVED BOOK

28. A cash book specially ruled for a record of cash received is used to supplement the check register or cash expenditure book. Columns are provided for the different classes of receipts, with one credit column. It is assumed that all cash received is deposited, payments being made exclusively by check. This does not refer to petty cash expenditures which should be kept in a petty cash book or on envelope vouchers.

28. A cash book specifically designed to record cash received is used to complement the check register or cash expenditure book. It has columns for various types of receipts, along with one credit column. It's assumed that all cash received is deposited, with payments made only by check. This doesn’t include petty cash expenses, which should be tracked in a petty cash book or on envelope vouchers.

SAMPLE TRANSACTIONS

29. The following transactions illustrate the use of the special blanks and books described.

29. The following transactions demonstrate how to use the specific forms and ledgers we talked about.

D. A. Hall employs H. D. Snyder as traveling salesman for the purpose of increasing his business, agreeing to pay him a salary of $150.00 per month and expenses. He commences work on Feb. 11th. The amounts in the ledgers stand as shown in the last model set illustrated and these transactions are recorded:

D. A. Hall hires H. D. Snyder as a traveling salesman to boost his business, agreeing to pay him a salary of $150.00 a month plus expenses. He starts working on February 11th. The amounts in the ledgers are recorded as shown in the last model set illustrated, and the following transactions are logged:

—Feb. 11th.—
Paid Altman & Sons    
To balance account    
Ck. No. 9   $350.00
     
—11th—
Paid Garson & Co.    
To balance account    
Ck. No. 10   175.00
50     
     
—11th—
Sold to Daniels & Dean, Boone, Ia.    
10 men's suits $7.50 $75.00
10 men's suits 6.75 67.50
20 boys' suits 2.00 40.00
   
    182.50
Terms 2/10 N/30    
     
—11th—
Sold to A. C. Petersen, Nevada, Ia.    
10 men's overcoats 8.50 85.00
10 men's suits 7.00 70.00
   
    155.00
Terms 2/10 N/30    
     
—11th—
Received from D. A. Marcus & Son    
Cash   139.65
Discount 2%   2.85
     
—11th—
Sold for cash    
20 boys' suits 1.75 35.00
20 men's pants 2.00 40.00
     
—12th—
Received from John Gorham    
Cash 132.30    
Discount 2% 2.70    
     
—12th—
Sold to Henry Cook, Iowa Falls, Ia.    
5 men's suits 8.00 40.00
5 men's suits 5.75 28.75
5 boys' suits 2.00 10.00
5 boys' suits 1.75 8.75
   
    87.50
Terms 2/10, N/30    
     
—12th—
Sold to James Adams, Dennison, Ia.    
15 men's suits 7.00 105.00
Terms 2/10, N/30    
51     
—12th—
Received from Geo. Golden    
Cash   $150.00
     
—13th—
Sold to D. A. Marcus & Sons    
10 men's pants 2.00 20.00
10 boys' suits 1.75 17.50
   
    37.50
Terms 2/10, N/30    
     
—13th—
Paid freight on shipment to    
Henry Cook    
Ck. No. 11 3.65  
Charge to Cook    
     
—13th—
Deposited cash   824.45
     
—13th—
Sold to S. H. Allen, Mason City, Ia.    
30 men's pants 1.75 52.50
Terms 2/10, N/20    
     
—14th—
Paid Adler & Co.    
Ck. No. 12   303.12
Discount   9.38
     
—15th—
Sold to Marx & Sons, Charles City, Ia.    
10 boys' suits 2.00 20.00
10 men's suits 7.00 70.00
   
Terms 2/10, N/30   90.00
     
—15th—
Received from H. A. Branch    
Cash   52.50
     
—15th—
Received from Larson & Anderson    
Cash   78.75
52     
—16th—
Paid H. D. Snyder    
1 week's salary   $37.50
Ck. No. 13    
     
—16th—
Paid H. D. Snyder    
Traveling expenses   17.65
Ck. No. 14    
     
—16th—
Deposited cash on hand   131.25
     
—16th—
Paid D. E. Jenkins    
For cartage on shipments   2.50
Ck. No. 15    

EXERCISE

1. Prepare a trial balance of the ledger as it would appear after posting these transactions.

1. Prepare a trial balance of the ledger as it would look after posting these transactions.

2. Assuming that gross trading profits average the same per cent of selling prices as in former transactions of this business house, find approximate inventory at close of business Feb. 16th.

2. Assuming that gross trading profits average the same percentage of selling prices as in previous transactions of this business, estimate the inventory at the end of business on February 16th.

3. Prepare trading and profit and loss account, based on this inventory.

3. Prepare the trading and profit and loss account based on this inventory.

53

Order and Sales Records

Orders and Sales Records

54

Order and Sales Records

Orders and Sales Records

55

Order and Sales Records

Orders and Sales Records

56

Order and Sales Records

Order and Sales Data

57

Departmental Abstract of Sales

Sales Department Summary

58

Cash Received Book

Cash Receipt Log

ONE OF THE ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURING PLANTS OF THE FAIRBANKS-MORSE COMPANY

ONE OF THE ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURING PLANTS OF THE FAIRBANKS-MORSE COMPANY

59

Check Register and Cash Expenditure Book

Check Register and Cash Expenditure Book

60

COMMISSION AND BROKERAGE BUSINESS

30. Commission or brokerage is the business of buying and selling goods for another. The commission merchant or broker acts in the capacity of agent, charging a stated per cent or commission for his services.

30. Commission or brokerage is the business of buying and selling goods for someone else. The commission merchant or broker acts as an agent, charging a specified percentage or commission for their services.

Certain commodities are sold on the market at the best prices obtainable, the prices depending upon the condition of the market—the supply and demand. Since it would be both inconvenient and unprofitable for each seller to accompany his own wares to market, he avails himself of the services of the commission merchant. The class of goods most largely dealt in by commission merchants is farm produce, shipped to the cities by both producers and country dealers.

Certain products are sold in the market at the best possible prices, which rely on the state of the market—the supply and demand. Since it would be both impractical and unprofitable for every seller to bring their products to market themselves, they use the services of a commission merchant. The type of goods most commonly handled by commission merchants is agricultural produce, sent to the cities by both producers and local dealers.

The practice of shipping produce to the broker to be sold on commission is gradually falling into disuse. As the business is now conducted, the commission merchant buys the produce outright and takes his own chances of making a profit, and thus his business becomes also that of a wholesaler.

The practice of sending produce to the broker to sell on commission is gradually becoming outdated. Nowadays, the commission merchant buys the produce outright and takes his own chances of making a profit, which means his business also functions as a wholesaler.

MERCHANDISE BROKER

31. Certain classes of merchandise are marketed through the medium of brokers styling themselves merchandise brokers. Their business is usually transacted on a larger scale than that of the ordinary commission merchant. The merchandise broker sells in large quantities—as salt by the car load.

31. Some types of goods are sold through brokers who call themselves merchandise brokers. They typically operate on a much larger scale than regular commission merchants. The merchandise broker sells in bulk—like salt by the trainload.

The distinction between the commission merchant and the broker lies in the fact that the commission merchant has the goods to be sold actually in his possession, while the broker acts as agent for the purchase and sale of goods which he does not actually handle.

The difference between the commission merchant and the broker is that the commission merchant physically has the goods to sell, while the broker acts as an agent for buying and selling goods that he doesn't physically handle.

MANUFACTURER'S AGENT

32. One distinct class of brokers is the sales agent or manufacturer's agent. He is a broker who sells goods for the manufacturer, usually by sample. As a rule the manufacturer sets the prices and determines the terms of credit. The goods are sold in the name of the manufacturer who carries the accounts on his books, paying the agent a commission for his services. In some cases, however, the manufacturer's agent maintains his own warehouse, issues a warehouse receipt for the goods which are shipped to him, and even 61advances money to the manufacturer. He then becomes virtually a commission merchant. He holds the goods as security for the money advanced, and, when sold, collects the money and remits the balance of the net proceeds the same as the ordinary commission merchant.

32. One unique type of broker is the sales agent or manufacturer's agent. This person sells products for the manufacturer, usually using samples. Typically, the manufacturer sets the prices and decides on the credit terms. The sales are made under the manufacturer's name, who keeps the accounts, paying the agent a commission for their services. However, in some situations, the manufacturer's agent has their own warehouse, issues a warehouse receipt for the goods shipped to them, and may even advance money to the manufacturer. In this case, they effectively act like a commission merchant. They hold the goods as collateral for the money advanced and, upon selling, collect the payment and send the remaining net proceeds back, just like a regular commission merchant.

SHIPMENTS

33. When a principal sends goods to a commission merchant or broker to be sold on commission, it is called a shipment. As soon as the goods are sent, an account is opened with the shipment, and the shipment is designated by the name of the consignee, a number, or the name of the place—as Shipment to Richard Roe. If more than one shipment is made to a commission merchant an account should be opened for each one in order that the gain or loss can be determined for individual shipments. The separate accounts should be designated by number—as Richard Roe, shipment No. 2.

33. When a principal sends goods to a commission merchant or broker to sell on commission, it's called a shipment. As soon as the goods are sent, an account is created for the shipment, which is labeled with the name of the consignee, a number, or the location—like Shipment to Richard Roe. If there are multiple shipments to a commission merchant, an account should be opened for each one so that profits or losses can be assessed for each individual shipment. The separate accounts should be identified by number—like Richard Roe, shipment No. 2.

The shipment, when made, is entered in the same way as a sale, and the items are charged at cost price. The account is also charged with any expense incurred on account of the shipment. When the Account Sales is received, the account is credited with the net proceeds. It now shows either a profit or a loss which is transferred by a journal entry to an account called Profit and Loss on Shipments. This account is, in turn, closed into profit and loss when the books are closed.

The shipment, once completed, is recorded like a sale, and the items are billed at their cost price. The account is also charged for any expenses related to the shipment. When the Account Sales arrives, the account is credited with the net proceeds. It will then reflect either a profit or a loss, which is then transferred by a journal entry to an account called Profit and Loss on Shipments. This account is subsequently closed into profit and loss when the books are finalized.

If at the time of closing the books there are any outstanding shipments on which Account Sales have not been received, the debit balances represent assets the same as inventory of merchandise on hand.

If, at the time of closing the books, there are any outstanding shipments for which Account Sales haven't been received, the debit balances are considered assets just like the inventory of merchandise on hand.

34. Agents' or Factors' Account. If the Account Sales, when received, is accompanied by a remittance to cover net proceeds, cash is debited and the shipment account credited for the amount. When a remittance is not received with the Account Sales, the shipment account is credited with net proceeds and the amount is charged to a new account opened in the name of the consignee as Agent or Bailee or Factor—as Richard Roe, Agent, or Richard Roe, Bailee, which is treated as a personal account. This does not mean that Richard Roe is a debtor in the ordinary sense of the term, but that he holds funds in trust; and in case of his failure, the shipper could 62recover full value instead of being obliged to accept his pro rata share of the assets.

34. Agents' or Factors' Account. When the Account Sales is received along with a payment for the net proceeds, we debit cash and credit the shipment account for the amount. If the payment isn’t received with the Account Sales, we credit the shipment account with the net proceeds and charge a new account opened in the name of the consignee as Agent or Bailee or Factor—like Richard Roe, Agent or Richard Roe, Bailee, which is treated as a personal account. This doesn’t mean that Richard Roe is a debtor in the usual sense, but that he is holding funds in trust; if he fails, the shipper can recover the full value instead of only getting their share of the assets.

A CONSIGNMENT

35. When a broker receives a shipment of goods to be sold on commission, it is known as a consignment. He opens a memorandum account by entering a list of the goods, but without extending any amounts. He has not purchased the goods, but simply holds them for sale as agent of the shipper. If there are any charges against the consignment, as freight, cartage, or storage charges, an account is opened in the name of the consignor. The title would be John Doe's Consignment, and if more than one consignment is received from John Doe a separate account is opened for each. This account is debited for all charges, and as sales are made they are credited to the account. When all of the goods have been sold, the broker renders the consignor a statement, known as an Account Sales, showing sales, expenses, and net proceeds.

35. When a broker gets a shipment of goods to sell on commission, it’s called a consignment. He creates a memo account where he lists the goods but doesn’t assign any values. He hasn’t bought the goods; he’s just holding them to sell as the agent of the shipper. If there are any costs related to the consignment, like freight, delivery, or storage fees, an account is set up under the consignor’s name. The title would be John Doe's Consignment, and if multiple consignments come from John Doe, a separate account is created for each one. This account is charged for all costs, and as sales happen, the amounts are credited to the account. Once all the goods are sold, the broker provides the consignor with a statement called an Account Sales, detailing the sales, expenses, and net proceeds.

If, when the books are closed, there are on hand any consignments, or parts of consignments, unsold, the consignment accounts are left open and represent either assets or liabilities. If expenses have been debited and no sales credited, the account will show a debit balance representing an asset. If sales have been credited in excess of the expense charges, the credit balance will represent a liability. When an Account Sales has been rendered, the account will balance, the net proceeds having been either remitted or credited to the consignor.

If, when the books are closed, there are any consignments or parts of consignments that haven't been sold, the consignment accounts remain open and represent either assets or liabilities. If expenses have been charged but no sales have been credited, the account will show a debit balance representing an asset. If sales have been credited more than the expense charges, the credit balance will represent a liability. Once an Account Sales has been issued, the account will balance, and the net proceeds will have either been sent or credited to the consignor.

36. Principal's Account. If the broker remits the net proceeds at the time of rendering the Account Sales, he debits the consignment and credits cash, or bills payable as the case may be. But if he renders an Account Sales without remitting, he opens an account with the consignor, as John Doe, Principal, or John Doe, Bailor, and credits the account with the net proceeds, debiting the consignment account. The title of the account shows that he is not an ordinary debtor to John Doe, but that the amount of the credit represents funds belonging to John Doe and held in trust by the broker. In case of his failure the account of John Doe, Principal, would have to be paid before the claims of ordinary creditors.

36. Principal's Account. If the broker sends the net proceeds when providing the Account Sales, he debits the consignment and credits cash or bills payable, depending on the situation. However, if he provides an Account Sales without sending the money, he creates an account for the consignor as John Doe, Principal, or John Doe, Bailor, and credits the account with the net proceeds while debiting the consignment account. The account title indicates that he is not just a regular debtor to John Doe, but that the credited amount represents money that belongs to John Doe and is held in trust by the broker. If the broker fails, John Doe, Principal's account must be settled before any claims from regular creditors.

6337. Commission Account. All sums received by the broker for services rendered in connection with the sale of goods for a shipper are credited to a commission account. When the books are closed this account is closed into profit and loss.

6337. Commission Account. All amounts received by the broker for services provided related to selling goods for a shipper are recorded in a commission account. When the accounting period ends, this account is transferred to profit and loss.

PRODUCE SHIPPER'S BOOKS

38. The most common branch of the commission business is that of shipping and selling produce. The books used vary somewhat from those used by a manufacturer's agent selling to jobbers, but the principles are the same.

38. The most common type of commission business is shipping and selling produce. The accounting books used are a bit different from those used by a manufacturer's agent selling to wholesalers, but the basic principles remain the same.

Two Column Shipment Book

Two-Column Shipping Log

Sometimes the same man conducts both the business of shipper and broker, buying certain goods which he in turn ships to other brokers to be sold for his account. In the produce commission business, however, the shipper is usually a buyer, located in the country, who buys produce from the farmer and ships to a commission merchant in the city.

Sometimes the same person handles both shipping and brokering, purchasing certain goods that they then send to other brokers to sell on their behalf. In the produce commission business, though, the shipper is typically a buyer based in the countryside, who buys produce from farmers and ships it to a commission merchant in the city.

The books required by the shipper are purchase book, shipment book, shipment ledger, cash book, journal, and general ledger.

The books needed by the shipper are purchase book, shipment book, shipment ledger, cash book, journal, and general ledger.

39. Purchase Book. This book is of the same form as used in other businesses, with as many columns as may be desired to separate purchases of different classes of produce.

39. Purchase Book. This book is formatted like those used in other businesses, with as many columns as needed to separate purchases of different types of produce.

6440. Shipment Book. This is the book of original entry for shipments in which each shipment is recorded in detail, showing each item, with prices (usually at cost) extended. The book can be ruled with columns for segregating shipments of different classes of produce. The total of each shipment is posted to the debit of the individual shipment account in the shipment ledger. The footings of the columns are carried forward to the end of the month when they are posted to the credit of shipment accounts in the general ledger. These general ledger shipment accounts are opened for each class of produce for which a separate record is desired, and correspond to the sale account of a mercantile business.

6440. Shipment Book. This is the original log for shipments where each shipment is recorded in detail, listing each item along with prices (usually at cost). The book can have columns to separate shipments by different types of produce. The total for each shipment is entered as a debit in the individual shipment account in the shipment ledger. The totals of the columns are carried forward to the end of the month when they are posted as credits to the shipment accounts in the general ledger. These general ledger shipment accounts are created for each type of produce that needs separate records, corresponding to the sales account of a retail business.

At the end of the month the total of all shipments is posted to the debit of a controlling account in the general ledger known as shipment ledger account.

At the end of the month, the total of all shipments is recorded as a debit in a controlling account in the general ledger called the shipment ledger account.

If more than one class of produce is shipped to an agent at the same time it is best to make invoices for each, treating them as independent shipments. Each package should bear a number or other mark by which it can be identified as belonging to a particular shipment.

If you’re sending multiple classes of produce to an agent at the same time, it’s better to create separate invoices for each, treating them as individual shipments. Each package should have a number or another mark to identify it as part of a specific shipment.

41. Shipment Ledger. An ordinary ledger can be used or a special form prepared. Since the debit side of the account will require much the greater amount of space, special forms are quite desirable. A convenient form is illustrated on page 55.

41. Shipment Ledger. You can use a regular ledger or create a special form. Since the debit side of the account will take up much more space, special forms are definitely helpful. A handy form is shown on page 55.

42. Cash Book. Tabular cash books with special arrangement of the column headings are used. The special features are the column on the credit side headed shipment expense, and the debit column headed shipment ledger. The shipment expense column is for the expenses paid on each shipment. Expenses are posted direct to the debit of the individual shipment accounts, and at the end of the month the total expense is posted to the debit of the shipment ledger controlling account. The shipment ledger column is for net proceeds remitted with account sales. The amounts are posted to the credit of shipment accounts, and the total is posted at the end of the month to the credit of shipment ledger controlling account.

42. Cash Book. We use tabular cash books with a specific arrangement of column headings. The standout features are the column on the credit side labeled shipment expense and the debit column labeled shipment ledger. The shipment expense column tracks the costs associated with each shipment. Expenses are recorded directly as debit in the individual shipment accounts, and at the end of the month, the total expense is recorded as debit in the shipment ledger controlling account. The shipment ledger column is used for the net proceeds sent along with account sales. Those amounts are recorded as credit in the shipment accounts, and the total is recorded at the end of the month as credit in the shipment ledger controlling account.

The sundries column is for receipts other than remittances with account sales—as payments by agents who have not remitted with account sales.

The sundries column is for receipts other than remittances with account sales—like payments from agents who haven’t sent in remittances with account sales.

65

Shipment Ledger for Commission Business

Shipping Ledger for Commission Business

66

Cash Journal for Commission Business

Commission Business Cash Journal

6743. Shipment Ledger Account. This is the controlling account of the shipment ledger. It is charged with total shipments through the shipment book; with advance expenses through cash book or journal; credited with net proceeds through cash book or journal. It must also be charged with profits on shipments, or it will not represent the total balance of shipment ledger.

6743. Shipment Ledger Account. This is the main account for the shipment ledger. It records total shipments from the shipment book; it includes advance expenses from the cash book or journal; and it is credited with net proceeds from the cash book or journal. It also needs to account for profits on shipments, or it won’t accurately reflect the total balance of the shipment ledger.

When net proceeds are credited, the individual shipment account should be charged, through the journal, with the net profit, which is credited to Profit and Loss on Shipments. A special credit column is provided in the journal for profits, or if a record of profits on each class of produce is desired, two or more columns are provided. Monthly totals are posted to the credit of profit and loss on shipment account, or to more than one such account—as profit on poultry, profit on butter and eggs, etc. The total of all profit columns, which represents debits to shipment accounts, is charged to shipment ledger account.

When net proceeds are credited, the individual shipment account should be charged, through the journal, with the net profit, which is credited to Profit and Loss on Shipments. A special credit column is included in the journal for profits, or if a record of profits for each type of produce is needed, two or more columns are used. Monthly totals are recorded as credits to the profit and loss on shipment account, or to more than one such account—like profit on poultry, profit on butter and eggs, etc. The total of all profit columns, which represents debits to shipment accounts, is charged to the shipment ledger account.

It is to be supposed that losses will be few, and when one is incurred the entries should be made through the journal. The amount will be charged to profit and loss on shipment account and credited to both the individual shipment account and shipment ledger account.

It’s expected that losses will be minimal, and when one occurs, the entries should be recorded in the journal. The amount will be charged to the profit and loss on the shipment account and credited to both the individual shipment account and the shipment ledger account.

44. Journal. As already explained, the journal should be provided with extra columns for profits on each class of shipment.

44. Journal. As mentioned before, the journal should include additional columns for profits from each type of shipment.

When an agent transmits an account sales without a cash remittance, the transaction must be journalized to close the shipment account. When proceeds are to be charged to his account, the entry is:

When an agent sends account sales without sending cash, the transaction must be recorded to close the shipment account. When the proceeds are to be charged to their account, the entry is:

Dr. Cr. Cr.
Richard Roe, Agt. $160.00    
To Shipment Ledger      
Richard Roe Shipment No. 1   $160.00  
Richard Roe, Shipment No. 1 18.00    
To Profit and Loss on Shipments     $18.00

If a note to cover net proceeds is received, the entry is the same except that Bills Receivable is debited instead of Richard Roe, Agt.

If a note to cover net proceeds is received, the entry is the same except that Bills Receivable is debited instead of Richard Roe, Agt.

When a loss is incurred the entry is:

When a loss occurs, the entry is:

Dr.    
Profit and Loss on Shipments $18.00    
To Shipment Ledger Account      
Richard Roe Shipment No. 1     $18.00

and postings will be made direct to all accounts affected.

and postings will be made directly to all accounts involved.

68

TREATMENT OF ACTUAL SALES

45. The shipper may sell a portion of his produce outright, and if a large share of his business is transacted in this manner, sales can be treated exactly the same as though he was not engaged in a commission business, with separate sales book and sales ledger.

45. The shipper can sell some of his products outright, and if a big part of his business is done this way, those sales can be handled just like he wasn't involved in a commission business, with a separate sales record and sales ledger.

Most shippers, however, will not find it necessary to segregate sales to this extent. Sales can be charged to shipment accounts in the shipment ledger, but will of course be charged at a profit, and credited to shipment account in general ledger. Payments on these accounts will be entered in the cash book as net proceeds.

Most shippers, however, won't find it necessary to separate sales to this extent. Sales can be recorded in the shipment accounts in the shipment ledger, but they will, of course, be recorded at a profit and credited to the shipment account in the general ledger. Payments on these accounts will be entered in the cash book as net proceeds.

SHIPPER'S TRADING ACCOUNT

46. The trading account of the shipper is made up somewhat differently than for a mercantile business where all sales are supposed to be entered at a profit.

46. The trading account of the shipper is structured somewhat differently than for a retail business where all sales are expected to be recorded at a profit.

If all his produce is sold through commission merchants, and the inventory of produce in stock exactly equals the difference between purchases and shipments, the account, profit and loss on shipments represents the trading profit. But this state of affairs seldom if ever exists. Either there will have been outright sales or a discrepancy will appear in the inventory. The latter is usually the case in a produce business, for some value will be lost owing to the perishable nature of the goods handled.

If all his produce is sold through commission merchants, and the inventory of produce in stock perfectly matches the difference between purchases and shipments, the account, profit and loss on shipments, reflects the trading profit. However, this scenario rarely, if ever, happens. There will either be direct sales or a mismatch in the inventory. The latter situation is usually found in a produce business because some value will be lost due to the perishable nature of the goods involved.

The trading account is charged with all purchases and inventory, if any, at beginning of the period, and credited with all shipments and inventory at end of period.

The trading account is charged for all purchases and inventory, if any, at the start of the period, and credited for all shipments and inventory at the end of the period.

The trading account now exhibits the true trading profits with a complete segregation of profits from actual sales and commission sales. The inventory does not include outstanding shipments, these being treated as a separate item in the balance sheet.

The trading account now shows the actual trading profits, clearly separating profits from real sales and commission sales. The inventory doesn’t account for outstanding shipments, which are listed as a separate item on the balance sheet.

TRADING a/c
To Purchases $10,000 00 By shipments $9,000 00
           
Profit on Sales 465 00 " Inventory 1,465 00
  $10,465 00      
      By Profit on Sales $465 00
69

SAMPLE TRANSACTIONS

47. The following transactions, taken from the books of John Doe, shipper of poultry and butter and eggs, illustrate the books and accounts used.

47. The following transactions, taken from the records of John Doe, a supplier of poultry, butter, and eggs, demonstrate the accounting books and accounts used.

—Nov. 1, 1908—
 
Commenced business with a    
cash investment of   $1,000.00
 
—1st—
 
Bought for cash    
200# chickens @ .11½ 23.00
100# ducks @ .13 13.00
 
—1st—
 
Bought from    
Henry Meyers    
400# turkeys @ .16 64.00
 
—2nd—
 
Shipped to    
Richard Roe, to be sold on my a/c    
220# chickens @ .11½ 25.30
98# ducks @ .13 12.74
 
—2nd—
 
Ctg. and Exp. on above    
paid in cash   2.25
 
—3rd—
 
Bought for cash    
100 cs. eggs, 3,000 doz. @ .16 480.00
 
—3rd—
 
Shipped to    
Richard Roe to be sold on my a/c    
95 cs. eggs, 2,850 doz. @ .16 456.00
 
—3rd—
 
Sold to Johnson & Sons on a/c    
5 cases eggs, 150 doz. @ .20 30.00
 
70 —4th—
 
Shipped to Richard Roe to be sold    
on my a/c 200# turkeys @ .16 $32.00
 
—4th—
 
Paid freight on eggs to Roe   2.98
 
—4th—
 
Paid freight on turkeys to Roe   1.80
 
—5th—
 
Received from Richard Roe    
Account Sales for Shipment No. 1    
Net proceeds remitted in cash   47.73
 
—6th—
 
Received from Richard Roe    
Account sales for shipment No. 2    
Net proceeds retained by him   518.12
 
—6th—
 
Paid for labor    
cash   9.00

Shipment Book

Shipping Log

71

Columnar Purchase Book and Journal

Purchase Ledger and Journal

72

Cash Journal for Commission Business

Commission Business Cash Journal

73

Shipper's Purchase and Shipment Ledger

Shipping Purchase and Shipment Record

74

Shipper's General Ledger

Shipper's Accounting Ledger

THE ADMINISTRATION BUILDING OF THE MINNEAPOLIS STEEL & MACHINERY CO., MINNEAPOLIS, MINN.

THE ADMINISTRATION BUILDING OF THE MINNEAPOLIS STEEL & MACHINERY CO., MINNEAPOLIS, MINN.

75

Shipper's General Ledger

Shipper's Finance Record

76

EXERCISE

48. On a certain date a trial balance of the ledger of Henry Donnely, shipper of produce, stood as follows:

48. On a specific date, a trial balance of the ledger belonging to Henry Donnelly, produce shipper, was as follows:

DEBITS
 
Purchases of apples   $1,264.00
Purchases of potatoes   1,500.00
Shipment Ledger Account   736.00
Cash   450.00
 
CREDITS
 
Shipment Account—apples   1,200.00
Shipment Account—potatoes   1,200.00
Profit on Shipments—apples   250.00
Profit on Shipments—potatoes   350.00
Accounts Payable   950.00
 
During a subsequent period, his transactions were as follows:
 
Cash purchases of apples   1,000.00
Cash purchases of potatoes   1,000.00
Shipments of apples   900.00
Shipments of potatoes   1,100.00
Profits on apples   100.00
Profits on potatoes   200.00
Account Sales for which cash was received   1,800.00
Account sales charged to Agts.   600.00
Shipment Ledger Account decreased   100.00
Sundry expenses paid in cash   50.00
 
Inventory at end of period    
Apples 210.00  
Potatoes 190.00 400.00

Prepare trading and profit and loss accounts showing net profits or losses on both apples and potatoes for the entire period represented by the accounts.

Prepare trading and profit and loss statements that show net profits or losses on both apples and potatoes for the entire period covered by the accounts.

77

COMMISSION MERCHANTS' BOOKS

49. The books required by a produce commission merchant are receiving book, cash book, consignment ledger, sales book, sales ledger, journal, and general ledger. If he buys produce to be sold on his own account, he also requires a purchase book and purchase ledger.

49. The books a produce commission merchant needs are a receiving book, cash book, consignment ledger, sales book, sales ledger, journal, and general ledger. If he buys produce to sell on his own, he also needs a purchase book and purchase ledger.

50. The Receiving Book. This is usually a rough blotter with ordinary day book ruling, though some merchants use special forms.

50. The Receiving Book. This is typically a basic blotter with standard day book lines, although some merchants opt for specialized forms.

When a consignment is received it is given a lot number and entered in this book in the name of the shipper, but without extending the amounts. If any expenses have been incurred, an account is opened immediately in the consignment ledger in the name of the shipper.

When a shipment arrives, it's assigned a lot number and recorded in this book under the shipper's name, but without listing the amounts. If any costs have been incurred, an account is set up right away in the consignment ledger under the shipper's name.

51. The Cash Book. On the credit side of the cash book, under the general heading consignment ledger, are three columns, headed net proceeds, expense, and commission. The commission column is a memorandum column only, the total being posted, at the end of the month, to the credit of commission account in the general ledger.

51. The Cash Book. On the credit side of the cash book, under the general heading consignment ledger, there are three columns labeled net proceeds, expense, and commission. The commission column is just a record column; the total is transferred, at the end of the month, to the commission account in the general ledger.

Net proceeds, expense, and commission on each consignment are posted as separate items to the debit of that particular consignment account. At the end of the month, the total of these three columns is posted to the debit of consignment ledger account in the general ledger.

Net proceeds, expenses, and commissions for each consignment are recorded as separate items debited to that specific consignment account. At the end of the month, the totals from these three columns are posted to the debit of the consignment ledger account in the general ledger.

52. Sales Book. The sales book is provided with special columns for sales and consignment sales. The sales column represents sales of the merchants' own goods, the totals being posted at the end of the month to the credit of sales account in the general ledger and to the debit of the sales ledger account.

52. Sales Book. The sales book has specific columns for sales and consignment sales. The sales column shows the sales of the merchants' own products, with the totals being recorded at the end of the month as a credit to the sales account in the general ledger and as a debit to the sales ledger account.

The consignment sales are listed by lot number and posted to the credit of the consignment accounts. As the lot numbers run consecutively in the receiving book, this furnishes an index to the consignment accounts. The totals of the consignment sales columns are posted to the credit of consignment ledger account, and the consignment ledger column is posted to the debit of sales ledger account.

The consignment sales are listed by lot number and credited to the consignment accounts. Since the lot numbers follow one after another in the receiving book, this provides a reference for the consignment accounts. The totals from the consignment sales columns are credited to the consignment ledger account, and the consignment ledger column is debited from the sales ledger account.

53. Consignment Ledger. This ledger contains accounts with every consignment received. The accounts are charged with expenses, net proceeds, and commissions from the cash book, and credited with sales from the sales book. If a remittance is not sent with the Account Sales, the necessary entry is made in the journal, 78charging both consignment account and consignment ledger account and crediting the shipper as principal—or bills payable account when a note is sent.

53. Consignment Ledger. This ledger holds accounts for every consignment received. The accounts are debited with expenses, net proceeds, and commissions from the cash book, and credited with sales from the sales book. If a payment is not sent with the Account Sales, the necessary entry is made in the journal, 78debiting both the consignment account and the consignment ledger account and crediting the shipper as the principal—or the bills payable account if a note is sent.

54. Consignment Ledger Account. This is a controlling account which receives its debits and credits from the same sources as do the consignment accounts. Except in the case of journal entries, totals only are posted at the end of the month.

54. Consignment Ledger Account. This is a control account that receives its debits and credits from the same sources as the consignment accounts. Except for journal entries, only the totals are posted at the end of the month.

PURCHASE AND SALE OF OWN GOODS

55. When the commission merchant is also a wholesaler, the purchases and sales are treated on the books exactly as they would be if he was not a commission merchant. The books and accounts required are the same as those of any other wholesale merchant.

55. When the commission merchant is also a wholesaler, the purchases and sales are recorded in the books just as they would be if he weren't a commission merchant. The books and accounts needed are the same as those of any other wholesale merchant.

SAMPLE TRANSACTION

56. The following transactions include the shipments used in the last model set, but treated from the standpoint of the commission merchant.

56. The following transactions include the shipments used in the last model set, but looked at from the perspective of the commission merchant.

—Nov. 3, 1908—
Received from John Doe to be  
sold for his account:  
220# chickens  
98# ducks  
Lot No. 1  
 
—4th—
Received from John Doe to be  
sold for his account  
95 cs. eggs, 2,850 doz.  
Lot No. 2.  
 
—4th—
Sold for cash  
100# chickens (Lot 1) @ .16 $16.00
 
—4th—
Sold to Sweet & Co. on a/c  
110# chickens (Lot 1) @ .16 17.60
 
—4th—
Sold for cash  
100# ducks (Lot 1) @ .17¼ 17.25
 
79 —4th—
Paid expense on lot #1 $1.60
 
—4th—
Rendered Account Sales, with  
remittance for Lot #1, commission 3%  
 
—5th—
Sold for cash  
20 cs. eggs., 600 doz., @ .18 (Lot 2) 108.00
 
—5th—
Sold to Gaston & Co., 156 Hammond St.  
20 cs. eggs., 600 doz., @ .20 (Lot 2) 120.00
 
—5th—
Sold to Francis & Gates, 948 37th St.  
30 cs. eggs, 900 doz., @ .19 (Lot 2) 171.00
 
—5th—
Sold to H. B. Niles, 364 Fuller Ave.  
25 cases eggs, 750 doz. @ .19 (Lot 2) 142.50
 
—5th—
Paid expense on Lot #2 7.13
 
—5th—
Rendered account sales for  
Lot #2, commission 3%, crediting  
amount to shippers' account.  
 
—5th—
Received from John Doe to be  
sold for his account  
200# Turkeys  
Lot #3  
 
—5th—
Paid expense on Lot #3 1.25
80

Commission Merchant's Receiving Book, Journal and Sales Book

Commission Merchant's Receiving Book, Journal, and Sales Book

81

Commission Merchant's Cash Journal

Commission Merchant's Cash Log

82

Commission Merchant's Consignment and Sales Ledgers

Commission Merchant's Consignment and Sales Ledgers

83

Commission Merchant's General Ledger

Commission Merchant's General Ledger

84

EXERCISE

57. During a certain period a commission merchant transacted the following business:

57. At one point, a commission merchant handled the following transactions:

Purchased goods on his own account $3,000.00
Sold goods on commission 5,000.00
Sold his own goods 2,500.00
Commissions earned 150.00
Received cash for goods sold 6,250.00
Paid expenses on consignments 37.50
Rendered account sales with which cash was  
remitted to cover net proceeds 2,712.50
Rendered account sales on which net proceeds  
were credited to the account of principals 2,000.00
Paid cash on account of goods purchased 2,200.00
Paid cash for sundry expenses 75.00
Inventory of goods owned at the close of the period 800.00

Prepare trading and profit and loss accounts and balance sheet.

Prepare trading, profit and loss accounts, and balance sheet.

STORAGE

58. Storage, as here used, is the business of furnishing storage for merchandise on its way to market until such time as it is sold and delivered to the purchaser. The source of supply and customs of the trade in certain classes of merchandise render the question of storage an important one. This is particularly true of the grain trade. Large buyers of grain, located in important distributing centers which have become the principal grain markets owing to their manufacturing or transportation facilities, locate their buyers in the grain producing sections to buy grain from the producers. At these points are located small grain handling plants or elevators, where the grain is received from the farmers and shipped to the distributing centers.

58. Storage, as used here, refers to the process of providing space for goods that are on their way to market until they are sold and delivered to the buyer. The sources of supply and practices in certain types of goods make storage an important issue. This is especially true in the grain trade. Major grain buyers, situated in key distribution hubs that have become the main grain markets due to their manufacturing or transportation capabilities, find their suppliers in the grain-producing areas to purchase grain directly from the producers. In these locations, there are small grain handling plants or elevators where the grain is received from farmers and then shipped to the distribution centers.

Here, extensive storage facilities must be provided, that these shipments, aggregating enormous quantities of grain, may be held until the condition of the market is favorable for selling. If it were not for this custom of storage it would be necessary to market all of the grain—except the small quantities stored by the farmers—soon after harvest, which would result in lowering prices to all concerned, from the farmer up.

Here, large storage facilities need to be available so that these shipments, which contain huge amounts of grain, can be held until the market conditions are right for selling. Without this practice of storage, all the grain—except for the small amounts kept by farmers—would have to be sold soon after harvest, which would drive prices down for everyone involved, from the farmers on up.

85These conditions have resulted in the organization of warehousing companies to provide storage for the owners. When grain, or other classes of merchandise, is received for storage a warehouse receipt is issued, and the merchandise will not be delivered without the presentation of the receipt. Warehouse receipts are negotiable and since they are evidence of the ownership of certain merchandise stored in a warehouse, bankers will loan money to the owner and accept the warehouse receipt as security.

85These conditions have led to the establishment of warehousing companies to offer storage for owners. When grain or other types of goods are received for storage, a warehouse receipt is issued, and the goods will not be released without presenting the receipt. Warehouse receipts are negotiable, and since they serve as proof of ownership of specific merchandise stored in a warehouse, banks will lend money to the owner and accept the warehouse receipt as collateral.

Manufacturers and jobbers of certain products also find it necessary to store large quantities of their wares at distributing centers that they may promptly supply the trade. Another reason for this practice is a financial one. When a manufacturer exchanges his wares for a warehouse receipt, he can immediately borrow on its security, thus securing capital to carry on his business until the regular selling season for his particular product.

Manufacturers and distributors of certain products also find it necessary to store large quantities of their goods at distribution centers so they can quickly supply the market. Another reason for this practice is financial. When a manufacturer trades his goods for a warehouse receipt, he can immediately borrow against it, securing capital to continue his business until the regular selling season for his specific product.

The merchandise broker and manufacturers' agent sometimes have their own warehouses and combine the business of buying and selling with that of storage and, if they possess sufficient capital, advance money to the manufacturer.

The merchandise broker and manufacturers' agent often have their own warehouses and merge the roles of buying and selling with storage. If they have enough capital, they also provide funding to the manufacturer.

Perishable products handled by the produce commission merchant are also stored in cold storage warehouses, both to preserve them and to hold for more favorable market conditions.

Perishable products managed by the produce commission merchant are also kept in cold storage warehouses, both to maintain their quality and to wait for better market conditions.

STORAGE ACCOUNTS

59. Storage charges are usually based on a 30 day period, though sometimes for shorter periods, and any period less than a full month is charged for at the 30 day rate.

59. Storage fees are typically calculated on a 30-day basis, although they can sometimes apply to shorter durations. Any time period less than a full month is charged at the 30-day rate.

The storage is frequently charged for the exact time that goods are in the warehouse, that is, the amount is figured for each amount withdrawn. The following example demonstrates this, storage being charged on each quantity withdrawn at the rate of 10c per case per month.

The storage is usually billed for the exact time that goods are in the warehouse, meaning the fee is calculated for each item taken out. The following example illustrates this: storage is charged on each quantity taken out at a rate of 10 cents per case per month.

Received Delivered Time Rate Amount
Nov. 15 600 cs. eggs Dec. 10 100 cs. 1 mo. 10c 10 00
                   
      Jan. 6 300 cs. 2 mo. 20c 60 00
                   
      Feb. 14 200 cs. 3 mo. 30c 60 00
          Total     130 00

86This is known as simple storage.

This is called basic storage.

Another method is to charge storage for the average time at a given rate per month of 30 days. This method is most commonly used when receipts and deliveries are frequent, and is called average storage. The following example demonstrates the method.

Another method is to charge for storage based on the average time at a specific rate per month of 30 days. This approach is most often used when there are frequent receipts and deliveries, and it’s referred to as average storage. The following example illustrates the method.

Date Receipts Deliveries Balance Time Amount Stored For One Day
Nov. 15 600 cs.   600 cs. 15 da. 9,000 cs.
Nov. 30 200 "   800 " 10 da. 8,000 "
Dec. 10   100 cs. 700 " 27 da. 17,900 "
Jan. 6   300 " 400 " 39 da. 15,600 "
Feb. 14   200 " 200 " 10 da. 2,000 "
Feb. 24   200 " 000 "      
    800 800     52,500  
Average for 1 mo. 1,750  
1,750 cs. @ 10¢ $175.00 (Amt. of charges)

SPECIAL RECORDS REQUIRED

60. One of the most important records required is a storage record showing receipts and deliveries. A special form is necessary and should be adapted to the requirements of the particular class of storage business in which it is to be used.

60. One of the essential records needed is a storage log that shows incoming and outgoing shipments. A specific form is required and should be tailored to meet the needs of the particular type of storage business it will be used for.

The form illustrated is typical in that it provides for a record of storage of any class of goods handled in packages. The storage charges are always shown so that a statement of the account can be made at any time. At the end of each month the storage charges extended during the month are debited, through the journal, to the personal accounts of the owners. The total of all such storage charges is credited to a storage account in the general ledger.

The form shown is standard since it keeps track of any type of goods stored in packages. The storage fees are always listed so that an account statement can be prepared at any time. At the end of each month, the storage fees accrued during the month are charged, through the journal, to the personal accounts of the owners. The total of all these storage fees is credited to a storage account in the general ledger.

When there are frequent receipts and deliveries, the owner should be given a detailed statement showing all changes in quantities and storage charges. Such a statement should be a transcript of the storage record. The form illustrated answers the requirements of simple storage.

When there are frequent pickups and drop-offs, the owner should receive a detailed statement that shows all changes in quantities and storage fees. This statement should be a copy of the storage record. The form provided meets the needs of basic storage.

87

Storage Record

Storage Log

88

Statement of Storage Charges

Storage Charge Statement

90

BIRD'S-EYE VIEW OF THE PLANT OF SWIFT & COMPANY, CHICAGO, ILL.

BIRD'S-EYE VIEW OF THE PLANT OF SWIFT & COMPANY, CHICAGO, IL.

91

SINGLE ENTRY BOOKKEEPING
COMPARATIVE STATEMENTS[3]

SINGLE ENTRY BOOKKEEPING

1. To this point all of the discussions in this work have related to the double entry system of bookkeeping, and all demonstrations have been carried out according to that system. The reason for this is that double entry is the best and the only satisfactory method of bookkeeping; it is the only method that fulfils the important function of bookkeeping by furnishing a true record of the results of all business transactions.

1. Until now, all the discussions in this work have focused on the double entry system of bookkeeping, and all examples have been done using that system. The reason for this is that double entry is the best and only reliable method of bookkeeping; it’s the only method that serves the crucial purpose of bookkeeping by providing an accurate record of the results of all business transactions.

3.  Copyright, 1909, by American School of Correspondence.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.Copyright, 1909, by American School of Correspondence.

It might appear that instruction in keeping books by the single entry method has no place in a modern treatise on bookkeeping; and if our purpose were to teach single entry as a method to be used, this would be true.

It may seem like teaching bookkeeping using the single entry method doesn’t fit into a modern guide on accounting; and if our goal was to promote single entry as a method to use, this would indeed be the case.

Single entry bookkeeping is not recommended as a method to be used in any business.

Single entry bookkeeping isn’t advised as a method for any business.

The only reason for introducing single entry is to show the student how to change a set of books from the antiquated single entry to a modern double entry system. Though inadequate, single entry is still used to some extent. It is more commonly found in small retail establishments, but occasionally encountered in the offices of corporations and manufacturing enterprises. The bookkeeper who is called upon to fill a position where this method is used must know how to keep books by single entry, that he may more clearly demonstrate the advantages of the double entry method.

The only reason for introducing single entry is to show students how to transform a set of books from the outdated single entry system to a modern double entry system. Although it’s not the best approach, single entry is still used to some extent. It’s more commonly found in small retail businesses, but can sometimes be seen in corporate and manufacturing offices. A bookkeeper who takes a job where this method is used needs to know how to manage books using single entry so they can better explain the benefits of the double entry method.

When the advantages of double entry are demonstrated, few employers will object to a change from single entry. In most offices where single entry is still used, the reasons which have prevented a change may be summed up as ignorance of the double entry method, or a fear that double entry will increase the work without a corresponding benefit. This latter idea is a misconception inherited 92from the days of the old time bookkeeper, who considered it necessary to laboriously journalize every transaction. While it may have possessed some merit at that time, it is no longer true. Modern ideas, improved forms of account books, labor saving devices, and short cuts without number have reduced the labor of bookkeeping to a minimum, and if any attempt at a proof of accuracy is made, double entry actually requires less labor than single entry.

When the benefits of double entry are shown, few employers will resist switching from single entry. In most offices still using single entry, the reasons for not changing can be summed up as a lack of understanding of the double entry method or a fear that double entry will create more work without any real benefit. This latter belief is a misconception carried over from the days of the old-fashioned bookkeeper, who thought it was essential to painstakingly log every transaction. While that might have had some truth back then, it isn't accurate anymore. Modern concepts, enhanced forms of accounting books, time-saving tools, and countless shortcuts have minimized the workload of bookkeeping, and if any effort is made to verify accuracy, double entry actually requires less work than single entry.

2. Distinctive Features of Single Entry. The distinctive feature of single entry is that only personal accounts are kept. When goods are sold or purchased, records are made of the transactions as they affect the persons to whom sold or from whom purchased. The records do not show the increase or decrease of any specific form of assets, like merchandise, for no property accounts are kept. An account is usually kept with cash, but this approaches double entry, for when a person pays money to the business, cash is debited and the person credited; and when money is paid out, cash is credited and the person debited.

2. Distinctive Features of Single Entry. The main characteristic of single entry accounting is that it only maintains personal accounts. When items are sold or bought, records are created for the transactions as they relate to the individuals involved in the sale or purchase. These records do not indicate any specific changes in asset types, like inventory, since no property accounts are maintained. An account is typically kept for cash, but this is somewhat similar to double entry accounting, because when someone pays money to the business, cash is debited, and the individual is credited; and when cash is paid out, cash is credited, and the individual is debited.

Sometimes, in a set of books otherwise kept by single entry, such accounts as merchandise, expense, and real estate are found, but when such accounts are introduced the books begin to take on double entry features.

Sometimes, in a collection of books that are usually maintained with single entry accounting, you can find accounts like merchandise, expenses, and real estate. However, when these types of accounts are added, the books start to adopt elements of double entry bookkeeping.

3. Books Used. The principal books of a single entry set usually consist of day book or journal, cash book, and ledger. Both the day book and cash book are books of original entry, from which transactions are posted direct to the ledger. Auxiliary books used are order book, bill book, and check book.

3. Books Used. The main books in a single entry system typically include a day book or journal, a cash book, and a ledger. Both the day book and cash book are original entry books from which transactions are directly posted to the ledger. Additional books used are the order book, bill book, and check book.

The day book or journal is the familiar two-column form, the left-hand column being used for debits and right-hand column for credits.

The day book or journal is the familiar two-column format, with the left column for debits and the right column for credits.

The cash book has two columns on each page, and these columns are used to separate the items affecting personal accounts, which are to be posted, and all other items, none of which are posted. See illustration.

The cash book has two columns on each page. One column is for items that affect personal accounts and need to be posted, while the other column is for all other items, which are not posted. See illustration.

The ledger is the same form as used in the double entry method.

The ledger is the same format as the one used in the double entry system.

The order book is usually the regular two-column journal form. In retail businesses it is used as a principal book, transactions being posted from it to the ledger. Sometimes the first column is used for prices, the extensions being made only when the order is filled.

The order book is typically in a standard two-column journal format. In retail businesses, it serves as a main book, with transactions recorded from it to the ledger. Often, the first column is designated for prices, and the details are filled in only after the order is completed.

The bill book is quite essential in a single entry set for the reason 93that no Bills Receivable and Bills Payable accounts are kept in the ledger.

The bill book is really important in a single entry system because there are no Bills Receivable and Bills Payable accounts in the ledger. 93

4. Rules for Debit and Credit. The rules for debit and credit are the same in single entry as in double entry, except that no debits and credits are recorded which do not effect persons or cash—when a cash account is kept. Briefly, these rules applying to single entry are:

4. Rules for Debit and Credit. The rules for debit and credit are the same in single entry as in double entry, except that no debits and credits are recorded that don't affect people or cash—when a cash account is maintained. In short, these rules for single entry are:

Debit the person
When he receives anything of value;
When you pay him cash.
Credit the person
When you receive anything of value;
When he pays you cash.
Debit cash
When you receive it.
Credit cash
When you part with it.

5. Posting. There is no difference between posting to a single entry ledger and one kept by the double entry method. However, the only accounts posted are personal accounts, and the ledger shows merely how much money the business owes to persons and how much money persons owe the business. A single entry ledger does not show the amount of our notes outstanding, or the amount of other persons' notes held by us. This information can be found only in the bill book. The ledger does not show the value of merchandise purchased or sold, expenses of the business, nor the amount of our investments in land, buildings, or other forms of property.

5. Posting. There’s no difference between posting to a single entry ledger and one that's kept using the double entry method. However, the only accounts that get posted are personal accounts, and the ledger simply indicates how much money the business owes to people and how much people owe the business. A single entry ledger doesn’t display the amount of our outstanding notes or the amount of other people's notes that we have. You can find this information only in the bill book. The ledger also doesn’t show the value of merchandise bought or sold, business expenses, or the amount of our investments in land, buildings, or other types of property.

6. Proprietor's Account. A proprietor's investment or capital account is kept in single entry just as it is in double entry. This may or may not include withdrawals. They may be recorded in a personal or private account, in which case the proprietor's account will exhibit the net investment in the business.

6. Proprietor's Account. A proprietor's investment or capital account is maintained in single entry just like it is in double entry. This might or might not include withdrawals. They can be recorded in a personal or private account, which means the proprietor's account will show the net investment in the business.

7. Proving the Work. Since but one side of each journal entry is posted, the two sides of the ledger will not agree as in double entry. Hence a trial balance is, strictly speaking, impossible. The only absolutely sure method of checking the accuracy of a single account in the ledger is to carefully check all postings; this is also true of double entry. But it is possible to prove that the correct totals have been posted in single entry, as it is in double entry. Since 94the ledger is never in balance as in double entry, the proof is not found by comparing the two sides of the ledger, but by comparing the difference between the two sides of the ledger, with the difference between debits and credits in the columns of books of original entry from which postings have been made. If the difference between debits and credits in the ledger agrees with the difference between debits and credits in the books of original entry, the work may be assumed to be correct.

7. Proving the Work. Since only one side of each journal entry is recorded, the two sides of the ledger won't match like they do in double entry. As a result, a trial balance is technically impossible. The only reliable way to verify the accuracy of a single account in the ledger is to carefully check all the postings; this is also true for double entry. However, it's possible to confirm that the correct totals have been posted in single entry, just like in double entry. Since the ledger never balances as it does in double entry, the proof isn't found by comparing the two sides of the ledger but by comparing the difference between the two sides of the ledger with the difference between debits and credits in the original entry books from which postings have been made. If the difference between debits and credits in the ledger matches the difference between debits and credits in the original entry books, the work can be considered correct.

To prove the work, first find the balances of all ledger accounts and enter the amounts in the debit and credit columns on journal paper—as for a trial balance. Foot and find the difference between the two columns. Next foot the order book, day book, cash book, or any other books from which posting is done, and list the totals which should be posted to debit and credit of ledger accounts. Foot and find the difference.

To prove the work, first find the balances of all ledger accounts and enter the amounts in the debit and credit columns on journal paper, just like for a trial balance. Add up the columns and find the difference between the two. Next, add up the order book, day book, cash book, or any other books used for posting, and list the totals that need to be posted to the debit and credit of ledger accounts. Add them up and find the difference.

SAMPLE TRANSACTIONS

8. For the first demonstration of single entry bookkeeping, we have selected a small retail business, using transactions which have been used to illustrate a double entry set. This set is kept in the most simple manner possible, the books used being journal, cash book, and ledger.

8. For the first demonstration of single-entry bookkeeping, we have chosen a small retail business, using transactions that have been used to illustrate a double-entry system. This system is kept as simple as possible, with the books being a journal, cash book, and ledger.

The business is opened by Wm. Webster on the 21st day of November, 190-. He is to conduct a retail grocery business and has rented a store from Wm. Bristol at a monthly rental of $30.00. His resources consist of cash, $600.00; a stock of groceries, $946.50; personal accounts due him as follows: Henry Norton $25.00, L. B. Jenkins $22.70. His liabilities consist of two accounts, as follows: Brewster & Co., $115.20; Warsaw Milling Co., $64.00. The opening entry recording the above, is made in the journal as in double entry, but only personal items are posted. Cash is transferred to the cash book.

The business was opened by Wm. Webster on November 21, 190-. He is running a retail grocery store and has rented a space from Wm. Bristol for a monthly fee of $30.00. His assets include cash of $600.00, a grocery inventory worth $946.50, and personal accounts receivable as follows: Henry Norton $25.00, L. B. Jenkins $22.70. His liabilities are two accounts: Brewster & Co. for $115.20 and Warsaw Milling Co. for $64.00. The opening entry documenting this information is recorded in the journal using double entry accounting, but only personal items are posted. Cash is recorded in the cash book.

CUTTING OFF DEPARTMENT IN THE PLANT OF THE UNION TWIST DRILL CO., ATHOL, MASS.

CUTTING OFF DEPARTMENT IN THE PLANT OF THE UNION TWIST DRILL CO., ATHOL, MASS.

95
 
—Nov. 21—
Sold to Henry Norton on account  
10# sugar 5½¢ $.55
2 cans corn   .25
1 can peas   .15
3# rice   .30
   
    1.25
 
—21—
Sold to John Smallwood on account  
5# butter   $1.00
4# lard   .50
1 doz. eggs   .25
   
    1.75
 
—21—
Cash sales   14.10
 
—22—
Sold to Harry Webster on account  
7 bars Lenox soap   .25
1 pkg. gold dust   .20
1 pkg. matches   .15
¼ bbl. flour   1.35
   
    1.95
 
—22—
Bought for cash  
10 doz. eggs .21 2.10
 
—23—
Bought from H. Kling & Co. on account  
244# hams .12½ 22.50
201# lard .07½ 15.08
   
    45.58
 
—23—
Sold to F. W. Bradley on account  
2 bu. potatoes   1.60
 
—23—
Sold to C. D. Glover on account  
1 bbl. apples   3.25
5 gal. vinegar   1.25
   
    4.50
 
—23—
Cash sales   13.20
 
96—24—
Sold to A. C. Maybury on account  
1# bkg. powder   $.50
1# corn starch   .10
1# soda   .10
1 pkg. jello   .20
   
    .90
 
—24—
Sold to John Smallwood on account  
2# cheese   .32
1 bottle vanilla   .35
1# coffee   .35
1# tea   .60
   
    1.62
 
—24—
Bought from John Smallwood on account  
100 bu. potato .60 60.00
 
—24—
Paid John Smallwood  
Cash on account   25.00
 
—24—
Cash sales   15.00
 
—25—
Paid Brewster & Co.  
Cash on account   115.20
 
—25—
Sold to L. B. Jenkins on account  
½# pepper   .20
12# ham .14 1.68
   
    1.88
 
—25—
Received from Henry Norton  
Cash   26.25
 
—25—
Cash sales   13.00
 
97—26—
Credited Wm. Bristol  
for one month's rent   $30.00
 
—26—
Sold to Wm. Bristol on account  
11# ham .14 1.54
1 qt. bottle olives   .50
2# coffee   .70
20# sugar .05½ 1.10
   
    3.84
 
—26—
Sold to C. D. Glover on account  
¼ bbl. flour   1.35
1# bkg. powder   .50
7 cks. borax soap   .25
   
    2.10
 
—26—
Paid cash for clerk hire   8.00
 
—26—
Cash sales   18.70
 
—28—
Sold to H. N. Shaw on account  
1 bu. potatoes   .80
1 doz. cans corn   1.50
   
    2.30
 
—28—
Sold to Watkins Hotel Co. on account  
10 bu. potatoes .75 7.50
50# lard .10 5.00
20# ham. .13½ 2.70
   
    15.20
 
—28—
Cash sales   9.45
 
98—29—
Bought from Lowell & Sons on account  
500# sugar .04¾ $23.75
50 gal. molasses .30 15.00
   
    38.75
 
—29—
Bought from Star Salt Co. on account  
10 bbls. salt .80 8.00
 
—29—
Sold to R. H. Sherman on account  
1# coffee   .25
1# chocolate   .45
1 qt. olive oil   1.35
¼# ginger   .15
¼# pepper   .15
1 pkg. mince meat   .10
2# lard   .25
   
    2.70
 
—29—
Cash sales   14.35
 
—30—
Received from F. W. Bradley on account  
Cash   1.60
 
—30—
Paid Warsaw Milling Co. on account  
Cash   64.00
 
—30—
Sold to John Smallwood on account  
1 bbl. salt   1.10
 
—30—
Sold to D. E. Johnson on account  
10# lard .10 1.00
1# bkg. powder   .50
1 pk. apples   .35
   
    1.85
 
99—30—
Bought for cash  
5 bu. apples 1.00 $5.00
 
—30—
Cash sales   17.90

At the close of business, Nov. 30, the ledger is proved, in accordance with the rules given in Art. 7. All open accounts in the ledger are listed on ordinary journal ruled paper and the balances extended to the debit and credit columns. These columns are footed, the total of the credit columns being $1,564.02, and of the debit column, $56.08. Subtracting the latter from the former, we find the difference to be $1,507.94. The total postings—debit and credit—from the journal and the cash book are then entered and added, the total debit postings being $296.44, and the total credit postings, $1,804.38. The former deducted from the latter leaves $1,564.02, which agrees with the difference in the ledger balances. This proves the correctness of the postings to the ledger, and takes the place of the trial balance used in the double entry method.

At the end of business on Nov. 30, the ledger is verified according to the guidelines in Art. 7. All open accounts in the ledger are listed on regular journal ruled paper, and the balances are extended to the debit and credit columns. These columns are totaled, with the credits amounting to $1,564.02 and the debits to $56.08. By subtracting the debits from the credits, we find the difference to be $1,507.94. The total postings—debit and credit—from the journal and the cash book are then recorded and summed, with total debit postings at $296.44 and total credit postings at $1,804.38. Subtracting the debits from the credits gives $1,564.02, which matches the difference in the ledger balances. This confirms the accuracy of the postings to the ledger and serves as a substitute for the trial balance used in the double-entry method.

100

Single Entry Journal

Single Entry Journal

101

Single Entry Journal

Single Entry Journal

102

Single Entry Journal

Single Entry Log

VIEW IN THE GROUNDS OF THE FORE RIVER SHIPBUILDING COMPANY, QUINCY, MASS.
Showing the Facilities for Handling Material in the Plate Yard and a Typical Arrangement of the Shops. The Great Electric Crane Shown has a Span of 175 Feet, and Travels Over 1,000 Feet of Track. It is Said to be One of the Largest of Its Kind in the World.

VIEW IN THE GROUNDS OF THE FORE RIVER SHIPBUILDING COMPANY, QUINCY, MASS.
Showing the Facilities for Handling Material in the Plate Yard and a Typical Arrangement of the Shops. The Great Electric Crane shown has a span of 175 feet and travels over 1,000 feet of track. It's said to be one of the largest of its kind in the world.

103

Single Entry Cash Book

Single Entry Cash Journal

104

Single Entry Ledger

Single-entry ledger

105

Single Entry Ledger

Single Entry Bookkeeping Ledger

106

Single Entry Ledger

Single-entry ledger

AUTOMATIC MACHINE TOOL ROOM, FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF PARTS FOR ROCK DRILLS, COAL MINING MACHINES, DIAMOND DRILLS, ETC., IN THE CLAREMONT, N. H., FACTORY OF THE SULLIVAN MACHINERY COMPANY

AUTOMATIC MACHINE TOOL ROOM, FOR MAKING PARTS FOR ROCK DRILLS, COAL MINING MACHINES, DIAMOND DRILLS, ETC., IN THE CLAREMONT, NH, FACTORY OF THE SULLIVAN MACHINERY COMPANY

107

Proof of Single Entry Ledger

Proof of Single Entry Log

108

Single Entry Profit and Loss Statement

Single Entry Profit and Loss Statement

DETERMINING THE PROFIT

9. Having no nominal accounts, we cannot close through trading account into profit and loss, but must use another method to find the profit or loss for a given period. It will be necessary to first ascertain the present worth of the business. Therefore the first step will be to take an inventory, just as we would if closing a double entry ledger. Our inventory shows merchandise $1,042.77. Next, we will make a statement of assets and liabilities, following the same form as the balance sheet when the books are kept by double entry. This will give us the present worth.

9. Since we don't have nominal accounts, we can't close the trading account into profit and loss, so we'll need to use a different method to determine the profit or loss for a specific period. We first need to find out the current value of the business. The first step will be to take an inventory, just like we would if we were closing a double-entry ledger. Our inventory shows merchandise valued at $1,042.77. Next, we'll create a statement of assets and liabilities, following the same format as the balance sheet used when maintaining double-entry books. This will give us the current value.

From the present worth, we will deduct the capital investment (or the present worth at the time of making the last statement) which will show the profit for the period. If the present worth is less than the capital investment, the business shows a loss.

From the current value, we will subtract the capital investment (or the current value at the time of the last statement), which will indicate the profit for the period. If the current value is less than the capital investment, the business is showing a loss.

It will be noted that while this method shows net profits, it does not show how those profits were made. Having no accounts with purchases and sales, we can have no trading account to show gross 109profits, and without expense accounts there is no data from which to make up a detailed profit and loss statement. Herein is one of the shortcomings of the single entry method of bookkeeping.

It should be noted that while this method shows net profits, it doesn’t reveal how those profits were made. Without records of purchases and sales, we can't create a trading account to display gross profits, and without expense accounts, there’s no data to form a detailed profit and loss statement. This highlights one of the limitations of the single entry method of bookkeeping.

CLOSING THE BOOKS

10. To close a single entry ledger, all that is necessary is to credit the proprietor's investment account, or any account representing capital, with the net gain, or debit the account with the net loss. Then rule the personal accounts and bring down the balances.

10. To close a single entry ledger, all you need to do is credit the owner's investment account, or any account that represents capital, with the net gain, or debit the account with the net loss. Then tidy up the personal accounts and carry down the balances.

EXERCISE

On a certain date the assets and liabilities of David Henry are as follows:

On a specific date, David Henry's assets and liabilities are as follows:

Assets  
Cash $450.00
Due from sundry debtors 75.20
Merchandise per inventory 762.50
Liabilities  
Due sundry creditors 144.00

The following transactions are recorded:

The following transactions are logged:

Sales to sundry persons on account 44.71
Bought from sundry persons on account 337.54
Sold for cash 94.90
Received cash on account 62.00
Paid cash on account 132.50
Paid cash for rent 35.00
Paid cash for clerk hire 7.00

At the close of the period in which these transactions were recorded, the inventory of merchandise on hand was $987.75.

At the end of the period when these transactions were recorded, the inventory of merchandise on hand was $987.75.

First. Open single entry books, entering these transactions in the journal and cash book.

First. Open single-entry books and record these transactions in the journal and cash book.

Second. Post to ledger using the terms Debtor and Creditor to represent account of customers and those from whom goods were purchased.

Second. Record in the ledger using the terms Debtor and Creditor to represent the accounts of customers and those from whom goods were purchased.

Third. Prove the ledger.

Third. Verify the ledger.

Fourth. Make a statement of assets and liabilities.

Fourth. Create a statement of assets and liabilities.

Fifth. Has there been a gain or a loss, and how does it affect the account of the proprietor?

Fifth. Has there been a gain or a loss, and how does it impact the owner's account?

110

CHANGING TO DOUBLE ENTRY

11. How to change the method of keeping a set of books from single to double entry is an important question to the bookkeeper, for he may be called upon any time to do the work. When once understood, the change involves only very simple entries. The routine may be briefly described as follows:

11. How to change the method of keeping a set of books from single to double entry is an important question for the bookkeeper, as they may be asked to do the work at any time. Once understood, the change only requires very simple entries. The routine can be briefly described as follows:

First. Prepare a statement of assets and liabilities.

First. Prepare a statement of assets and debts.

Second. Enter this statement in the journal and post to the ledger, debiting all accounts which represent assets and crediting all accounts which represent liabilities. Credit proprietor's account with the difference, which is the present worth.

Second. Write this statement in the journal and update the ledger, debiting all accounts that represent assets and crediting all accounts that represent liabilities. Credit the owner's account with the difference, which is the current value.

If a new ledger is to be opened, new accounts will be opened for each form of asset or liability represented in the entry.

If a new ledger is being opened, new accounts will be created for each type of asset or liability shown in the entry.

If the old ledger is to be used new accounts are to be opened with assets and liabilities not already represented by accounts in the ledger, and the net gain only will be credited to the proprietor's account. Check personal accounts, but do not post.

If the old ledger is going to be used, new accounts need to be opened with assets and liabilities that aren't already listed in the ledger, and only the net gain will be credited to the owner's account. Check personal accounts, but don't post.

Third. Take a trial balance to see if the ledger is in balance, as it should be after posting these entries.

Third. Take a trial balance to check if the ledger is balanced, as it should be after posting these entries.

EXERCISE

Following the rules given, change the books of David Henry to double entry using the old ledger.

Following the instructions provided, convert David Henry's accounts to double-entry using the old ledger.

Show necessary journal entry and indicate what new accounts must be opened.

Show the required journal entry and specify which new accounts need to be opened.

CHANGING PARTNERSHIP BOOKS TO DOUBLE ENTRY

12. We will suppose that the ledger illustrated in the following model set (pages 23-27) represents the business of Benton, Douglas, and Kemp, and that the books have been kept by single entry.

12. Let's assume that the ledger shown in the model set (pages 23-27) represents the business of Benton, Douglas, and Kemp, and that the books have been maintained using single entry.

They wish to adopt the double entry method and call you in to make the necessary changes in their books.

They want to use the double entry method and ask you to make the necessary changes in their records.

Your first step is to make a statement of the ledger accounts, including all except the capital accounts of the partners. This statement gives you the following information:

Your first step is to create a statement of the ledger accounts, including everything except the partners' capital accounts. This statement provides you with the following information:

Personal Accounts, Debit Balances $189.25
Personal Accounts, Credit Balances 2,828.50
Cash in Bank 7,313.73

111You also balance the cash book and compare the balance with the cash in drawer, and find that the amount shown, $21.60, is correct.

111You also balance the cash book and check the balance against the cash in the drawer, confirming that the amount shown, $21.60, is correct.

In the meantime an inventory is being taken. When completed, the results shown are:

In the meantime, an inventory is being taken. Once it's finished, the results are:

Merchandise $2,114.50
Furniture and Fixtures 2,000.00

The next step is to make a statement of assets and liabilities for the purpose of finding the present worth of the business.

The next step is to create a statement of assets and liabilities to determine the current value of the business.

STATEMENT OF ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
 
Assets    
Cash in Bank (Ledger) $7,313.73  
Cash in Office (Cash Book) 21.60  
Personal Accounts (Ledger) 189.25  
Merchandise (Inventory) 2,114.50  
Furniture and Fixtures (Inventory) 2,000.00  
   
Total Assets   $11,639.08
 
Liabilities    
Personal Accounts (Ledger)   2,828.50
   
Present Worth   8,810.58

The capital accounts of the partners show the original investment to have been $9,000.00, which is more than the present worth. Deducting the latter from the former will give the net loss.

The partners' capital accounts indicate that the original investment was $9,000.00, which is more than its current value. Subtracting the current value from the original investment will give the net loss.

Investment $9,000.00
Present Worth 8,810.58
 
Net Loss 189.42

The partnership agreement provides that profits and losses are to be shared equally, but contains no reference to the payment of interest on withdrawals, or allowance of interest on personal credits.

The partnership agreement states that profits and losses will be shared equally, but it doesn’t mention anything about paying interest on withdrawals or providing interest on personal credits.

The statement of assets and liabilities is entered in the journal and accounts opened in the ledger with merchandise inventory and furniture and fixtures—the only items not already represented by ledger accounts. To complete the change and balance the ledger the following single entry is made in the journal and posted to partners' personal accounts.

The statement of assets and liabilities is recorded in the journal, and accounts are created in the ledger for merchandise inventory and furniture and fixtures—the only items not already covered by ledger accounts. To finalize the update and balance the ledger, the following single entry is made in the journal and posted to partners' personal accounts.

112
James Benton Dr. $63.14
Horace Douglas Dr. 63.14
Henry Kemp Dr. 63.14

A trial balance will now show the ledger to be in balance.

A trial balance will now show that the ledger is balanced.

You have followed the routine necessary to change the books of a partnership from single to double entry under the conditions given. A general rule to be followed is to ascertain the present worth, make the partnership adjustment as in double entry, and post as in changing books of a single proprietorship.

You’ve followed the necessary steps to switch a partnership's accounting from single to double entry as outlined. A general guideline is to determine the current value, make the partnership adjustments as you would in double entry, and record them like you would when changing the books of a sole proprietor.

EXERCISE

The books of Lancaster, Jenkins, and Stubb have been kept by single entry, but they desire to change to double entry.

The books of Lancaster, Jenkins, and Stubb have been maintained using single entry, but they want to switch to double entry.

The partnership agreement provides that each partner shall share in the profits in proportion to his net investment. Separate accounts are kept with each partner to cover his investment and withdrawals.

The partnership agreement states that each partner will share the profits based on their net investment. Separate accounts are maintained for each partner to track their investment and withdrawals.

The following is a statement of the ledger accounts as they appeared December 31st. The balances of partners' investment accounts are the same as when the last adjustment was made, no additional investments having been made during the present period.

The following is a statement of the ledger accounts as they appeared on December 31st. The balances of partners' investment accounts are the same as when the last adjustment was made, with no additional investments made during the current period.

STATEMENT OF LEDGER
 
Lancaster, Investment Credit Balance $2,000.00
Jenkins " " " 1,500.00
Stubb " " " 1,500.00
Personal Accounts " " 900.00
" " Debit " 2,200.00
Lancaster, Withdrawals " " 325.00
Jenkins " " " 250.00
Stubb " " " 175.00
Bank " " " 2,150.00
Cash in office     50.00

An inventory is taken and shows the value of merchandise in stock to be $1,850.00, fixtures $300.00.

An inventory is conducted and shows the value of merchandise in stock to be $1,850.00, with fixtures valued at $300.00.

First. Transfer debit balances of partners' withdrawal accounts to investment accounts.

First. Move the debit balances from partners' withdrawal accounts to their investment accounts.

Second. Show entries to make the partnership adjustment and to change books to double entry.

Second. Provide entries to adjust the partnership and to switch the records to double entry.

Third. Indicate by check (√) what accounts are to be posted, the old ledger being used.

Third. Please check (√) which accounts should be posted using the old ledger.

113

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

Single-entry partnership ledger

114

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

115

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

116

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

117

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

Single Entry Partnership Ledger

118

CHANGING CORPORATION BOOKS TO DOUBLE ENTRY

13. Corporation books are seldom kept by single entry, but such cases are not impossible to find. In Chicago, there is a manufacturing corporation which has been in business for more than twenty years and is doing a business of a quarter million dollars a year, whose books have been kept by single entry. Not until January 1909 was an accountant called in to change their books to a modern double entry system.

13. Corporation books are rarely maintained with single entry, but there are some exceptions. In Chicago, there's a manufacturing corporation that has been operating for over twenty years and generates around a quarter million dollars a year, and its books have been kept with single entry. It wasn't until January 1909 that they brought in an accountant to switch their books to a more modern double entry system.

In the case cited a capital stock account was kept, and dividends were paid in cash. The routine followed by the accountant was to first take an inventory of machinery, material, supplies, goods in process, and manufactured goods. Then the land and buildings were appraised at their present value. Accounts had been kept with real estate and machinery, but repairs to buildings had been charged to real estate, thus showing a fictitious increase in value, and no depreciation had been charged against machinery. There was also a merchandise account which had been charged with all purchases and credited with all sales, so that it furnished no information of value.

In the case mentioned, a capital stock account was maintained, and dividends were paid out in cash. The accountant's process involved first taking an inventory of machinery, materials, supplies, goods in progress, and finished products. Next, the land and buildings were valued at their current worth. Accounts were kept for real estate and machinery, but repairs to the buildings were recorded under real estate, creating a misleading increase in value, while no depreciation was accounted for machinery. Additionally, there was a merchandise account that recorded all purchases as charges and all sales as credits, which provided no useful information.

For these reasons only personal accounts, capital stock, bank account, and cash were taken from the books in making up a statement of assets and liabilities. In making this statement capital stock was included as a liability and the excess of assets over liabilities represented surplus.

For these reasons, only personal accounts, capital stock, bank accounts, and cash were taken from the books to create a statement of assets and liabilities. In this statement, capital stock was listed as a liability, and the excess of assets over liabilities represented surplus.

The statement was entered in the journal and accounts representing each item were opened in a new ledger. The balance was credited to surplus account and the books were in balance. Subsequently, the different expense accounts were opened as the transactions requiring their use arose.

The statement was recorded in the journal, and accounts for each item were created in a new ledger. The balance was credited to the surplus account, and the books were balanced. Later on, various expense accounts were established as the relevant transactions occurred.

Had the directors insisted, the accountant would have been obliged to enter real estate and machinery at the values shown in the old accounts, but an inventory of merchandise would have been necessary in any event.

Had the directors insisted, the accountant would have had to record real estate and machinery at the values listed in the old accounts, but an inventory of merchandise would have been required anyway.

A safe rule in changing the books of a corporation to double entry is to make a statement of assets and liabilities, including capital stock in liabilities. Then open the necessary accounts and credit the difference in the statement to surplus account.

A good guideline for transitioning a corporation's books to double entry is to create a statement of assets and liabilities, including capital stock as part of the liabilities. Next, set up the required accounts and credit the difference in the statement to the surplus account.

119

Journal Entries to Change to Double Entry

Journal Entries to Change to Double Entry

In the case referred to the following facts were shown by the books:

In the case mentioned, the following facts were shown by the records:

Cash in Office $156.72
Cash in Bank 7,264.20
Accounts Receivable 11,978.50
Accounts Payable 9,647.60
Capital Stock 75,000.00

The inventories and appraisals resulted in the following valuations:

The inventories and appraisals led to these valuations:

Real Estate (Land and Buildings) $38,000.00
Machinery 27,750.00
Material 11,227.60
Supplies 648.50
Goods in Process 3,984.70
Manufactured Goods 5,290.00

A cost system was desired by the management, consequently in opening new books it was necessary to provide for the needed accounts. The complete entries used to change these books from single to double entry are shown in the model journal illustrated, page 29.

A cost system was needed by the management, so when opening new books, it was essential to set up the required accounts. The full entries to transition these books from single to double entry are shown in the model journal illustrated on page 29.

120

Ledger After Changing to Double Entry

Ledger After Switching to Double Entry

121

Ledger After Changing to Double Entry

Ledger After Changing to Double Entry

122

EXERCISE

The books of the Star Coal Company, a corporation with a paid-up capital of $10,000.00, have been kept by single entry. The following facts are gathered from the books:

The records of the Star Coal Company, a corporation with a paid-up capital of $10,000.00, have been maintained using single entry. The following information is taken from the records:

Cash in Bank   $3,500.00
Personal Accounts Debit Balances 6,500.00
Cash in Office   200.00
Personal Accounts Credit Balances 2,500.00

An inventory results as follows:

An inventory shows the following:

Coal 3,750.00
Horses and Wagons 800.00
Furniture and Fixtures 300.00

Make necessary journal entries to change to double entry. Provide a reserve of 5% for uncollectible accounts, 10% for depreciation of horses and wagons, 10% for depreciation of furniture and fixtures. Declare a dividend of 10% and transfer balance of profits to surplus, making all journal entries to record these transactions.

Make the required journal entries to switch to double entry. Set aside 5% for bad debts, 10% for depreciation on horses and wagons, and 10% for depreciation on furniture and fixtures. Declare a 10% dividend and move the remaining profits to surplus, making all journal entries to document these transactions.

TWO HEMISPHERICAL BOTTOMS FOR 100,000-GALLON ELEVATED TANKS RIVETED TOGETHER, SHOWING CLASS OF WORKMANSHIP NECESSARY ON WORK OF THIS CHARACTER
Chicago Bridge & Iron Works, Chicago, Ill.

TWO HEMISPHERICAL BOTTOMS FOR 100,000-GALLON ELEVATED TANKS RIVETED TOGETHER, SHOWING THE LEVEL OF WORKMANSHIP REQUIRED FOR THIS TYPE OF WORK
Chicago Bridge & Iron Works, Chicago, Ill.

123

TRIAL BALANCES AND COMPARATIVE STATEMENTS

14. The construction of comparative statements is one of the most important duties of the bookkeeper. The ability to properly classify the accounts that make up trading and profit and loss statements, and balance sheets is a valuable asset to the bookkeeper who aims to advance to the highest position.

14. Creating comparative statements is one of the key responsibilities of a bookkeeper. Being able to accurately classify the accounts that form trading and profit and loss statements, as well as balance sheets, is a valuable skill for any bookkeeper who wants to move up to the top positions.

Statements of this kind, unless properly classified, are unintelligible to the average business man. A mere statement of the balances of the ledger accounts arranged without respect to their relationship, one to the other, may show that the ledger is in balance, but does not present information of special value to the manager of a business. What he wants—and expects—is a statement from which he can readily extract desired information; it must emphasize the salient points.

Statements like these, unless organized correctly, are confusing for the average businessperson. Just listing the balances of the ledger accounts without considering how they relate to each other might show that the ledger balances, but it doesn't provide useful information for a business manager. What they want—and expect—is a statement that allows them to easily find the information they need; it should highlight the key points.

The classification of accounts has already been touched upon, but no harm will be done by placing still greater emphasis on the importance of this feature. For with the right classification of accounts in the ledger, the trial balance itself will supply some very interesting information, instead of being a mere list of balances. The following rules should be observed in the arrangement of accounts in the ledger.

The classification of accounts has already been mentioned, but it’s worth highlighting just how important this aspect is. With the proper classification of accounts in the ledger, the trial balance can provide some really interesting information rather than just being a simple list of balances. The following rules should be followed when organizing accounts in the ledger.

All asset accounts should be assembled in the first section and grouped according to their classification; i. e., active, fixed, and passive or fictitious.

All asset accounts should be gathered in the first section and organized by their classification; i.e., current, fixed, and intangible or fictitious.

The liabilities should be divided into secured or funded, unsecured or floating, and capital; the latter includes any reserve accounts that may be maintained.

The liabilities should be split into secured or funded, unsecured or floating, and capital; the latter includes any reserve accounts that might be kept.

The expense accounts should follow and should be subdivided as to selling, general, and administrative.

The expense accounts should be organized and broken down into selling, general, and administrative categories.

The trading accounts should be grouped and divided into purchases, in-freight, and sales.

The trading accounts should be organized and categorized into purchases, shipping costs, and sales.

If a manufacturing business, the manufacturing accounts should be divided as to purchases, labor, and expenses.

If it's a manufacturing business, the manufacturing accounts should be broken down into purchases, labor, and expenses.

The advantages of card and loose leaf ledgers are apparent in connection with the proper arrangement of accounts. They readily lend themselves to any desired classification, and new accounts as needed can be inserted at any point.

The benefits of card and loose-leaf ledgers are clear when it comes to organizing accounts. They easily allow for any kind of categorization, and new accounts can be added whenever necessary at any position.

124For the purpose of showing some of the possibilities in the classification of accounts, we give a few examples of model trial balances.

124To illustrate some of the ways accounts can be classified, we present a few examples of model trial balances.

TRIAL BALANCE
 
Assets
Cash $264.20  
Bank 4,728.50  
Accounts Receivable 6,270.00  
Inventory (Jan. 1) 7,860.00  
Real Estate 10,000.00  
Furniture and Fixtures 5,000.00  
 
Liabilities
Mortgage Payable   $3,000.00
Bills Payable   5,000.00
Accounts Payable   6,120.00
Capital Stock   20,000.00
 
Profit and Loss
Advertising 475.00  
Salesmen's Salaries 300.00  
Traveling Expenses 189.70  
General Expense 74.00  
Interest and Discount 22.60  
Building Maintenance 37.00  
Taxes and Insurance 42.00  
Salaries 525.00  
 
Trading
 
Purchases 5,500.00  
In-Freight and Cartage 96.20  
Sales   7,219.00
 
  41,361.60 41,361.60

If the accounts in this trial balance were listed without regard to the groups in which they belong, it would merely show that the ledger balances. In its present form, it gives at a glance much valuable information. Total expenses and expenses of each class are readily ascertained, sales are shown, and expenses can be compared with sales. With the exception that it does not show the changes in the 125account of the inventory, this trial balance exhibits the condition of the business.

If the accounts in this trial balance were listed without considering the groups they belong to, it would only indicate that the ledger balances. In its current format, it provides a lot of valuable information at a glance. Total expenses and expenses for each category are easy to determine, sales are displayed, and expenses can be compared to sales. The only downside is that it doesn't show the changes in the 125 inventory account, but this trial balance still reflects the overall condition of the business.

Supposing that an inventory is taken, the following statements are quickly prepared.

Supposing that an inventory is taken, the following statements are quickly prepared.

BALANCE SHEET
Assets
Cash $264.20  
Bank 4,728.50  
Accounts Receivable 6,270.00  
Inventory (Feb. 1) 7,995.00  
Real Estate 10,000.00  
Furniture and Fixtures 5,000.00  
 
Liabilities
Mortgage Payable   $3,000.00
Bills Payable   5,000.00
Accounts Payable   6,120.00
Capital Stock   20,000.00
Surplus   137.70
 
  34,257.70 34,257.70
 
TRADING STATEMENT
Inventory (Jan. 1) 7,860.00  
Purchases 5,500.00  
In-Freight 96.20  
   
  13,456.20  
Less Inventory (Feb. 1) 7,995.00  
   
  5,461.20  
Sales   7,219.00
Gross Profit 1,757.80  
 
  7,219.00 7,219.00
 
 
PROFIT AND LOSS STATEMENT
Gross Profit   $1,757.80
Advertising $475.00  
Salesmen's Salaries 300.00  
Traveling Expenses 189.70  
General Expense 74.00  
Interest and Discount   22.60
Building Maintenance 37.00  
Taxes and Insurance 42.00  
Salaries 525.00  
Net Profits 137.70  
 
  1,780.40 1,780.40
 

126The facts that sales were $7,219.00, or that the expense for salesmen's salaries was $300.00 mean nothing in themselves. It is only when compared that they exhibit vital facts. If we find that last month's sales were $8,400.00 and salesmen's salaries the same as this month, we know at once that our present selling cost is proportionately higher than during the preceding period.

126The fact that sales were $7,219.00 and that the expense for salesmen's salaries was $300.00 doesn't mean much on their own. It's only when we compare them that they reveal important insights. If we discover that last month's sales were $8,400.00 and salesmen's salaries were the same as this month, we immediately realize that our current selling cost is proportionately higher than it was in the previous period.

The following trial balance should be compared with the preceding and the difference in their values, in respect to the information given, carefully noted. The accounts in this trial balance are arranged in the order in which they were found in the ledger.

The following trial balance should be compared with the previous one, and the differences in their values, regarding the information provided, should be carefully noted. The accounts in this trial balance are organized in the same order as they were in the ledger.

TRIAL BALANCE
Dr. Cr.
Capital Stock   $30,000.00
Sales   45,411.40
Accounts Receivable $7,190.00  
Accounts Payable   2,720.00
General Expense 727.00  
Salesmen's Salaries 3,000.00  
Salaries, General 3,600.00  
Interest and Discount   126.70
Returns and Allowances 942.20  
Inventory 9,687.00  
Purchases 26,250.00  
In-Freight $396.40  
Bank 6,470.00  
Traveling Expense 1,759.00  
Taxes and Insurance 236.50  
Real Estate 25,000.00  
Fixtures 3,000.00  
Surplus   10,000.00
 
  88,258.10 88,258.10
 
127

Fig. 15-a. Working Balance Sheet

Fig. 15-a. Active Balance Sheet

128

WORKING BALANCE SHEET

15. A form much used by accountants combines the trial balance with the balance sheet, trading and profit and loss statements. The compilation of the information required for this form is greatly facilitated by a proper classification of accounts in the ledger. The form is known as a working balance sheet.

15. A commonly used form by accountants merges the trial balance with the balance sheet, trading, and profit and loss statements. Gathering the information needed for this form is much easier with proper account classification in the ledger. This form is called a working balance sheet.

A working balance sheet is shown in Fig. 15 a. The figures used are taken from the last trial balance shown, and furnish a graphic illustration of the difference between proper and improper classification of accounts. It will be noticed that the first two columns constitute the trial balance. Following this are columns which classify the accounts under the headings of Trading, Profit and Loss, and Balance Sheet. The balance of each account is extended to its proper group.

A working balance sheet is displayed in Fig. 15 a. The figures used are taken from the latest trial balance shown and provide a clear illustration of the difference between correct and incorrect classification of accounts. You will notice that the first two columns make up the trial balance. Next are columns that categorize the accounts under the headings of Trading, Profit and Loss, and Balance Sheet. The balance of each account is transferred to its appropriate group.

At the bottom of the form, trading and net profits are extended as a memorandum only. Since no inventory has been taken these figures are not exact, but represent approximate results on the supposition that the inventory would be practically the same as when the last inventory was taken. Of course, if there was a noticeable change in the quantity of merchandise in stock, an estimate would be made and taken into consideration in making this statement of probable profits.

At the bottom of the form, trading and net profits are provided as a memo only. Since no inventory has been taken, these figures are not precise but reflect approximate results based on the assumption that the inventory would be roughly the same as when the last inventory was done. Naturally, if there was a significant change in the amount of merchandise in stock, an estimate would be made and included in this statement of expected profits.

EXERCISE

From the following trial balance, prepare a working balance sheet showing actual gross and net profits.

From the following trial balance, create a working balance sheet that displays the actual gross and net profits.

129
TRIAL BALANCE
Bank $8,460.00  
Capital Stock   $25,000.00
Sales   11,201.00
Purchases 10,000.00  
Returns and Allowances 400.00  
Interest and Discount earned   260.00
General Expense 425.00  
Salaries 360.00  
Rent 300.00  
Taxes and Insurance 37.60  
Selling Expense 421.00  
Inventory (Jan. 1st) 8,864.00  
Fixtures 2,500.00  
Accounts Receivable 5,680.00  
Accounts Payable   1,274.00
Cash in Office 287.40  
 
  37,735.00 37,735.00
Inventory (Feb 1)   9,650.00

COMPARATIVE STATEMENTS

16. The trial balances shown in the preceding pages illustrate some of the advantages of properly classified accounts. The information gained can be made of still greater value by the construction of comparative statements; for, as has been stated, the chief value of many of the figures shown lies in the opportunity for comparisons. Statements which permit of comparison of items of a like nature from month to month furnish a valuable survey of the progress of the business.

16. The trial balances presented in the previous pages highlight some benefits of having well-organized accounts. The information gathered can be even more useful by creating comparative statements, since, as mentioned before, the main value of many of these figures is in allowing for comparisons. Statements that enable comparisons of similar items from month to month provide a valuable overview of the business's progress.

The following is a trial balance taken from the books of a manufacturing business, and will be used as a basis for the construction of comparative statements.

The following is a trial balance gathered from the records of a manufacturing business, and it will be used as a foundation for creating comparative statements.

TRIAL BALANCE
 
  Dr. Cr.
Cash in Office $162.50  
Bank 8,500.00  
130Accounts Receivable 7,500.00  
Bills Receivable 4,500.00  
Inventory, Materials (Jan. 1) 9,500.00  
Inventory, Manufactured Goods    
(Jan. 1) 6,000.00  
Real Estate 20,000.00  
Machinery and Tools 17,500.00  
Furniture and Fixtures 3,500.00  
Bills Payable   $7,000.00
Accounts Payable   5,000.00
Capital Stock   50,000.00
Surplus   10,000.00
Undivided Profits   900.00
Advertising 1,200.00  
Salesmen's Salaries 1,000.00  
Salesmen's Expenses 720.00  
General Expense 430.00  
Interest and Discount   97.50
Salaries Administrative 900.00  
Factory Expense 850.00  
Factory Labor 1,750.00  
Repairs to Machinery 150.00  
Depreciation 175.00  
Taxes and Insurance 25.00  
Material Purchases 4,600.00  
In-Freight and Cartage 126.00  
Sales   16,491.00
Returns and Allowances 400.00  
 
  89,488.50 89,488.50
 

In Fig. 16 a. is shown a working balance sheet in which the accounts as found in the trial balance are segregated in the four groups, Manufacturing, Trading, Profit and Loss, and Balance Sheet. First, the trial balance is entered in the two columns at the left. Next, the manufacturing account is made up by extending the inventory of material at end of preceding period, the manufacturing expense accounts, material purchases and freight on same. This gives the 131total charges to manufacturing account, but not the month's expenditures, for the present inventory of material must be considered. An inventory shows the value of material in stock to be $4,550.00. Deducting this leaves $12,626.00, the total operating cost for the month. To find the cost of goods completed during the month an inventory is taken of work in process, the amount is deducted from the total operating cost and the result, $9,126.00, represents cost of goods manufactured.

In Fig. 16, a. shows a working balance sheet where the accounts from the trial balance are divided into four groups: Manufacturing, Trading, Profit and Loss, and Balance Sheet. First, the trial balance is recorded in the two columns on the left. Next, the manufacturing account is created by adding the inventory of materials at the end of the previous period, the manufacturing expense accounts, material purchases, and related freight costs. This results in the total charges to the manufacturing account, but it doesn't include the month's expenses because the current inventory of materials needs to be accounted for. The inventory indicates the value of materials in stock is $4,550.00. By subtracting this, we find the total operating cost for the month is $12,626.00. To determine the cost of goods completed during the month, an inventory is taken of work in progress. This amount is subtracted from the total operating cost, resulting in $9,126.00, which represents the cost of goods manufactured.

The trading account is now made up, this $9,126.00 taking the place of purchases, and the gross profit is carried to profit and loss account.

The trading account is now complete, with $9,126.00 replacing purchases, and the gross profit is transferred to the profit and loss account.

The manufacturing, trading, and profit and loss accounts are now ready for analysis, which is made on a percentage basis. In the analysis of the manufacturing account, the total operating cost is used as a basis and the different items of manufacturing cost are figured on this basis. We find that the expense items are 23.3% and the material 76.7% of the total which furnishes a tangible basis for a comparison of the same items in other months. Having the percentage of each item, we can note the fluctuations from month to month, and know where to retrench if any item appears to be increasing too rapidly.

The manufacturing, trading, and profit and loss accounts are now ready for analysis, which is done on a percentage basis. In analyzing the manufacturing account, the total operating cost serves as the basis, and the various manufacturing cost items are calculated accordingly. We find that the expense items account for 23.3% and the materials for 76.7% of the total, providing a clear basis for comparing these items in other months. With the percentage of each item, we can track the changes from month to month and identify where to cut back if any item seems to be rising too quickly.

The basis of the analysis of the trading and profit and loss accounts is the turnover. Figuring on this basis, we find the total expenses, exclusive of manufacturing costs, to be 41% of the turnover, and the net profit, 20%. The gross profit is 60% of the turnover. Ordinarily the total expense and net profit would equal the gross profit, but in this case there is a capital profit of $97.50 from interest earned.

The analysis of the trading and profit and loss accounts starts with the turnover. Based on this, we find that total expenses, not including manufacturing costs, are 41% of the turnover, while the net profit is 20%. The gross profit makes up 60% of the turnover. Typically, total expenses and net profit would add up to the gross profit, but in this case, there's also a capital profit of $97.50 from earned interest.

Sometimes these comparative percentages are figured on the gross sales, but the turnover is considered the proper basis, for it is less subject to marked fluctuations. The sales in one month may show abnormal profits, while in the next these profits may return to normal. If based on sales, the cost percentages would fluctuate accordingly, when in reality they may have remained stationary.

Sometimes these comparative percentages are calculated based on the gross sales, but turnover is seen as the better basis since it’s less prone to sudden changes. One month’s sales may show unusually high profits, while the next month those profits may drop back to normal levels. If the percentages are based on sales, the cost percentages would vary accordingly, even though they may have actually stayed the same.

PROOF WITHOUT A TRIAL BALANCE

17. A comparison of the accounts in the last trial balance with the working balance sheet shows them to be arranged in the order in which they would appear in the balance sheet and profit and loss statements.

17. Comparing the accounts in the last trial balance with the working balance sheet shows that they are organized in the same order as they would appear in the balance sheet and profit and loss statements.

132

WORKING BALANCE SHEET

WORKING BALANCE SHEET

133

Fig. 16a. Working Balance Sheet for a Manufacturing Business

Fig. 16a. Operating Balance Sheet for a Manufacturing Company

134It should be remembered that manufacturing and trading accounts are subdivisions of the profit and loss account, and that the profit and loss account is a statement of income and disbursements including differences in inventories.

134It’s important to remember that manufacturing and trading accounts are parts of the profit and loss account, and that the profit and loss account is a summary of income and expenses, which includes changes in inventories.

If it is desired to show the actual condition of the business at the end of each month, the inventory must be added. There may be objections to actually closing the books each month, but the complete statement can be made by adding the current inventories as shown in the working balance sheet illustrated. The amounts of these inventories and the gross and net current profits are, in such cases, memoranda only. The inventories may be arbitrary estimates, and while the results shown may not be exact they will be found of value for purposes of comparison; and care in estimating inventories will greatly increase their value.

If you want to show the real condition of the business at the end of each month, you need to include the inventory. Some may argue against closing the books every month, but you can create a complete statement by adding the current inventories as demonstrated in the working balance sheet shown. The values of these inventories and the gross and net current profits are just notes in such cases. The inventories can be rough estimates, and although the results may not be precise, they can still be valuable for comparison purposes; being careful when estimating inventories will significantly enhance their worth.

Reference to our working balance sheet shows that the profit and loss statements—with current inventories added—agrees with the balance sheet in one respect. The current profit exactly agrees with the difference between assets and liabilities as shown by the balance sheet.

Reference to our working balance sheet shows that the profit and loss statements—with current inventories included—align with the balance sheet in one way. The current profit matches the difference between assets and liabilities as indicated by the balance sheet.

To prove the ledger without the usual trial balance these rules should be followed:

To verify the ledger without the standard trial balance, these rules should be followed:

First: Make up trading and profit and loss statements, taking balances direct from the ledger accounts, deducting current inventories.

First: Prepare trading and profit and loss statements by taking balances directly from the ledger accounts, subtracting current inventories.

Second: Make up balance sheet using current inventories in listing assets.

Second: Create a balance sheet using current inventories to list assets.

If the current profit and loss agrees with the difference between assets and liabilities the ledger may be assumed to be in balance. This is, in effect, a sectional trial balance, since the accounts in the trial balance are all represented in the two statements. The reliability of this proof is not affected by the fact that the inventories are arbitrary—and perhaps inaccurate—since the same amounts are used in both the balance sheet and profit and loss statement.

If the current profit and loss matches the difference between assets and liabilities, you can assume that the ledger is balanced. This is essentially a partial trial balance, as the accounts in the trial balance are all reflected in the two statements. The reliability of this proof isn't impacted by the fact that the inventories are arbitrary—and possibly inaccurate—since the same amounts are used in both the balance sheet and profit and loss statement.

BOOK INVENTORIES

18. To make the foregoing plan still more effective, perpetual inventories should be carried in the ledger. A perpetual or book 135inventory is an account showing the value of merchandise received, sold, and on hand. If an accurate account is kept of merchandise received and sold, the perpetual inventory will show the amount that should be in stock. To prove the accuracy of the account, it is necessary to take an actual inventory of the merchandise in stock, just as it is necessary to count the cash before we can know that the amount on hand agrees with the cash account.

18. To make the previous plan even more effective, we should maintain ongoing inventories in the ledger. A perpetual inventory is an account that reflects the value of merchandise received, sold, and currently in stock. If we keep an accurate record of the merchandise received and sold, the perpetual inventory will indicate the quantity that should be in stock. To verify the accuracy of the account, it's essential to conduct a physical inventory of the merchandise in stock, just like it's necessary to count the cash to ensure that the amount on hand matches the cash account.

A detailed perpetual inventory should be kept on cards or in a loose leaf book. A card or sheet is used for each article or class of material carried in stock. The sheets or cards should be arranged alphabetically according to the names of the articles. To make the system effective one person should have charge of these records and no goods should be taken from stock without an order or other proper record.

A detailed ongoing inventory should be maintained on cards or in a binder. A card or page is for each item or category of material held in stock. The pages or cards should be organized alphabetically by the names of the items. To make the system effective, one person should manage these records, and no items should be removed from stock without an order or another proper record.

At the end of the month the receipts will be shown by the purchase accounts. The deliveries will be tabulated from the cards, and the necessary adjustments made on the ledger account. Adjustments should be made by journal entry debiting inventory accounts and crediting trading account for increase in inventory, and vice versâ for decrease in inventory.

At the end of the month, the receipts will be displayed in the purchase accounts. The deliveries will be recorded from the cards, and any necessary adjustments will be made in the ledger account. Adjustments should be recorded through journal entries, debiting inventory accounts and crediting the trading account for an increase in inventory, and vice versus for a decrease in inventory.

Fig. 18 a. is a typical form of stock ledger sheet for a loose leaf book. The form should in all cases be made to suit the requirements of the business in which it is to be used.

Fig. 18 a. is a standard type of stock ledger sheet for a loose-leaf binder. This form should always be customized to meet the specific needs of the business using it.

Fig. 18 b. is a card form of stock ledger which gives more detailed information about the article in stock. On the top line is recorded the name of the article, size or kind, where kept, and date of verification of the record. The second line gives the unit and maximum and minimum limits. The unit represents the unit in which the article is bought—as pounds, tons, dozen, feet, yards, etc. It is customary to establish a minimum limit, below which the stock is not allowed to go before re-ordering, and a maximum limit of a quantity sufficient for the needs of the business. The record of receipts and disbursements includes a detailed record of cost, including freight and cartage, and columns for costs per unit. This makes it possible to calculate the value of the stock in hand without referring elsewhere for prices.

Fig. 18 b. is a card version of a stock ledger that provides more detailed information about the items in stock. The top line includes the name of the item, its size or type, where it’s stored, and the date the record was verified. The second line shows the unit along with maximum and minimum limits. The unit indicates how the item is measured—such as pounds, tons, dozens, feet, yards, etc. It’s standard to set a minimum limit, which is the lowest amount the stock can reach before reordering, and a maximum limit, which is a quantity sufficient for the business's needs. The record of receipts and disbursements includes a detailed account of costs, including shipping and handling, along with columns for costs per unit. This allows for calculating the value of the stock on hand without needing to check prices elsewhere.

In some lines of business it is possible to ascertain the quantities sold, at the end of each month, from the sales records. This 136applies where an article is sold in but one grade or size, and necessitates keeping sales records which show sales of each article. An example is the coal business. For such a business a card like the one shown in Fig. 18 c. can be used to good advantage. This provides for a monthly record of purchases and sales.

In some industries, you can determine the quantities sold at the end of each month by looking at the sales records. This is the case when an item is sold in only one grade or size, and it requires maintaining sales records that detail the sales of each item. A good example is the coal industry. For this type of business, a card similar to the one shown in Fig. 18 c. can be very helpful. It allows for a monthly record of purchases and sales.

Fig. 18 a. Loose Leaf Stock Ledger

Fig. 18 a. Loose Leaf Inventory Ledger

In this illustration the manner of indexing is shown. The cards are first arranged alphabetically under the names of the articles. If there is more than one size, the cards bearing the records of a certain article are filed in the order of their sizes. Indexed in this manner any card that may be desired is quickly found.

In this illustration, the indexing method is shown. The cards are first organized alphabetically by the names of the articles. If there are multiple sizes, the cards that contain records for a specific article are sorted by size. With this indexing method, any card that you need can be quickly located.

Fig. 18 b. Stock Ledger Card

Fig. 18 b. Stock Ledger Card

137

Fig. 18 c. Stock Ledger Card and Indexes

Fig. 18 c. Stock Ledger Card and Indexes

DEMONSTRATION OF PROOF WITHOUT A TRIAL BALANCE

19. Taking the accounts in the following trial balance, a model ledger is illustrated which demonstrates the manner of proving the ledger without the aid of the conventional trial balance. It is assumed, of course, that a book inventory or stock ledger is kept, and in this demonstration the figures showing the change in inventory are used. Only the ledger is illustrated, it being expected that the student will understand the necessary journal adjusting entries.

19. Based on the accounts in the following trial balance, a model ledger is shown that demonstrates how to verify the ledger without relying on the traditional trial balance. It’s assumed that a book inventory or stock ledger is maintained, and in this demonstration, the figures reflecting the change in inventory are used. Only the ledger is displayed, as it is expected that the student will understand the required journal adjusting entries.

TRIAL BALANCE
 
Cash in Office $575.00  
Bank 8,750.00  
Accounts Receivable 8,871.00  
Bills Receivable 5,000.00  
Inventory (Jan. 1) 12,500.00  
Furniture and Fixtures 2,250.00  
Bills Payable   $4,000.00
Accounts Payable   3,325.00
138Capital Stock   $25,000.00
Purchases $6,750.00  
Sales   15,000.00
Advertising 960.00  
Salesmen's Salaries 450.00  
Traveling Expense 190.00  
Office Expense 46.50  
Office Salaries 225.00  
General Expense 34.20  
Rent 175.00  
Taxes and Insurance 21.30  
Discounts Allowed 47.90  
Interest Paid 33.10  
Interest and Discount Earned   54.00
Administrative Salaries 500.00  

On Feb. 1st the inventory shows a decrease of $3,500.00. A reserve of 3% on accounts receivable is to be created to provide for uncollectible accounts. To make these adjustments the following journal entries will be required:

On Feb. 1st, the inventory shows a decrease of $3,500.00. A reserve of 3% on accounts receivable will be created to account for uncollectible accounts. To make these adjustments, the following journal entries will be needed:

Trading a/c 3,500.00  
To Inventory   3,500.00
Decrease in Inventory    

A study of this entry will show that the result is the same if we make up the trading account by using purchases and adding or subtracting the decrease or increase in inventory, or if the preceding inventory is added and present inventory is deducted. The result in either case is the turnover and the above entry makes the necessary adjustment in the inventory account without closing the account through the trading account.

A look at this entry will show that the outcome is the same whether we create the trading account by using purchases and adjusting for any increase or decrease in inventory, or if we add the previous inventory and subtract the current inventory. In either case, the result is the turnover, and the above entry makes the necessary adjustment in the inventory account without closing the account through the trading account.

The entry for the reserve for uncollectible accounts is

The entry for the reserve for uncollectible accounts is

Profit and Loss 266.13  
To Reserves   266.13
Reserve of 3% to provide    
for uncollectible accounts.    

At the end of the next month this account will be adjusted by charging or crediting the amount necessary to maintain the total at the desired percentage of accounts receivable.

At the end of next month, this account will be adjusted by adding or removing the amount needed to keep the total at the desired percentage of accounts receivable.

UNDERWOOD TYPEWRITERS USED IN MELBOURNE UNIVERSITY COMMERCIAL EXAMINATIONS

UNDERWOOD TYPEWRITERS USED IN MELBOURNE UNIVERSITY COMMERCIAL EXAMS

139

Ledger with Accounts Classified

Classified Accounts Ledger

140

Ledger with Accounts Classified

Classified Account Ledger

141

Ledger with Accounts Classified

Classified Accounts Ledger

142

Ledger with Accounts Classified

Classified Accounts Ledger

143

Ledger with Accounts Classified

Classified Account Ledger

REVERSE OR SLIP POSTING

20. To feel absolutely sure that his work is correct is the ambition of every bookkeeper. The fear that an error will throw his books out of balance is always present, and is only dispelled when the ledger is proved at the end of the month.

20. Every bookkeeper dreams of being completely confident that their work is accurate. The worry that a mistake will throw their accounts off balance is always there, and it only goes away when the ledger is verified at the end of the month.

Accountants, bookkeepers, and mathematicians have long searched for an infallible rule or method of checking which would detect an error as soon as it is made. No system could possibly prevent the making of an error, but if detected, an error is quickly corrected. Numerous formulas and checking systems, designed to detect errors in posting, have been put on the market from time to time. Each has been advertised as the only infallible system. All have been eagerly purchased, tried more or less faithfully, and, as a rule, speedily discarded.

Accountants, bookkeepers, and mathematicians have long looked for a foolproof rule or method of checking that would catch an error as soon as it happens. No system can completely prevent errors from occurring, but if they are detected, they can be quickly corrected. Various formulas and checking systems aimed at identifying errors in posting have been released over time. Each has been promoted as the only foolproof system. All have been enthusiastically bought, tried somewhat faithfully, and generally discarded quickly.

Modern methods of bookkeeping have done more to aid in the detection of errors in posting than all of the checking systems combined. The sectionalization of accounts not only facilitates the detection of errors, but greatly minimizes the chances of their being made. As an illustration take a sales ledger which is subdivided into two or more parts, with special columns in cash book and sales book, and controlling accounts for each section. If the individual balances taken from the sales ledger do not agree with the controlling accounts, it is seen at a glance in which section the error has been made. Instead of a search through all postings to sales ledger accounts, it is only necessary to check postings to that particular section.

Modern bookkeeping methods have greatly improved the ability to catch errors in posting more than any of the checking systems combined. Organizing accounts into sections not only makes it easier to find mistakes but also significantly reduces the likelihood of them occurring. For example, consider a sales ledger that is divided into two or more parts, each with specific columns in the cash book and sales book, along with controlling accounts for each section. If the individual balances from the sales ledger don’t match the controlling accounts, it’s immediately clear which section contains the error. Instead of searching through all the postings in the sales ledger accounts, you only need to verify the postings in that specific section.

144

Ledger Proof Without a Trial Balance

Ledger Proof Without a Trial Balance

145Errors in posting to nominal accounts are minimized by special columns in cash book, sales book, and purchase record, with one posting at the end of the month, in place of a posting for each item entered.

145Errors in posting to nominal accounts are reduced by using special columns in the cash book, sales book, and purchase record, with one posting at the end of the month instead of a posting for each individual item entered.

But still, errors are and always will be made in posting, and for the bookkeeper who has a large number of accounts to post and wishes to keep a constant check on his work, the reverse posting or slip posting system will give satisfactory results with little labor.

But still, mistakes will always happen during posting, and for the bookkeeper who has many accounts to manage and wants to keep a steady check on their work, the reverse posting or slip posting system will provide good results with minimal effort.

Fig. 19. Monthly Posting Proof Sheet

Fig. 19. Monthly Posting Proof Sheet

This system is very simple, and easily operated. It consists of the use of a slip of paper with debit and credit columns in which accounts posted to the ledger are entered. A separate slip is used for each book from which postings are made, and the items are posted to the slip from the ledger. The slip should be placed on the desk on the opposite side of the ledger from the book of entry.

This system is really simple and easy to use. It involves a piece of paper with debit and credit columns where accounts entered into the ledger are recorded. A separate piece of paper is used for each book that postings are made from, and the items are transferred to the slip from the ledger. The slip should be placed on the desk opposite the ledger from the book of entry.

If posting is from the sales book, the ledger should be placed to the right of the sales book and the slip to the right of the ledger. After the item is entered in the ledger it is posted to the slip. When the work is completed the slip is footed and compared with the footing of the sales book. If the footings agree, it is quite evident that the correct amounts have been posted to the ledger, for it is scarcely possible that an incorrect amount has been posted to the ledger and the correct amount entered on the slip.

If you're posting from the sales book, place the ledger to the right of the sales book and the slip to the right of the ledger. After you enter the item in the ledger, post it to the slip. Once you've finished the work, total the slip and compare it with the total of the sales book. If the totals match, it's clear that the correct amounts have been posted to the ledger, because it's unlikely that an incorrect amount has been posted to the ledger while the correct amount has been entered on the slip.

A further daily proof may be had by inserting a blank slip of paper in the ledger wherever an item is posted. At the end of the day these ledger accounts are referred to, the amounts are drawn off, and total postings compared with the totals of the checking slips from the different books.

A daily confirmation can be done by putting a blank slip of paper in the ledger every time an item is recorded. At the end of the day, these ledger accounts are checked, the amounts are totaled, and the total postings are compared with the totals from the checking slips from various books.

146When postings are not checked daily a form should be prepared to which daily totals will be carried. Columns are provided for each book from which posted, and these are footed at the end of the month and compared with the footings of the books. If the ledger does not balance a comparison of this proof slip with the column footings of the books will show in which book the error has been made. The form of the monthly proof slip is illustrated in Fig. 19.

146When entries aren’t checked daily, a form should be set up to track the daily totals. There are columns for each book from which entries are made, and these are totaled at the end of the month and compared with the totals of the books. If the ledger doesn’t balance, comparing this proof slip with the column totals of the books will reveal where the error occurred. The layout of the monthly proof slip is shown in Fig. 19.

SPECIAL ACCOUNTING FORMS

21. Bookkeeping, if it is to fulfil its mission, must furnish a complete record of the transactions of a business. The record must show, as well, the results of each transaction or class of transactions, with respect to their bearing on the business as a whole, or on specific sections or departments of that business. From a mere record of personal debits and credits, bookkeeping has grown into a detailed history of a business.

21. Bookkeeping, to achieve its purpose, needs to provide a complete account of a business's transactions. The record must also reflect the outcomes of each transaction or type of transaction, regarding its impact on the business overall or on specific areas or departments within that business. What started as a simple record of personal debits and credits has evolved into a detailed history of a business.

The principles of bookkeeping are the same regardless of the nature, size, or condition of a business. But different businesses require different kinds of information; vital facts in one business may be valueless in another. The success or failure of each depends upon certain elements which must be recorded in its history. It is the work of the bookkeeper to record these facts—to write the history of the business in language that will be understood by anyone who may read it.

The principles of bookkeeping are the same no matter the type, size, or state of a business. However, different businesses need different kinds of information; essential facts for one business might be useless for another. The success or failure of each relies on certain factors that must be documented in its history. It's the bookkeeper's job to record these facts—to write the business's history in a way that anyone who reads it can understand.

Laying out the business history is the work of the accountant. He makes an analysis of those elements which bear on the success of the business, and determines what facts, when properly recorded, will furnish the clearest and most understandable history. And when he has determined what facts should be recorded he must plan how they are to be recorded—in what form they will present the most concise history of business transactions. His work should result in a system of bookkeeping that will present the most vitally important information, with a minimum expenditure of labor.

Laying out the business history is the job of the accountant. He analyzes the elements that contribute to the success of the business and figures out which facts, when accurately recorded, will provide the clearest and most straightforward history. Once he decides which facts to record, he needs to plan how they will be documented—in what format they will convey the most concise account of business transactions. His work should lead to a bookkeeping system that delivers the most essential information with minimal effort.

The increasing demand for more intelligible records—for facts—has stimulated the ingenuity of accountants in devising forms that will not only accommodate the records desired but will permit of their being made with the least labor. Special forms exactly suited to 147the records which they are to contain, are now made for every purpose. Labor-saving devices and methods have minimized the drudgery of bookkeeping.

The growing need for clearer records—specifically for data—has inspired accountants to create forms that not only meet these recording needs but also allow for easier and faster documentation. Specialized forms tailored to their specific contents are now available for every function. Time-saving tools and techniques have cut down on the tediousness of bookkeeping.

The bookkeeper who would rise above mediocrity requires something besides the ability to record business transactions in the proper columns of books prepared for him. He must know how to devise forms and books, how to adapt correct principles to the building of a system of bookkeeping for any line of business. If certain facts assume importance, he must know how those facts can best be obtained and recorded.

The bookkeeper who wants to stand out from the crowd needs more than just the skill to log business transactions in the right columns of the books set up for him. He must know how to create forms and records, as well as how to apply the right principles to develop a bookkeeping system tailored for any type of business. If certain facts become significant, he should understand the best ways to gather and document those facts.

To assist in familiarizing the student with the more modern methods, this section is devoted to illustrations and descriptions of special forms of books for various purposes. The student should devote careful study to these forms, for while they have been in the main devised to meet special conditions, the principles can be adapted to any line of business where similar conditions exist.

To help the student get accustomed to more modern techniques, this section focuses on illustrations and descriptions of specific types of books for different purposes. The student should study these forms carefully, because while they were mainly created to address unique situations, the underlying principles can be applied to any business where similar conditions are present.

SPECIAL LEDGERS

22. Loose Leaf Ledgers. A loose leaf ledger is one in which the leaves are removable. Instead of the sheets being bound in solid book form, each leaf is a separate sheet ruled for one ledger account. The sheets are filed or bound in what is known as the binder, being securely held in place by a mechanical device. The binder can be locked so that only the person holding the key can insert or remove the sheets.

22. Loose Leaf Ledgers. A loose leaf ledger is one where the pages can be taken out. Instead of the sheets being fixed in a solid book, each page is a separate sheet designed for one ledger account. The sheets are organized or held together in what’s called a binder, which keeps them securely in place with a mechanical device. The binder can be locked so that only the person who has the key can add or take out the sheets.

The loose leaf ledger is indexed either numerically or alphabetically. When the numerical method is used the sheets are numbered and placed in the binder in numerical order which gives the same arrangement as a bound book. A separate index is required with the numerical method. The alphabetical method of indexing necessitates the use of sheets on the edges of which are tabs or projections printed with the letters of the alphabet. These index sheets are placed in the binder in alphabetical order and the ledger sheets are placed between them. The alphabetical method is preferred by many as it makes the ledger self-indexing. Another method of indexing is a combination of the alphabetical and numerical. The alphabetical index sheet is used, and under it are filed all accounts of persons whose names begin with that letter. These sheets are numbered 148Account No. 1, No. 2, etc., and the names are written on the index sheet, followed by the account number. This practically divides the ledger into separate numerical ledgers for each letter of the alphabet.

The loose-leaf ledger is organized either numerically or alphabetically. When using the numerical method, the sheets are numbered and arranged in the binder in numerical order, which results in the same setup as a bound book. A separate index is needed for the numerical method. The alphabetical method requires sheets with tabs or labels printed with letters of the alphabet on their edges. These index sheets are organized in alphabetical order in the binder, with the ledger sheets placed in between them. Many people prefer the alphabetical method because it makes the ledger self-indexing. Another method combines both alphabetical and numerical indexing. The alphabetical index sheet is used, and underneath it, all accounts of individuals whose names start with that letter are filed. These sheets are numbered 148 Account No. 1, No. 2, etc., and the names are written on the index sheet, followed by the account number. This effectively divides the ledger into separate numerical ledgers for each letter of the alphabet.

Fig. 20. Loose Leaf Ledger

Fig. 20. Loose Leaf Notebook

Binders for loose leaf ledgers are made to hold from a few sheets up to one thousand or more. By proper arrangement of the indexes, more than one ledger can be accommodated in one binder. As an illustration, the general, purchase, and sales ledgers, each with its separate index, may all be in the same binder.

Binders for loose-leaf ledgers are designed to hold anywhere from a few sheets to a thousand or more. With the right organization of the indexes, multiple ledgers can fit into one binder. For example, the general ledger, purchase ledger, and sales ledger, each with its own index, can all be kept in the same binder.

One of the chief advantages of the loose leaf ledger is that all "dead" matter can be removed. When a sheet becomes filled, it can be removed to another binder called a transfer binder, and a new sheet put in its place. Or if the account be permanently closed, it is transferred, leaving only live accounts in the ledger. When new accounts are to be opened, it is only necessary to insert additional sheets. There is no transferring of all accounts from one ledger to another as with bound books, for the loose leaf ledger is never filled. If the number of sheets increases beyond the capacity of the binder, the ledger can be divided by transferring a part of the sheets to a new binder.

One of the main benefits of the loose-leaf ledger is that all "dead" materials can be removed. When a sheet is full, it can be moved to another binder called a transfer binder, and a new sheet can be added in its place. If the account is permanently closed, it is transferred, leaving only active accounts in the ledger. When new accounts need to be added, you only have to insert more sheets. There's no need to move all accounts from one ledger to another like you do with bound books, since the loose-leaf ledger never gets completely full. If the number of sheets exceeds the binder's capacity, you can split the ledger by transferring some sheets to a new binder.

The ruling of loose leaf ledger sheets is the same as in bound books, the forms usually being made to fit the business. A sheet with a conventional form of ruling is illustrated.

The ruling of loose-leaf ledger sheets is the same as in bound books, with the forms typically designed to suit the business. A sheet with a standard form of ruling is shown.

23. Card Ledgers. For certain classes of accounts, the card ledger is very desirable. It is well adapted for a sales ledger in a business having a large number of customers, and especially so if the 149nature of the business is such that the purchases of a customer are infrequent. In many businesses handling a single line of goods known as seasonable, sales are made in the spring and fall so that a customer purchases practically an entire year's supply in two orders.

23. Card Ledgers. For certain types of accounts, a card ledger is very useful. It's especially suited for a sales ledger in businesses with a large customer base, particularly if customers make purchases infrequently. In many businesses that sell a single line of seasonal goods, sales occur in the spring and fall, meaning a customer typically buys almost a whole year's supply in just two orders.

Fig. 21 a. Ledger Card for Dentists

Fig. 21 a. Dentist Ledger Card

The card ledger is largely used in banks for keeping accounts with depositors in the savings department. A card 5 inches x 8 inches in size gives room for forty items on each side, and for the average savings account will last more than two years.

The card ledger is mainly used in banks to manage accounts for depositors in the savings department. A card measuring 5 inches by 8 inches allows space for forty entries on each side, and for the average savings account, it will last for over two years.

Some advantages claimed for the card ledger are:

Some benefits claimed for the card ledger are:

First: Dead records are eliminated, as filled cards and closed accounts are transferred to a separate file, leaving only open accounts in the current file.

First: Inactive records are removed, as completed cards and closed accounts are moved to a separate file, leaving only open accounts in the current file.

Second: It can be expanded to any size, which makes it ideal for business with a large number of customers. The opening of a new account, or re-opening of a closed account, is accomplished by merely dropping a card in the right place.

Second: It can be scaled to any size, making it perfect for businesses with a large customer base. Opening a new account or re-opening a closed account can be done simply by dropping a card in the right spot.

Third: The labor of making trial balances is greatly reduced, as there are no closed accounts to refer to in the current file.

Third: The work of creating trial balances is significantly easier because there are no closed accounts to check in the current file.

Fourth: Statements can be mailed much earlier as the cards can be distributed among several clerks who can be working on them at the same time.

Fourth: Statements can be sent out much earlier since the cards can be handled by multiple clerks who can work on them simultaneously.

Fifth: The ledger can be subdivided as desired by the use of proper index cards. When one drawer or tray is filled, a part of the 150cards can be taken out and placed in another tray without disturbing their arrangement.

Fifth: The ledger can be broken down as needed using appropriate index cards. When one drawer or tray is full, some of the 150cards can be removed and placed in another tray without messing up their order.

There are two general plans of indexing the card ledger—alphabetical and numerical. The alphabetical method consists of a set of guide or index cards between which the cards are filed. This index may consist of one index for each letter of the alphabet, a smaller number with two or more letters on one index, or a much larger number subdividing the alphabet into as many parts as may be necessary. In planning an index for a card ledger, a safe rule to follow is to provide one index card for every ten ledger cards.

There are two main ways to organize the card ledger—alphabetical and numerical. The alphabetical method involves using a set of guide or index cards that separate the filed cards. This index can consist of one index for each letter of the alphabet, fewer indexes with two or more letters combined, or many more indexes dividing the alphabet into as many sections as needed. When designing an index for a card ledger, a good guideline is to have one index card for every ten ledger cards.

Fig. 21 b. Ledger Card for Publishers

Fig. 21 b. Publisher Ledger Card

A subdivision of the alphabetical index is the geographical or territorial. This divides the ledger by states and towns. Guide cards, printed with the names of the states, provide the main division; other guides, printed with names of towns, subdivide the state sections; and where necessary, alphabetical guides subdivide the names in the towns. If desired, the ledger may be divided into territorial sections, as East and West; or each section may include the territory covered by one salesman.

A section of the alphabetical index is the geographical or territorial part. This organizes the ledger by states and towns. Guide cards that list the states create the primary division; other cards with town names break down the state sections further; and when needed, alphabetical guides split up the names within the towns. If preferred, the ledger can be divided into territorial sections, like East and West; or each section can cover the area assigned to one salesperson.

A numerical index divides the cards by tens and hundreds. Guide cards numbered by hundreds—100, 200, etc.—provide the main divisions. Between these are placed guides numbered 10, 20, 30, etc. to subdivide these sections by tens, and the ledger cards are filed in numerical order between these guides. To facilitate locating any number desired, the cards themselves are made with small projections numbered from 0 to 9 to represent the units. Each card bears one tab, and all tabs bearing the same unit are in the same 151relative position on the card; that is—0 is always at the extreme left, while 9 is ten positions to the right. When the cards are placed in numerical sequence, between the guides numbered by 10's, any number can be found instantly. To find number 2,987, we refer first to the main guide number 29, then to the guide numbered 8—in the section between 29 and 30—and then to the number 7 tab next following. As there are never more than one thousand cards in a tray, any number can be found more quickly than in a bound book. If a card is misplaced in filing, the unit tab will greatly assist in locating the missing card. Suppose card No. 964 is missing; a search through the row of No. 4 tabs will locate it, no matter where filed. With this system of filing, a separate index by name is required, and this also is made on cards. For a very large ledger the numerical system is more frequently adopted than the alphabetical.

A numerical index sorts the cards by tens and hundreds. Guide cards numbered by hundreds—100, 200, etc.—create the main divisions. Between these, there are guides numbered 10, 20, 30, and so on, to further divide these sections by tens, and the ledger cards are organized in numerical order between these guides. To make it easier to find any number needed, the cards have small projections numbered from 0 to 9 to represent the units. Each card has one tab, and all tabs with the same unit are in the same position on the card; for example, 0 is always at the far left, while 9 is ten positions to the right. When the cards are arranged in numerical order, it's easy to find any number between the guides numbered by tens. To find the number 2,987, we first look at the main guide number 29, then the guide number 8—in the section between 29 and 30—and then to the number 7 tab that follows. Since there are never more than a thousand cards in a tray, any number can be found more quickly than in a bound book. If a card is misplaced, the unit tab will make it easier to find the missing card. For instance, if card No. 964 is missing, searching through the row of No. 4 tabs will help locate it, no matter where it was filed. With this filing system, a separate index by name is also needed, which is also made on cards. For very large ledgers, the numerical system is used more often than the alphabetical.

Fig. 21 c. Balance Form of Ledger Card

Fig. 21 c. Balance Form of Ledger Card

It is claimed that the numerical tab scheme affords one safeguard not found in an alphabetical system. A missing card is at once detected by the break in the row of tabs, but to make the safeguard of value it is necessary to leave the cards in the file even after accounts are closed.

It is said that the numerical tab system provides a protection that an alphabetical system doesn't have. A missing card is immediately noticed by the gap in the row of tabs, but to make this protection effective, it's important to keep the cards in the file even after accounts are closed.

There is no good reason why an alphabetical card ledger should not be as safe as the numerical. If it is desired to guard against the removal of one card and the substitution of another, the blank cards should be placed in the custody of one man, who will issue them to the bookkeeper as needed, first placing his initials on the card. In any event, the card ledger should be provided with a locking device 152which will prevent the removal of a card, except by the one who has the key.

There’s no good reason why an alphabetical card ledger shouldn’t be just as secure as a numerical one. If you want to prevent someone from taking one card and swapping it for another, the blank cards should be kept by one person, who will issue them to the bookkeeper as needed, adding their initials to each card. In any case, the card ledger should have a locking mechanism 152 that stops anyone from removing a card except for the person with the key.

These suggestions may be of assistance to the bookkeeper who is called upon to use a card ledger.

These suggestions might help the bookkeeper who needs to use a card ledger.

Never leave ledger cards lying on the desk. When you leave your work, put them back in the file, where they belong.

Never leave ledger cards on the desk. When you finish your work, put them back in the file where they belong.

Before leaving the office, lock the ledger so that no one can remove a card in your absence.

Before leaving the office, make sure to lock the ledger so that no one can take a card while you’re away.

If your superior asks you to see a certain ledger account, do not give him that one card. He may lose it. Give him the entire tray, with the cards securely locked. Should he insist on having that one card, ask him to give you a receipt for it.

If your boss asks you to look at a specific ledger account, don’t just hand over that one card. He might misplace it. Instead, give him the whole tray, with the cards safely locked up. If he insists on getting that one card, ask him to give you a receipt for it.

Some special forms of ledger cards are illustrated. Fig. 21 a. is a form used by a dental supply house. The special feature of the form is a separate column for each different class of goods purchased by the customer. Fig. 21 b. is used by a publisher for advertising accounts. Fig. 21 c. is a conventional balance ledger form adapted for use in almost any line of business.

Some special types of ledger cards are shown. Fig. 21 a. is a form used by a dental supply store. The unique characteristic of this form is a separate column for each different type of goods the customer purchases. Fig. 21 b. is used by a publisher for advertising accounts. Fig. 21 c. is a standard balance ledger form that can be used in nearly any type of business.

24. Tabular Ledger. This is a ledger in which the names are written down the side of the page, with debits, credits, and balances extending across the page. Columns are arranged to group entries during uniform periods, as a month, week, or day. A special feature of this style of ledger is that it can be more quickly balanced and proved than any other style. To prove this ledger add the balances at the end of the preceding period to the debit postings of the current period. This will equal the total of the credit postings added to the new balances, if the balances have been correctly extended. The postings to all of the accounts on a page—30 to 40—can be footed at one operation, saving much time.

24. Tabular Ledger. This is a ledger where the names are listed down the side of the page, with debits, credits, and balances spreading across the page. The columns are organized to group entries by consistent time periods, like a month, week, or day. A key feature of this type of ledger is that it can be balanced and verified more quickly than any other format. To check this ledger, add the balances from the end of the last period to the debit entries of the current period. This total should equal the sum of the credit entries plus the new balances, assuming the balances have been accurately carried over. The entries for all accounts on a page—30 to 40—can be totaled in one step, saving a lot of time.

Fig. 22 a. is a form of a tabular ledger used by banks, known as the Boston bank ledger. It is specially arranged to exhibit daily balances, as it is necessary that the depositor's ledger be balanced daily. This form can be used in a mercantile business, but as balances are not required daily, the form shown in Fig. 22 b. is better adapted to the purpose. These tabular forms of ledgers are not commonly used except in banks.

Fig. 22 a. is a type of table ledger used by banks, called the Boston bank ledger. It's designed to show daily balances because it's crucial for the depositor's ledger to be balanced every day. This layout can be used in a retail business, but since daily balances aren't required, the format shown in Fig. 22 b. is more suitable for that purpose. These tabular ledger formats are mainly used only in banks.

25. Balance Ledgers. Three forms of balance ledgers are illustrated, each one of which is specially adapted to some particular class of business.

25. Balance Ledgers. Three types of balance ledgers are shown, each one tailored for a specific type of business.

153

Fig. 22 a. Boston Bank Ledger

Fig. 22 a. Boston Bank Record

Fig. 22 b. Commercial Tabular Ledger

Fig. 22 b. Business Ledger

154The special feature of Fig. 23 a. is two credit columns—one for cash and one for merchandise returns. This form is favored in certain lines of business where merchandise returns are frequent. A special column serves to separate returns of merchandise sent out on approval, which in some businesses is an important item.

154The standout aspect of Fig. 23 a. is the two credit columns—one for cash and one for merchandise returns. This format is preferred in certain types of businesses where merchandise returns happen often. A dedicated column helps distinguish returns of items sent out on approval, which can be a significant factor in some industries.

Fig. 23 a. Ledger with Special Credit Columns

Fig. 23 a. Ledger with Special Credit Columns

Fig. 23 b. is provided with two balance columns, for debit and credit balances. This form saves time in taking trial balances, as it is seen at a glance whether the balance is a debit or a credit.

Fig. 23 b. has two balance columns for debit and credit balances. This layout saves time when preparing trial balances because it’s easy to see at a glance whether the balance is a debit or a credit.

Fig. 23 b. Balance Ledger

Fig. 23 b. Balance Sheet

The feature of Fig. 23 c. is several credit columns to one debit column. This form is largely used where sales are made subject to periodical payments. It is well adapted for installment accounts, rent accounts, insurance accounts, and similar classes. The number of credit columns can be extended indefinitely to meet existing conditions.

The feature of Fig. 23 c. includes multiple credit columns corresponding to a single debit column. This format is commonly used for sales that require periodic payments. It's particularly suitable for installment accounts, rental accounts, insurance accounts, and other similar types. The number of credit columns can be increased without limit to accommodate current circumstances.

THE PRUDENTIAL BUILDING
One of Buffalo's Best Office Buildings

THE PRUDENTIAL BUILDING
One of Buffalo's Top Office Buildings

155

Fig. 23 c. Balance Ledger for Installment Accounts

Fig. 23 c. Balance Ledger for Installment Accounts

CASH BOOKS

26. Since the almost universal adoption of special forms of sales books, purchase books, and check registers, the journal proper is only used for adjusting entries. The cash journal, which is a combination of cash book and journal, has taken the place of the two books. Some forms of this book have been illustrated earlier in this text, and a typical form is shown in Fig. 24 a. A study of this form will be found instructive as it suggests the many possibilities of segregating distinct classes of receipts and expenditures. Note the segregation of charges to manufacturing, selling, and administrative branches of the business. Under each branch the different kinds of expense might be shown with all their subdivisions by providing additional columns.

26. Since nearly everyone now uses special types of sales books, purchase books, and check registers, the main journal is mostly used for adjusting entries. The cash journal, which combines a cash book and a journal, has replaced these two books. Some versions of this book were shown earlier in this text, and a typical example is displayed in Fig. 24 a. Examining this format will be helpful as it highlights the various ways to separate different types of income and expenses. Pay attention to how costs are divided among manufacturing, selling, and administrative sectors of the business. Within each sector, you can list different kinds of expenses along with their subcategories by adding more columns.

In fact, as we have already stated, there is no end to the possibilities of segregating different classes of transactions by means of the columnar principle in designing books of entry. But it may not be out of place to sound a note of warning against increasing the size of the pages of a book beyond a reasonable limit. While the saving of time is the important factor that influences the introduction of columnar books, there has grown up a tendency to go to such extremes that the unwieldy book defeats this very purpose.

In fact, as we've already mentioned, there’s no limit to the ways we can sort different types of transactions using the columnar principle in designing entry books. However, it’s worth noting that we should be cautious about making the pages of a book too large. While saving time is key in bringing in columnar books, there’s a growing tendency to push the limits so far that the bulky book undermines this very goal.

156

Fig. 24. Cash Journal—Left-Hand Page

Fig. 24. Cash Journal—Left Page

While the "sundries" columns in the form shown render possible the making of any kind of adjusting entries in this cash journal, we recommend that it be reserved for cash transactions and that all adjusting entries be made in an ordinary journal. This will segregate cash transactions, just as sales and purchases are segregated, and render much easier an audit of the books. The journal of the ordinary type also affords abundant space for explanations which should be exceptionally complete for adjusting entries. Entries of this kind are frequently used to cover up fraud and they are sure to receive the careful attention of the auditor.

While the "sundries" columns in the form shown allow for any type of adjusting entries in this cash journal, we recommend using it strictly for cash transactions and making all adjusting entries in a regular journal. This will separate cash transactions, similar to how sales and purchases are separated, making it much easier to audit the books. The regular journal also provides plenty of space for explanations, which should be very detailed for adjusting entries. These kinds of entries are often used to conceal fraud, so they will definitely get careful attention from the auditor.

Fig. 24. Cash Journal—Right-Hand Page

Fig. 24. Cash Journal—Right Page

157

TABULAR SALES BOOKS

27. In no department of a business are tabulated records of greater value than in the sales department, for only by studying the records of sales of different classes of goods or of different departments can a manager determine which departments of his business are most profitable. A tabular sales book makes it possible to record sales in detail with very little additional labor, resulting in greater economy of time in collecting valuable data.

27. There’s no part of a business where organized records are more valuable than in the sales department. By analyzing the sales records of various types of products or different departments, a manager can figure out which areas of the business are the most profitable. A structured sales log allows for detailed recording of sales with minimal extra effort, leading to more efficient collection of important data.

Fig. 25 a. Tabular Sales Book

Fig. 25 a. Sales Record

In certain lines of business a record of quantities of different kinds of merchandise sold is of almost equal value to records of values. Examples are—wholesale coal business, in which records are kept of quantities and values of different grades and sizes or the product of different mines; lumber, in which sales are divided as to lumber, lath, shingles, sash, and doors; wholesale paper, in which some of the divisions are book, flats, bonds, cover, etc. A sales book designed for a business of this class is shown in Fig. 25 a. This is arranged for a record of sales in a coal business, segregating sales of the product of each of three mines.

In certain industries, keeping track of the quantities of different types of merchandise sold is almost as important as recording their values. For example, in the wholesale coal business, records are maintained for the quantities and values of various grades and sizes, or the products from different mines; in lumber, sales are categorized into lumber, lath, shingles, sash, and doors; in wholesale paper, some categories include book, flats, bonds, cover, etc. A sales book designed for this type of business is shown in Fig. 25 a. This book is set up to record sales in a coal business, separating sales by the products of each of the three mines.

There are businesses in which returns and allowances are so frequent as to constitute an important item in the record of transactions. Such cases demand special columns in either journal or sales book. Another condition occasionally met with is where purchases are frequently made from customers, resulting in accounts in both ledgers. This requires journal entries to adjust the accounts, but instead of making these in the regular journal, special columns can be provided for the purpose in the sales book. Fig. 25 b. illustrates a sales 158journal with columns for returns and allowances, and columns for purchase adjustments. The total of these adjustment columns are posted to the sales ledger controlling account.

There are businesses where returns and allowances happen so often that they become a significant part of transaction records. These situations require special columns in either the journal or sales book. Another situation that sometimes occurs is when purchases are often made from customers, which leads to accounts in both ledgers. This needs journal entries to adjust the accounts, but instead of recording them in the regular journal, special columns can be created for this purpose in the sales book. Fig. 25 b. shows a sales 158 journal with columns for returns and allowances, as well as columns for purchase adjustments. The totals from these adjustment columns are posted to the sales ledger controlling account.

Fig. 25 b. Sales Journal with Adjustment Column

Fig. 25 b. Sales Journal with Adjustment Column

Sales recapitulations are of very great importance in department stores and similar businesses where it is desired to ascertain the total sales of each sales person as well as the result by departments. In Fig. 25 c. is shown a sales recapitulation sheet arranged for daily records of sales of each clerk and of each department. All sales tickets are lettered or numbered to indicate the clerk, and at the end of the day these tickets are tabulated by numbers. One of these recapitulation sheets is used for a month's record, and it can of course be designed to accommodate as many departments and clerks as there are in the establishment. Recapitulation sheets arranged on this plan are found very convenient in many lines other than department stores.

Sales summaries are extremely important in department stores and similar businesses where it's essential to track the total sales of each salesperson as well as the results by department. In Fig. 25 c., you can see a sales summary sheet set up for daily records of each clerk's and each department's sales. All sales tickets are marked with letters or numbers to indicate the clerk, and at the end of the day, these tickets are tabulated by their numbers. One of these summary sheets is used for a month's record and can, of course, be designed to accommodate as many departments and clerks as there are in the business. Summary sheets structured this way are found to be very useful in many other fields besides department stores.

Fig. 25 c. Sales Recapitulation Sheet

Fig. 25 c. Sales Summary Sheet

159

Fig. 26. Departmental Pay-Roll Record for Piece Work and Day Workers

Fig. 26. Departmental Pay-Roll Record for Piecework and Day Workers

160

PAY-ROLL RECORDS

28. The designing of pay-roll records to meet the special conditions in the great variety of manufacturing industries, offers a wide field for the ingenuity of the bookkeeper or accountant. Where all employes are paid a stated wage and their employment in one department is continuous, the problem is a simple one, resolving itself into a mere record of the number of hours worked each day, the rate, and the amount due. But this condition seldom exists.

28. Designing payroll records to fit the unique needs of the diverse manufacturing industries provides a broad opportunity for the creativity of the bookkeeper or accountant. When all employees are paid a fixed wage and their work in one department is ongoing, the issue is straightforward, reducing to simply keeping track of the number of hours worked each day, the rate, and the total amount owed. However, this situation rarely occurs.

In most industries more complex problems are encountered. The same employe may be called upon to work in more than one department during a pay-roll period, or he may do several different kinds of work in the same department. In either case the form for the record must be so constructed as to furnish complete information relative to the cost of the different classes of work. Elaborate systems for gathering records of time on each detail of the work are employed in most modern factories, and the pay-roll record or time book is arranged for a consolidation of these detailed records.

In most industries, more complex problems arise. The same employee may be asked to work in multiple departments during a pay period, or they may handle several different types of work within the same department. In either situation, the record form must be designed to provide complete information regarding the costs associated with the various types of work. Many modern factories use sophisticated systems to collect time records for each specific task, and the payroll record or timebook is organized to consolidate these detailed records.

Fig. 26 illustrates a form used in one factory for a distribution of time records where men are employed on different kinds of work in different departments, and on both day wage and piece work plans. In this form provision is made for the record in each department, and each day's record is divided between time and piece work. Several lines are set aside for each employe, so that the record will be complete for each kind of work. At the extreme right, department totals are extended. These are quickly calculated for the reason that while an employe may do different kinds of work and in different departments the same operation is not performed in more than one department. To provide for records of more kinds of work this principle can be carried still farther by allowing more space for each employe, and in some cases a full sheet is assigned for each. In one factory the pay-roll book is loose leaf, one sheet being used for each employe. Each side of the sheet holds the record for two weeks, and by using both sides, it gives a complete record for four pay-roll periods.

Fig. 26 shows a form used in one factory for tracking time records where workers are engaged in various types of tasks across different departments, and under both hourly wage and piecework arrangements. This form includes sections for tracking records in each department, with each day's records split between time and piecework. Several lines are allocated for each employee to ensure that the record is thorough for each task. At the far right, department totals are provided. These can be quickly calculated since, though an employee may work on different tasks in various departments, the same operation isn't performed in more than one department. To accommodate records for additional types of work, this structure can be expanded by providing more space for each employee, and in some cases, a full sheet is dedicated to each. In one factory, the payroll book is a loose-leaf design, with one sheet used for each employee. Each side of the sheet documents records for two weeks, and utilizing both sides allows for a complete record over four payroll periods.

29. Combined Pay-Roll and Check Register. Many industries pay their employes by means of checks instead of in currency. Special pay checks are used which merchants willingly cash as an accommodation to their customers. Whenever the check system of payments is adopted it is best to carry a special bank account for the purpose. When 161the amount of the pay-roll is determined, a check should be drawn on the regular bank account and deposited in a special fund against which the pay checks will be drawn.

29. Combined Payroll and Check Register. Many industries pay their employees with checks instead of cash. Special paychecks are used, which merchants are happy to cash for their customers. Whenever the check payment system is used, it's a good idea to have a dedicated bank account for it. When the total payroll is calculated, a check should be written from the regular bank account and deposited into a special fund from which the paychecks will be issued.

Fig. 27 shows a form, designed for the use of a concern paying by check, which combines a check register with the pay-roll record. Since all checks drawn against this special fund are pay checks, this register gives a complete record of the special bank account.

Fig. 27 shows a form designed for a company that pays by check, which combines a check register with the payroll record. Since all checks issued from this specific fund are paychecks, this register provides a complete record of the special bank account.

Fig. 27. Combined Pay-Roll and Check Register

Fig. 27. Combined Pay-Roll and Check Register

162

A TYPICAL GRAIN ELEVATOR IN CHICAGO HARBOR, WITH A MODERN FREIGHTER READY FOR LOADING

A TYPICAL GRAIN ELEVATOR IN CHICAGO HARBOR, WITH A MODERN FREIGHTER READY FOR LOADING

163

TRUSTEES AND EXECUTORS' ACCOUNTS

1. From the accounting standpoint, business can be divided into two general classes: (a) Business conducted by the owner or a person appointed by him for the benefit of the owner; (b) Business that is the property of persons incapable of transacting business, necessitating the appointment, by the owners or other authority, of persons to transact business in place of the owner. It is with business of the latter class that we now have to deal.

1. From an accounting perspective, business can be categorized into two main types: (a) Business operated by the owner or someone appointed by them for the owner's benefit; (b) Business that belongs to individuals who cannot conduct transactions themselves, requiring the appointment of someone by the owners or another authority to handle the business on their behalf. Our focus now is on business of the second type.

In this class the owner or proprietor is supplanted by the administrator of the business. The generic term trustee applies to the administrator, who also takes more specific titles, depending upon the nature of the trust—as executor, administrator, assignee, guardian, receiver, etc. He is subject to the powers granted by the source of his appointment, and to the restrictions and requirements imposed by law.

In this class, the owner or proprietor is replaced by the administrator of the business. The general term trustee refers to the administrator, who may also have more specific titles based on the type of trust, such as executor, administrator, assignee, guardian, receiver, etc. They are subject to the powers given by the source of their appointment, along with the restrictions and requirements set by law.

A trustee—by whatever specific name designated—acting in his capacity as substitute for the owner, is the owner of the trust property as against the public. He is accountable to no one but the beneficiaries for whom he is acting as custodian. As owner of the estate, he can sue or be sued and perform many functions pertaining to the ordinary property owner. The beneficiary, by reason of his equity in the estate, can compel the trustee to carry out the provisions of his trust.

A trustee—regardless of the specific title used—acting as a substitute for the owner, is considered the owner of the trust property in relation to the public. They are only accountable to the beneficiaries they represent as custodians. As the owner of the estate, the trustee can sue or be sued and carry out various functions typical of a regular property owner. The beneficiary, due to their equitable interest in the estate, can require the trustee to fulfill the terms of the trust.

EXECUTOR'S ACCOUNTING

2. While an executor may keep his accounts in a manner chosen by himself, his accounting must conform to the legal requirements of the state in which the accounting is made. The form in which the accounting is to be made is not subject to rigid rules, but must conform to certain regulations. While requirements differ according to the jurisdiction, the regulations in general are as follows:

2. While an executor can manage their accounts as they see fit, their accounting must meet the legal requirements of the state where the accounting takes place. The format of the accounting isn't strictly defined, but it must adhere to certain regulations. Although the requirements vary by jurisdiction, the general regulations are as follows:

The preliminary accounting consists in filing an inventory of the personal estate of the deceased, showing both the nominal or 164face value of the assets and the amount they are expected to realize as stated by the appraisers. An executor usually files two accounts—an intermediate account, filed at some date prior to the final account, and a final account, showing the property in his hands subject to distribution by judicial decree. The intermediate account may be filed either voluntarily or by order of the court. The account must be accompanied by the following schedules:

The preliminary accounting involves submitting a list of the deceased's personal estate, detailing both the nominal or 164face value of the assets and the amount appraisers expect them to sell for. An executor typically submits two accounts—an intermediate account, filed before the final account, and a final account, which shows the property in their possession ready for distribution by court order. The intermediate account can be filed voluntarily or by court order. The account must include the following schedules:

SCHEDULE A

1. Statement of property contained in the inventory, which has been sold, with the manner of sale and amounts realized. 2. Statements of debts due the estate as scheduled in the inventory, which have been collected. 3. Statement of all interest and dividends received by the executor.

1. A summary of the property listed in the inventory that has been sold, including how it was sold and the total amounts received. 2. A summary of the debts owed to the estate as noted in the inventory, which have been collected. 3. A summary of all interest and dividends received by the executor.

SCHEDULE B

1. Statement of debts due the estate that have not been collected or are uncollectible, with reasons. 2. Statement of personal property named in inventory that has not been sold, with reasons, and the appraised value of such property. 3. Statement of all property belonging to the estate that is lost through no fault of the executor, with the cause of loss and appraised valuation. 4. Statement that no other property than set forth in the inventory or schedules has come into the possession or the knowledge of the executor. 5. Statement that the increase or decrease in value of all assets of the deceased is allowed for or charged in Schedules A and B.

1. List of debts owed to the estate that haven't been collected or can't be collected, along with reasons. 2. List of personal property listed in the inventory that hasn't been sold, including reasons and the appraised value of that property. 3. Statement of all estate property that is lost without any fault of the executor, including the reason for the loss and appraised value. 4. Statement confirming that no property other than what is listed in the inventory or schedules has come into the executor's possession or knowledge. 5. Statement that any increase or decrease in the value of all assets of the deceased is accounted for in Schedules A and B.

SCHEDULE C

1. Statement of all amounts expended by the executor for funeral and other necessary expenses, together with the receipts for, and objects of, such expenditures.

1. A statement of all amounts spent by the executor for funeral and other essential expenses, along with the receipts for and purposes of those expenditures.

2. Statement of the date when the executor caused a notice for claimant to present claims against the estate to be published, together with order, notice, and proof of publication herewith filed, to which the executor refers as a part of his account.

2. Statement of the date when the executor had a notice published for claimants to submit their claims against the estate, along with the order, notice, and proof of publication filed here, which the executor includes as part of his account.

165 SCHEDULE D

1. Statement of all claims of creditors allowed by executor or disputed by him, for which a judgment or decree has been rendered, with the names of the claimants, nature of claim, amount and date of judgment.

1. Statement of all claims by creditors approved or disputed by the executor, for which a judgment or decree has been issued, including the names of the claimants, the nature of the claim, the amount, and the date of the judgment.

2. Statement of all money paid to creditors of the deceased, with names and time of payment.

2. A statement of all the money paid to the deceased's creditors, including names and payment dates.

SCHEDULE E

1. Statement of all money paid to legatees, widow, or next of kin, of the deceased.

1. Statement of all money paid to beneficiaries, the widow, or next of kin of the deceased.

SCHEDULE F

1. Statement of names of all persons entitled—as widow, legatee, and next of kin, of the deceased—to a share of his estate, with place of residence, degree of relationship, and statement as to which are minors, whether they have a general guardian, and if so, the name and place of residence to the best of the executor's knowledge, information, and belief.

1. Statement of names of all people entitled—as widow, beneficiary, and next of kin, of the deceased—to a share of his estate, along with their place of residence, relationship, and indication of who are minors, whether they have a general guardian, and if so, the name and residence to the best of the executor's knowledge, information, and belief.

SCHEDULE G

1. Statement of all other facts affecting the administration of said estate, executor's rights, and those of others interested.

1. Statement of all other facts influencing the management of the estate, the executor's rights, and those of others involved.

These schedules provide all the material from which to make the account proper. In his account, the executor charges himself as follows:

These schedules give all the information needed to create the official account. In his account, the executor lists his charges as follows:

With amount of inventory $_________
With amount of increase as per schedule A _________
With amount of income as per schedule A _________
_________  
Total debits _________

He credits himself:

He takes the credit:

With amount of losses on sales as per schedule B $_________
With debts not collected as per schedule B _________
With articles mentioned in inventory lost, schedule B _________
With funeral expenses and other expenses, schedule C _________
166With money paid creditors, schedule D _________
With money paid to legatees, widow, or next of kin, schedule E _________
Total credits $_________
Balance _________
Add articles unsold _________
Add debts not collected _________
  _________
Total to be distributed _________

FORM OF ACCOUNTS

3. The devising of forms of trust and executory accounts offers a wide scope for the application of accounting knowledge. Many intricate problems arise in the interpretation of details of the trust and in the apportionment of sums received, between capital and revenue. Broadly, these accounts are prepared in one of two forms: (a) An account of charge and discharge; (b) in the form of regular ledger accounts. As has been intimated, legal requirements are complied with by the first form, but the second form is preferable. When ledger accounts are kept on the double entry plan, the fullest information can be obtained about the condition of the trust at any time, and from these accounts, the account of charge and discharge or any form required by the court can be made for each period.

3. Creating trust forms and executory accounts gives a broad opportunity to apply accounting knowledge. Many complex issues come up when interpreting trust details and allocating received amounts between capital and revenue. Generally, these accounts are prepared in one of two ways: (a) an account of charge and discharge; (b) in the format of regular ledger accounts. As mentioned, the first format meets legal requirements, but the second is preferred. When ledger accounts are maintained using the double-entry system, you can get the most complete information about the trust's condition at any time, and from these accounts, you can create the account of charge and discharge or any format needed by the court for each period.

In preparing the accounts the exact relationship of the trustee to the estate (as the property in trust is called) must be kept in mind. As the owner of the property, he is a creditor of the estate (the business) just as the proprietor of the business is the creditor of that business. On the other hand, as custodian, he is a debtor, being in possession of the property of others.

In preparing the accounts, the clear relationship of the trustee to the estate (which is what the property in trust is called) must be considered. As the owner of the property, he is a creditor of the estate (the business) just like the owner of the business is a creditor of that business. On the flip side, as the custodian, he is a debtor, since he holds the property that belongs to someone else.

In the ledger, property accounts are opened with the different classes of properties represented in the estate, which accounts are debited for the appraised value of the properties. These are known as custodian accounts.

In the ledger, property accounts are created for the various types of properties in the estate, and these accounts are charged with the appraised value of the properties. These are known as custodian accounts.

A contra account representing the estate—sometimes called the capital—is opened under some such caption as Personal Estate Account. This account is credited with the combined values of all properties represented by the custodian accounts.

A contra account representing the estate—sometimes called capital—is opened under a title like Personal Estate Account. This account is credited with the total values of all properties represented by the custodian accounts.

167When the assets are entered and posted, the ledger accounts will appear as follows:

167Once the assets are recorded and finalized, the ledger accounts will look like this:

These asset accounts represent the value of the individual properties, while the personal estate account represents the combined values of all personal property of the estate (No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3). The personal estate is known as the corpus, distinguishing it from the real estate.

These asset accounts show the value of the individual properties, while the personal estate account shows the total value of all personal property in the estate (No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3). The personal estate is known as the corpus, which sets it apart from the real estate.

If the trustee, as the custodian, is called upon merely to distribute the estate to the beneficiaries, his accounting is a very simple problem. In many cases, however, he is called upon to take care of the income arising from the corpus or the real estate.

If the trustee, acting as the custodian, is only needed to distribute the estate to the beneficiaries, their accounting is a straightforward issue. However, in many cases, they are required to manage the income generated from the assets or real estate.

When he receives such income in the shape of cash, he debits 168himself as custodian through a cash account, and credits an income account under an appropriate title—as interest account, rent account, dividend account, etc. The account may represent the income from a specific property, or all income of a stated class. For example, rent account may represent the rents received from all properties, or there may be a separate rent account for each.

When he gets cash income, he records it as a custodian in a cash account and credits an income account with the right title—like interest account, rent account, dividend account, etc. The account might show the income from a specific property or all income of a certain type. For instance, the rent account could represent the rents collected from all properties, or there could be a separate rent account for each one.

Distinguished from the income accounts, the trustee sometimes has accounts representing the sale of real estate, which must then be treated as personal property. When real estate is sold, cash is credited and an account, usually called Sale of Real Estate, is credited.

Distinguished from the income accounts, the trustee sometimes has accounts that represent the sale of real estate, which must then be treated as personal property. When real estate is sold, cash is credited, and an account, usually called Sale of Real Estate, is credited.

4. Classification of Accounts. A classification of the accounts of the executor naturally divides into: (a) Personal estate account; (b) asset accounts; and (c) distributive accounts. The personal estate account, as we have seen, is a controlling account which represents the total of all assets. It is also referred to as the capital account. It is, as well, a controlling account of the distributive accounts, and in the end exhibits a schedule of transactions in the order in which they occur.

4. Classification of Accounts. The classification of an executor’s accounts naturally divides into: (a) Personal estate account; (b) asset accounts; and (c) distributive accounts. The personal estate account, as we've seen, is a primary account that shows the total of all assets. It's also known as the capital account. Additionally, it acts as the main account for the distributive accounts and ultimately presents a schedule of transactions in the order they happen.

The asset accounts, representing the different classes of properties or assets of the estate, correspond to the asset accounts of an ordinary business.

The asset accounts, which represent the various types of properties or assets of the estate, are similar to the asset accounts of a typical business.

The distributive accounts may be likened to the revenue accounts of a business enterprise. These accounts are debited with all amounts distributed—as expense of administering the estate—and credited with all income or revenue other than that representing the conversion of the original estate into cash.

The distributive accounts can be compared to the revenue accounts of a business. These accounts are charged with all amounts distributed as expenses for managing the estate and credited with all income or revenue that is not from turning the original estate into cash.

5. Executors' Commissions. While the commission allowed administrators and executors varies in different states, the amount specified by law in New York applies as a general rule. The commission allowed is 5% on the first thousand dollars received and disbursed, 2½% on the next ten thousand dollars, and 1% on all amounts above eleven thousand dollars.

5. Executors' Commissions. The commission that administrators and executors can charge differs by state, but the amount set by law in New York is generally a standard reference. The commission is 5% on the first thousand dollars received and distributed, 2.5% on the next ten thousand dollars, and 1% on any amount over eleven thousand dollars.

If the value of the personal property is $100,000.00, or more, in excess of all debts, each executor is entitled to receive the commissions provided in case of a single executor; except that if there are more than three executors, the amount which the three would receive must be divided in proportion to the services rendered.

If the value of the personal property is $100,000.00 or more, after paying off all debts, each executor is entitled to the commissions as if there were just one executor; however, if there are more than three executors, the amount that the three would receive must be divided based on the services provided.

In cases where the will provides a specific remuneration, the 169executor is not entitled to a commission. He can, however, decline a legacy and in lieu thereof take the usual commission.

In situations where the will specifies a certain payment, the 169executor isn’t entitled to a commission. However, he can choose to refuse a legacy and instead take the standard commission.

Commissions are not allowed on specific legacies, that is, where specific property, as household effects, automobiles, etc., are named. An annuity is a series of legacies and the commission is not allowed on its payment. However, when a beneficiary is given the use of a fund, the beneficiary is charged with the commission.

Commissions aren't allowed on specific legacies, meaning when specific items like household goods, cars, etc., are listed. An annuity consists of a series of legacies, and no commission is permitted on its payout. However, if a beneficiary is granted the use of a fund, that beneficiary is responsible for the commission.

In all cases where administrators or trustees are responsible for the investment of the funds of an estate, they are entitled to receive commission on the income. The commission in all of these cases is at the regular rate, that is, 5% on the first thousand dollars received and paid out, etc.

In every situation where administrators or trustees are in charge of managing an estate's funds, they have the right to receive a commission on the income. The commission in all these cases is at the standard rate, which is 5% on the first thousand dollars received and paid out, and so on.

EXAMPLES

1. Two trustees collect in one year an income of $36,000.00 for a beneficiary, the expense being $3,000.00. If each trustee receives an equal share, what commission will be paid to each, and what sum shall be paid to the beneficiary? Ans. Each trustee, $275.00; beneficiary, $3,275.00.

1. Two trustees make an income of $36,000.00 in one year for a beneficiary, with expenses being $3,000.00. If each trustee gets an equal share, how much commission will each receive, and what amount will be given to the beneficiary? Ans. Each trustee, $275.00; beneficiary, $3,275.00.

2. Executor X collects of the corpus of an estate $30,000.00, executor Y collects $40,000.00. Together they pay out $55,000.00. Commissions are to be divided in proportion to the amount collected by each. What commission will each receive and what is the net amount to be paid to the residuary legatee? Ans. Commissions: X, $381.43; Y, $508.57. Residuary legatee, $14,110.00.

2. Executor X collects $30,000 from the estate, while executor Y collects $40,000. Together, they pay out $55,000. Commissions will be split based on how much each collected. What commission will each get, and what is the net amount to be given to the residuary legatee? Answer: Commissions: X, $381.43; Y, $508.57. Residuary legatee, $14,110.00.

3. Four trustees collect and pay out of an estate $350,000.00, the total debts of the estate being $135,000.00. What commission will each trustee receive? Ans. $2,767.50.

3. Four trustees collect and distribute $350,000.00 from an estate, with the total debts of the estate being $135,000.00. What commission will each trustee receive? Ans. $2,767.50.

SAMPLE ACCOUNTS

6. Following are the transactions and accounts of David Brown, executor of the estate of Henry Snow, deceased. For keeping the accounts, the journal, cash book, and ledger are the books used.

6. Here are the transactions and accounts of David Brown, executor of the estate of Henry Snow, who has passed away. The journal, cash book, and ledger are the books used for keeping the accounts.

June 1, 1908
Henry Snow died this day, naming David Brown executor.
 
—3—
Estate inventoried and appraised as follows:    
Cash in bank $390.50  
Mortgages 5,000.00  
170R. R. stocks $5,000.00 appraised @ 112   $5,600.00
Household furniture   1,000.00
Debtors to the estate    
Henry Alton $160.00  
J. L. Lawrence 52.00  
D. Pringle 75.00  
F. D. Smith 84.50 371.50
   
Interest accrued on mortgages $5,000.00    
—5 mo. @ 5%   104.16
Accrued dividends on stock estimated    
at 3% semi-annual, payable July    
1st—5 mo. accrued   137.50
   
    12,603.66
 
—30—
Approved the following claims:    
Dr. Knight bill   200.00
Funeral expenses—Undertaker   250.00
Henry Cole account   62.00
H. Dawson account   17.00
Probate expenses   100.00
 
—30—
Additional assets discovered    
Geo. Smith owes the estate   50.00
 
July 1
Collected 6 mo. interest on mortgage    
at 5%   250.00
 
—1—
Collected the following accounts:    
Henry Alton   160.00
D. Pringle   75.00
 
—1—
Paid the following:    
Dr. Knight   200.00
Funeral expenses   250.00
Henry Cole   62.00
H. Dawson   17.00
Probate expenses   100.00
 
—5—
Received dividend on R. R. stock    
3½% semi-annual on $5,000.00   $175.00
 
—5—
Sold R. R. stock $5,000.00 @ 132   6,600.00
 
Sept. 1
Collected the following account:    
J. L. Lawrence   52.00
 
—20—
Sold H. H. furniture   790.00
Depreciation on H. H. furniture   210.00
 
Nov. 1
Collected the following accounts:    
F. D. Smith   84.50
Geo. Smith   50.00
 
Dec. 1
Collected 6 mo. interest on mortgage    
$5,000.00 @ 5%   125.00
 
—1—
Sold mortgage   5,000.00

A GENERAL VIEW OF THE PLANT OF THE FOX TYPEWRITER COMPANY, GRAND RAPIDS, MICH.

A GENERAL VIEW OF THE PLANT OF THE FOX TYPEWRITER COMPANY, GRAND RAPIDS, MICH.

172

Executor's Journal

Executor's Log

173

Executor's Account of Cash Receipts and Disbursements

Executor's Account of Cash Receipts and Payments

174

Classified Ledger Accounts of an Executor

Classified Ledger Accounts of an Executor

175

Classified Ledger Accounts of an Executor

Classified Ledger Accounts of an Executor

176

Classified Ledger Accounts of an Executor

Classified Ledger Accounts of an Executor

177

Schedule Filed by an Executor

Executor's Schedule Filed

178

Schedule Filed by an Executor

Executor's Schedule Filed

179

EXERCISE

7. George Williams died on March 5th, bequeathing his entire property, after payment of all debts and funeral expenses, to the following beneficiaries: George Williams, Jr., one-fifth; John Williams, one-fifth; Fred Williams, one-fifth; Mary Williams, three-tenths; and George Robinson, one-tenth.

7. George Williams passed away on March 5th, leaving his whole estate, after settling all debts and funeral costs, to the following beneficiaries: George Williams, Jr., one-fifth; John Williams, one-fifth; Fred Williams, one-fifth; Mary Williams, three-tenths; and George Robinson, one-tenth.

The inventory filed by his executors was as follows:

The inventory submitted by his executors was as follows:

Stocks and bonds $4,000.00
Mortgages 6,000.00
Wearing apparel 100.00
Cash in bank 40.00

There are two executors, and their transactions are as follows:

There are two executors, and their transactions are as follows:

Cash Receipts
Stocks and bonds sold 3,341.00
Mortgages realized 4,656.00
Wearing apparel sold 50.00
Dividends collected on stocks and bonds 1,800.00
Interest collected on mortgages 2,400.00
Interest received on deposits in bank 100.00
Real estate sold 1,000.00
Rents collected 720.00
Cash in bank at decease, withdrawn 40.00
 
  14,107.00
 
Cash Payments
Funeral expenses 30.00
Expenses of probate 200.00
General legal expenses 400.00
Repairs to building 220.00
Stationery, postage, etc. 10.00
Accountant's fee 80.00
Debts of deceased 500.00
Taxes 800.00
Insurance 10.00
George Williams, Jr., on account of legacy 2,200.00
John Williams, on account of legacy 2,500.00
Fred Williams, on account of legacy 2,220.00
Mary Williams, on account of legacy 3,100.00
George Robinson, on account of legacy 960.00
 
  13,230.00
  =========

180The inventory at the date on which they wish to account is as follows:

180The inventory on the date they want to report is as follows:

Stocks and bonds $1,000.00
Mortgages 1,280.00
Cash in bank 877.00

Make up summary statement of the Executor's Accounts showing the balance due each legatee.

Make a summary statement of the Executor's Accounts showing the balance owed to each legatee.

ACCOUNTS WITH TRUST PROVISIONS

8. In the accounts shown in the preceding illustrations the entire estate is distributed by judicial decree. When all of the property has been distributed, the custodian accounts will have been closed into the personal estate account, which in turn is closed by the distribution of the estate. In many cases the will of the deceased provides that certain beneficiaries shall have a life interest in certain of the assets. Quite frequently the widow is given the income on certain investments which will revert to the estate at her death. This is illustrated in the following example of trust accounts:

8. In the examples provided in the previous illustrations, the whole estate is divided by a court order. Once all the property has been distributed, the custodian accounts will be merged into the personal estate account, which is then closed with the distribution of the estate. Often, the deceased’s will specifies that certain beneficiaries will have a life interest in particular assets. It is common for the widow to receive the income from specific investments, which will return to the estate when she passes away. This is demonstrated in the following example of trust accounts:

Edward Brown died on June 15, 1907, leaving a will which elected that after payment of all just and lawful debts the following legacies should be made:

Edward Brown passed away on June 15, 1907, leaving a will that stated that after all legitimate and lawful debts were paid, the following gifts should be distributed:

To his widow, that part of the real estate consisting of his residence, the household effects therein, and the income from $50,000.00 to be invested.

To his widow, that part of the property that includes his home, the belongings inside it, and the income from $50,000.00 that will be invested.

To his son and daughter, $20,000.00 each, and an equal share of the above $50,000.00 at his widow's death.

To his son and daughter, $20,000 each, and an equal share of the remaining $50,000 upon his widow's death.

The inventory made up for the preliminary accounting was as follows:

The inventory created for the initial accounting was as follows:

Cash in house $200.00
Cash in bank 1,500.00
Household effects valued at 2,500.00
Stocks 40,000.00
Book accounts 20,000.00
Merchandise, fixtures, and stock in trade 25,000.00

The real estate consists of

The property includes

The residence of the deceased, valued at 15,000.00
5 houses valued at 15,000.00
(to be sold according to will)  
181

Executor's Accounts With Trust Provisions

Executor's Accounts with Trust Terms

182

Executor's Accounts With Trust Provisions

Executor's Accounts with Trust Terms

183

Executor's Accounts With Trust Provisions

Executor's Accounts with Trust Terms

184

Executor's Accounts With Trust Provisions

Executor's Accounts with Trust Terms

185

Executor's Accounts With Trust Provisions

Executor's Accounts With Trust Terms

186

Accounting of an Executor, in the Form of an Account of Charge and Discharge

Accounting of an Executor, in the Form of an Account of Charge and Discharge

A FACTORY CHEMICAL LABORATORY AT THE PLANT OF THE S. OBERMAYER CO., CINCINNATI, OHIO

A FACTORY CHEMICAL LAB AT THE S. OBERMAYER CO. PLANT, CINCINNATI, OHIO

187

Accounting of an Executor, in the Form of an Account of Charge and Discharge

Accounting of an Executor, in the Form of an Account of Charge and Discharge

188

REALIZATION AND LIQUIDATION ACCOUNTS

9. A realization and liquidation account is an account showing the result of the liquidation of a business or an estate.

9. A realization and liquidation account is an account that displays the outcome of closing down a business or an estate.

It is debited with the total assets as shown by the balance sheet or statement of affairs, and is credited with all liabilities to outside creditors. The account is subsequently credited with the amounts realized on assets, and debited with liabilities liquidated together with the expenses of realization and cost of liquidation.

It is charged with the total assets as presented in the balance sheet or statement of affairs, and is credited with all obligations to external creditors. The account is then credited with the amounts obtained from assets, and charged with the liabilities cleared, along with the costs of realization and liquidation expenses.

Realization and liquidation accounts are frequently prepared in the form of an account of charge and discharge as shown in the preceding pages for executor's accounts.

Realization and liquidation accounts are often prepared as an account of charge and discharge, as demonstrated in the previous pages for executor's accounts.

STATEMENT OF AFFAIRS

10. A statement of affairs is frequently confused with a balance sheet. This is because, like a balance sheet, a statement of affairs exhibits the resources and liabilities of a business. The difference lies in the fact that a statement of affairs is made up partly from information gained from the books and partly from information secured from other sources.

10. A statement of affairs is often mistaken for a balance sheet. This is because, similar to a balance sheet, a statement of affairs displays the assets and debts of a business. The key difference is that a statement of affairs is created using both information from the accounting records and data obtained from other sources.

A statement of affairs is used chiefly in the preparation of a statement of the condition of an insolvent concern, or one whose affairs have been, for any reason, placed in charge of an Administrator. In a going business, all facts that have a bearing on its financial standing should be recorded on the books, when the statement will be made in the form of a balance sheet.

A statement of affairs is primarily used to prepare a report on the condition of an insolvent business or one whose operations have been, for any reason, placed under the control of an Administrator. In an ongoing business, all information that affects its financial status should be documented in the records, and the statement will be presented as a balance sheet.

Statements of affairs of a going business are sometimes made when it is desired to make a showing for a special purpose, or at a date other than a regular closing date. When the books have been improperly kept, a statement of affairs, or statement of assets and liabilities, is necessary to get all of the facts properly recorded.

Statements of a business's current situation are occasionally created when there's a need to present information for a specific reason, or on a date that isn't a regular closing date. If the accounting records have been poorly maintained, a statement of affairs, or a statement of assets and liabilities, becomes essential to accurately document all the relevant facts.

11. Statement of Affairs of a Bankrupt. A statement of affairs of a bankrupt is prepared on a somewhat different basis than a similar statement for a going concern. Such a statement is prepared for the benefit of creditors, and should be based on the probability of the creditors receiving their claims in whole or in part.

11. Statement of Affairs of a Bankrupt. A statement of affairs for a bankrupt is created on a slightly different basis than one for a business that is still operating. This statement is made for the benefit of creditors and should reflect the likelihood of creditors being able to collect on their claims, either fully or partially.

189

A Statement of Affairs of a Bankrupt

A Statement of Affairs of a Bankrupt

190On the left-hand side of the statement, the liabilities should be listed, showing whether they are actual, contingent, or provisional; which are preferable or ordinary, or secured partly or wholly by assets held by creditors of the concern as security for their claims. On the right, the assets of the concern should be shown. These should be classified as to whether they are free for distribution among the ordinary creditors or subject to special liability or claims and which must be liquidated before the assets can be released for distribution.

190On the left side of the statement, the liabilities should be listed, indicating whether they are actual, contingent, or provisional; which are preferable or ordinary, or secured partly or completely by assets that creditors hold as security for their claims. On the right, the assets of the business should be shown. These should be categorized based on whether they are available for distribution among ordinary creditors or subject to special liabilities or claims that must be settled before the assets can be distributed.

The assets may be listed on the basis of their value in a going concern, or on the basis of the prices they are estimated to bring at forced sale. The best practice is to list the assets to show, in one column, their nominal value, and in another column the amounts they are expected to realize. The statement is prepared for the express purpose of showing the probability of creditors—preferable, secured, partly secured, and ordinary—receiving their claims in full or being obliged to accept a dividend. In preparing such a statement, therefore, the investigation should be extended beyond the mere bookkeeping records. While the statement should be based on the properly balanced books of account, it must be supplemented by information from other sources.

The assets can be listed based on their value as a continuing business or on the prices they might fetch in a forced sale. The best practice is to present the assets in one column showing their nominal value and in another column indicating the expected amounts they will realize. This statement is specifically created to illustrate the likelihood of creditors—preferential, secured, partly secured, and ordinary—receiving their claims in full or having to accept a dividend. Therefore, when preparing such a statement, the investigation should go beyond just the accounting records. While the statement should rely on properly balanced accounts, it needs to be enriched with information from other sources.

The statement of liabilities should include, not only all of the liabilities shown on the books of the debtor, but all other enforcible claims, including contingent liabilities on account of the debtor's name being on commercial paper as an endorser.

The statement of liabilities should include not just all the liabilities recorded in the debtor's accounts but also any other enforceable claims, including contingent liabilities stemming from the debtor's name appearing on commercial paper as an endorser.

Preferable claims for taxes, wages, and salaries which must be paid in full out of the assets of the estate, should be deducted from the assets in order to show the net value of the estate available for distribution among ordinary creditors. The details of such claims should be included among the liabilities, but without extending the amounts to the total column.

Preferable claims for taxes, wages, and salaries that need to be fully paid from the estate’s assets should be subtracted from the assets to reveal the net value of the estate available for distribution to regular creditors. The specifics of these claims should be listed among the liabilities but should not be added to the total column.

Claims of secured creditors also are entered on the liabilities side of the statement, but are not carried to the total column. Such claims are deducted from the assets forming the specific security held, the balance only being included among the assets available for distribution and carried to the total assets column.

Claims from secured creditors are listed on the liabilities side of the statement, but they don't count toward the total column. These claims are subtracted from the assets that make up the specific security held, and only the remaining balance is included in the assets available for distribution and counted in the total assets column.

Partly secured claims are entered among the liabilities, but the amount to which they are secured is deducted, and the balance, which must take the same chances of payment as other unsecured claims, is entered in the liabilities column. The corresponding assets are entered on the assets side but not extended.

Partly secured claims are listed among the liabilities, but the amount that is secured is deducted, and the remaining balance, which faces the same risk of payment as other unsecured claims, is recorded in the liabilities column. The corresponding assets are listed on the assets side but not extended.

191

A Deficiency Account Which Shows the Causes of Loss

A Deficiency Account That Shows the Reasons for Loss

192These adjustments are necessary to show clearly the net assets that will be available for the ordinary creditors, and the total amount of claims to be satisfied out of these assets.

192These adjustments are needed to clearly display the net assets that will be available for regular creditors and the total amount of claims that need to be settled from these assets.

Every statement of affairs should also have appended to it schedules showing the fullest particulars of the different entries which appear in the statement. The names and addresses of all creditors should be given and the nature of the debt, whether a trading debt or for borrowed money, should be clearly shown. Full particulars of any security held should also be given.

Every report of financial status should also include schedules that provide detailed information about the different entries listed in the report. The names and addresses of all creditors should be included, along with the type of debt, whether it's a business debt or a loan. Any details about any security held should also be included.

It is much more difficult to ascertain the value of the assets of a bankrupt than the amount of the liabilities. While it is comparatively easy to get at the cost or book value of the assets, if the books have been properly kept, it is usually necessary to write off a considerable portion of this value to arrive at the amount likely to be realized on forced sale. It is usually advisable, therefore, to call in an appraiser, familiar with the line of business involved, to set the values of the assets on the basis of a going business and on forced sale.

It is much harder to determine the value of a bankrupt's assets than to figure out the total liabilities. While it’s relatively easy to find out the cost or book value of the assets, assuming the records have been well-maintained, a significant portion of this value often needs to be written off to estimate what can realistically be obtained in a forced sale. Therefore, it's typically a good idea to bring in an appraiser who understands the specific industry to assess the value of the assets based on both the ongoing business and the forced sale.

By showing the book value of the assets and the values they are expected to realize, the probable deficiency as a result of the liquidation of the estate is readily seen. Book debts should be classified as good, doubtful, and bad. Good debts are extended at face value, doubtful debts at the amount they are expected to realize, while the bad debts are entered on the statement without extending any amounts.

By displaying the book value of the assets and their expected realizable values, it's easy to see the likely shortfall from liquidating the estate. Book debts should be categorized as good, doubtful, and bad. Good debts are listed at face value, doubtful debts are recorded at the amount they are predicted to realize, while bad debts are shown on the statement without assigning any amounts.

Assets should be listed in the order of their availability, those most readily realized being placed first. At the bottom of the statement, in the form of a note, the dividend available for ordinary creditors, exclusive of expense of realization and liquidation, is shown.

Assets should be listed by how easily they can be accessed, with those that can be quickly converted to cash listed first. At the end of the statement, there's a note that shows the dividend available for regular creditors, not including the costs of realization and liquidation.

A statement of affairs is shown, Page 27, which will make the explanation clear.

A statement of affairs is provided on Page 27, which will clarify the explanation.

Every statement of affairs should, when possible, be accompanied by a deficiency account. The purpose of the deficiency account is to show, as far as may be, the cause of insolvency. This account is credited with the losses and shrinkage in the estate shown by the statement of affairs, the losses shown by the books, and the withdrawals of the owner or partners. It is debited with the capital at the last known date of solvency, all additions of capital, and all profits shown by the books. The balance is the net amount of the deficiency, and should agree with the amount shown by the statement of affairs. A deficiency account is shown in connection with the illustration of a statement of affairs.

Every statement of affairs should, whenever possible, be accompanied by a deficiency account. The purpose of the deficiency account is to explain, as much as possible, the reasons for insolvency. This account is credited with the losses and decrease in the estate as shown by the statement of affairs, the losses reported in the books, and any withdrawals made by the owner or partners. It is debited with the capital at the last known solvency date, all additional capital, and all profits recorded in the books. The balance reflects the net amount of the deficiency and should match the amount shown in the statement of affairs. A deficiency account is presented alongside an illustration of a statement of affairs.

STOCK EXCHANGE BUILDING, CHICAGO, ILL.

Chicago Stock Exchange Building

195

STOCK BROKERS' ACCOUNTS[4]

1. The principal feature of brokerage accounting is that such companies are not supposed to make investments upon their own account, but to act as intermediaries or agents for those who desire either to buy or sell.

1. The main point of brokerage accounting is that these companies aren’t supposed to invest for themselves, but rather to operate as intermediaries or agents for those who want to buy or sell.

4.  Copyright, 1909, by American School of Correspondence.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.Copyright, 1909, by American School of Correspondence.

As this is the case, such companies' profits depend entirely upon the commission charged their clients, which is charged whether they buy or sell for a client. There is also a margin of profit on the interest account, as large brokerage firms are enabled to secure money from banks at very favorable rates, sometimes much lower than the regular six per cent charged to customers.

As a result, these companies' profits rely completely on the commissions they charge their clients, which are applied whether they buy or sell on behalf of a client. There's also a profit margin on the interest accounts, since large brokerage firms can get money from banks at very attractive rates, often much lower than the typical six percent charged to consumers.

The legitimate broker actually buys and sells, as instructed by his client. If a customer instructs the broker to buy one thousand shares of D. & R. G. preferred at 88½, the customer deposits the margin required by the broker, usually 10 per cent, and the broker at the first opportunity thereafter, buys in open market the one thousand shares of D. & R. G. stock ordered, paying in full for the same. The customer may have a certain time to take up this stock, say thirty or sixty days, but as he is still indebted to the company for ninety per cent of the purchase, he is required to pay six per cent interest upon the deferred payments until such time as the stock is finally taken up and paid for.

The legitimate broker actually buys and sells as directed by their client. If a customer tells the broker to buy one thousand shares of D. & R. G. preferred stock at 88½, the customer deposits the required margin, usually 10 percent, and the broker, at the first opportunity, purchases the one thousand shares of D. & R. G. stock on the open market, paying in full. The customer might have a specific time frame to take ownership of this stock, like thirty or sixty days, but since they still owe the company 90 percent of the purchase price, they need to pay 6 percent interest on the unpaid balance until the stock is fully taken and paid for.

LARGE CAPITAL REQUIRED

2. It will be seen that in a multitude of transactions of this character, a very large amount of money is required by the broker, to carry on his business successfully. As very few of them have the amount of capital necessary, they resort to bank loans. Banks are very willing to loan money with listed stocks as collateral security, and frequently do so at favorable rates for the broker. This rate is determined by the condition of the money market, but is invariably less than the rate of interest charged to the client.

2. It's clear that in many transactions like this, brokers need a significant amount of money to run their business successfully. Since very few have the necessary capital, they turn to bank loans. Banks are often eager to lend money using listed stocks as collateral, and they usually offer favorable rates for brokers. This rate depends on the state of the money market, but it is always lower than the interest rate charged to clients.

196

GRAIN PURCHASES

3. Purchases of grain at a stipulated price differ from stock purchases, inasmuch as the full amount of the purchase does not have to be paid until the delivery of the goods, although there are frequently charges, such as storage and insurance, which must be made upon long time purchases. These charges do not accrue, however, until after delivery. If a customer buys fifty thousand bushels of wheat in April for September delivery, the purchase is made by the brokers at the earliest date possible, in order to avoid any fluctuation of the market. When the broker makes the purchase he pays over the amount necessary to secure the same. If the deal is carried through to maturity, the grain is delivered to the broker who has made the purchase for his client, and is in turn delivered to the client upon the payment of the balance due, including all charges upon the same.

3. Buying grain at a set price is different from buying stocks because you don't have to pay the full amount until the goods are delivered. However, there are often charges, like storage and insurance, that need to be paid for long-term purchases. These charges don’t apply until after delivery. If a customer buys fifty thousand bushels of wheat in April for delivery in September, the purchase is made by the brokers as early as possible to avoid any changes in the market. When the broker makes the purchase, he pays what’s needed to secure it. If the deal goes through, the grain is delivered to the broker who bought it for his client and then is handed over to the client once the remaining balance is paid, including all associated charges.

It is frequently the case, however, that before the actual delivery takes place, the client has ordered the broker to sell a sufficient amount to cover the deal. This may be either at an advance or a decline from the price purchased, but in either case the broker receives his commissions for both transactions—buying and selling.

It often happens that, before the actual delivery, the client has asked the broker to sell enough to cover the deal. This could be at a higher or lower price than what was bought, but in either situation, the broker earns his commissions for both transactions—buying and selling.

BULLS AND BEARS

4. Investors who are always figuring upon an advance in prices are termed bulls, and those who are confident of lower prices are termed bears. If a seller sells for future delivery what he does not own, he is termed short and becomes temporarily a buyer, in order that he may have a sufficient amount to fill his orders. If a buyer holds stock or grain for a rise, or contracts for future delivery, he is termed long and becomes temporarily a seller, seeking to bring his holdings down to the normal demand.

4. Investors who are always expecting prices to go up are called bulls, while those who believe prices will drop are referred to as bears. If a seller sells something for future delivery that they don’t actually own, they are called short and temporarily act as a buyer to ensure they have enough to fulfill their orders. If a buyer holds onto stock or grain hoping for a price increase, or makes contracts for future delivery, they are called long and temporarily act as a seller, trying to adjust their holdings to meet normal demand.

EXACT BOOKKEEPING NECESSARY

5. It will be seen from the nature of the business that the bookkeeping department must be very exact, careful in its dealings, and as prompt as a bank in its action. Every precaution must be taken to safeguard the broker and protect the customer. The accounts must show, with each transaction, the brokerage or commission charges and, as in active times the transactions are very numerous, they must be quickly and accurately recorded in the books of the company.

5. It’s clear from the nature of the business that the bookkeeping department needs to be very precise, careful in its operations, and as quick as a bank in its actions. Every precaution must be taken to protect the broker and safeguard the customer. The accounts must clearly show the brokerage or commission fees with each transaction, and since there are many transactions during busy periods, they must be recorded in the company’s books quickly and accurately.

197

BROKER'S COMMISSION

6. The percentage or commission due to the broker is included in the amount deposited to protect the deal, which is called a margin. If there should be a decline in price of either stock or grain, sufficient to cause the broker to feel insecure, he always reserves the right to call upon the customer for an additional deposit, even though the time of delivery has not yet arrived. In case the customer fails to make such additional deposit, the broker can sell the securities, grain, or other purchase, at once, in order to protect himself; the amount primarily deposited by the customer is thereby forfeited.

6. The commission owed to the broker is included in the amount deposited to secure the deal, known as a margin. If there’s a drop in the price of either stock or grain that makes the broker feel uneasy, he always has the right to ask the customer for an extra deposit, even if the delivery date hasn’t arrived yet. If the customer doesn’t provide the additional deposit, the broker can immediately sell the securities, grain, or other items purchased to protect himself; the initial deposit made by the customer is then lost.

All orders for the purchase and sale of any article are received and executed with the distinct understanding that actual delivery is contemplated and that the party giving the order so understands and agrees.

All orders for buying and selling any item are accepted and carried out with the clear understanding that actual delivery is expected and that the person placing the order acknowledges and agrees to this.

SECURITIES

7. It is understood and agreed between the broker and his client, that all securities carried in his account, or deposited to secure the same, may be carried in the broker's general loans, and may be bought or sold at public or private sale without notice, when such sale or purchase is deemed necessary by the broker for his protection.

7. It is understood and agreed between the broker and his client that all securities held in his account, or deposited as collateral, may be included in the broker's general loans and can be bought or sold at public or private sale without notice, when the broker feels such actions are necessary for his protection.

It is also understood and agreed that the right is reserved by the broker to close transactions on all accounts without notice, when protection is exhausted, or when, in his judgment, it is near enough exhausted as to endanger the account, and the broker reserves the right to settle contracts with his client, in accordance with the rules and customs of the exchange where the order is executed.

It is also understood and agreed that the broker has the right to close transactions on all accounts without notice when protection is used up, or when, in his judgment, it is close enough to being used up that it could endanger the account. The broker also reserves the right to settle contracts with his client according to the rules and customs of the exchange where the order is executed.

BUCKET SHOPS

8. The class of brokerage concerns termed bucket shops are those which do not actually carry out the orders of their customers, who neither buy nor sell anything, but who expect quick deals, frequent changes and, speaking plainly, merely gamble with their clients, allowing them to take whichever side they prefer. The large margin which this fraternity receives is a commission on deals whether they win or lose.

8. The type of brokerage called bucket shops are those that don’t actually execute their customers' orders. They don’t buy or sell anything but expect quick transactions and frequent changes. To put it simply, they just gamble with their clients, letting them choose whichever side they want. The hefty margin this group makes comes from the commission on trades, regardless of whether they win or lose.

198In order to maintain at least a pretense of legality, there must be an actual transfer of all stocks and commodities speculated in. The broker must acquire nominal possession of something which represents stocks, grain, cotton, or other commodities. To do this he must borrow money from the bank, or borrow stock or warehouse receipts from those who have them to lend. In either instance he charges interest to his speculative customers.

198To keep up at least the appearance of legality, there has to be an actual transfer of all stocks and commodities being speculated on. The broker needs to gain nominal possession of something that represents stocks, grain, cotton, or other commodities. To do this, he has to borrow money from the bank or borrow stock or warehouse receipts from those who are willing to lend them. In either case, he charges interest to his speculative customers.

It is estimated that the brokers in New York City who are members of the various exchanges, have an average amount in call loans outstanding of about $600,000,000.00, all of which vast sum is used to finance the orders of the brokers' customers. In dull times the minimum falls as low as $350,000,000.00, but there have been periods of speculative activity when $1,100,000,000.00 have been thus employed. The interest rate charged brokers constantly varies, but those who have had dealings with them state that their accounts rarely show less than five per cent interest. The broker charges the customer six per cent, thus averaging one per cent profit upon all money borrowed.

It’s estimated that brokers in New York City who are part of the various exchanges have an average of about $600,000,000 in outstanding call loans, all of which goes towards financing their customers' orders. In slow periods, this amount can drop to as low as $350,000,000, but there have been times of high speculation when it has reached up to $1,100,000,000. The interest rates charged to brokers constantly fluctuate, but those who work with them say that their accounts typically show interest rates of at least five percent. The broker charges the customer six percent, giving them an average profit of one percent on all borrowed funds.

The New York Stock Exchange was founded for a high and honorable purpose, the same being true of the New York Produce Exchange, The Chicago Board of Trade, and other institutions for coöperative trading and the determination of values, in accordance with the recognized codes of business, and in conformity with the laws of supply and demand. Such exchanges serve admirably the producer and the merchant. They have a valid function to the investor in railroad and corporation securities, and are indispensable in facilitating the massing and distribution of capital required by large commercial enterprises.

The New York Stock Exchange was established for a noble purpose, just like the New York Produce Exchange, the Chicago Board of Trade, and other organizations focused on cooperative trading and determining values based on established business practices and the laws of supply and demand. These exchanges effectively serve both producers and merchants. They play an important role for investors in railroad and corporate securities and are essential for gathering and distributing the capital needed by large commercial enterprises.

LEGITIMATE DEALERS

9. Every legitimate brokerage concern has its representative or representatives on the board of trade in the city wherein it is located, and they are members in good standing of the board. When an order is given by a customer, either through the wicket or by wire, it is immediately transferred to the floor man and he proceeds to buy or sell as the instructions are given. In an active market the client must take the chances of slight fluctuations, which are just as likely to be in his favor as against him. The floor man reports the 199sales or purchases as soon as made, with the price paid and from whom purchased. The entries are immediately made to the customer's account.

9. Every legitimate brokerage firm has its representative or representatives on the trading floor in the city where it's based, and they are members in good standing of the board. When a customer places an order, either through the window or by phone, it's instantly passed to the floor trader, who then buys or sells according to the given instructions. In a busy market, the client has to accept the risk of small price changes, which could work out in their favor or against them. The floor trader reports the sales or purchases as soon as they happen, including the price paid and the source of the purchase. The details are immediately recorded in the customer's account.

CLEARING HOUSE

10. The boards of trade in different cities maintain a clearing house somewhat similar to that used by the banks, to settle the deals of each member of the board each day. The deals consummated during the day's session are reported to the clearing house and the amounts due from and payable to each firm or individual member are computed. If the brokerage firm has purchased ten thousand dollars more than it has sold, a check is given to the board for ten thousand dollars, as there must be some other firm or firms who have sold more than they have purchased to whom this ten thousand dollars is due, and to whom it is paid. Deliveries of stock are made at the time the balance is paid.

10. The trade boards in different cities have a clearinghouse similar to what banks use, to settle the transactions of each board member every day. The deals made during the day's session are reported to the clearinghouse, and the amounts owed to and due from each firm or individual member are calculated. If a brokerage firm has bought ten thousand dollars more than it has sold, a check for that amount is given to the board, since there must be other firms that have sold more than they have bought, to whom this ten thousand dollars is owed, and to whom it is paid. Stock deliveries are made when the balance is settled.

RING SETTLEMENT

11. At the close of the day, settlements for grain purchases are made between brokers at an agreed settlement price. If brokers have bought and sold to each other in varying amounts, only the difference in the price is adjusted with each other. What are called ring settlements save considerable time, money, and labor. The ring settlement is a settlement between three or more parties without the necessity of margining and may be illustrated in this manner:

11. At the end of the day, brokers settle grain purchases at a mutually agreed settlement price. If brokers have bought and sold to each other in different amounts, only the price difference is adjusted between them. What are known as ring settlements save a lot of time, money, and effort. The ring settlement is a settlement among three or more parties without the need for margining, which can be illustrated like this:

A has bought 50,000 bushels of wheat of B, and has sold 50,000 bushels to C. By inquiry, it is found that C has sold 50,000 bushels to B. It is ascertained that the transactions between A, B, and C offset each other, and instead of each party being obliged to put up margins upon each transaction, a settlement may be effected by paying the difference in price, as the sale from C to B may be at a different price from the sale made by B to A, and the sale made by A to C, may have been at a still different price. By the adjustment between the different parties of the difference in price, the necessity of margining by A, B, or C is rendered unnecessary.

A bought 50,000 bushels of wheat from B and sold 50,000 bushels to C. Upon checking, it turns out that C sold 50,000 bushels back to B. It's determined that the transactions among A, B, and C cancel each other out. Instead of each party needing to provide margins for each transaction, they can settle by paying the price difference, since the sale from C to B might be at a different price than the sale from B to A, and the sale from A to C could have been at yet another price. By adjusting the price differences among the parties, A, B, or C won't need to provide margins.

ILLUSTRATION

A bought 50,000 bushels of wheat of B at $1.23; A sold 50,000 bushels of wheat to C at $1.23½. By making up the ring it was found that C has sold to B 50,000 bushels at $1.22½. In making the settlement it is found that C 200is indebted to B ½ cent per bushel for the amount sold, as B sold at ½ cent advance; C is also indebted to A ½ cent per bushel as he purchased of A at a ½ cent advance on the price A bought from B. The settlement of this deal would be made by C giving his check for the amount due to B and to A, and there would be no necessity for any one of the three brokers putting up a margin on the deals. The amount of grain is offset one by the other, and the difference in price has been adjusted by payment of cash.

A bought 50,000 bushels of wheat from B at $1.23; A sold 50,000 bushels of wheat to C at $1.23½. After reviewing the transactions, it was found that C sold 50,000 bushels to B at $1.22½. During the settlement, it was determined that C owes B ½ cent per bushel for the amount sold, since B sold at a ½ cent markup; C also owes A ½ cent per bushel because he purchased from A at a ½ cent increase over the price A paid to B. The settlement of this deal would involve C writing a check for the amounts owed to both B and A, and there wouldn’t be any need for any of the three brokers to post a margin on the trades. The volume of grain cancels each other out, and the price difference has been settled with a cash payment.

COMMODITIES HANDLED

12. The commodities that are handled upon the board and by brokers in general—food stuffs—are wheat, corn, oats, pork, lard, and short ribs. The various listed stocks are also bought and sold, a considerable business is done in bonds, and in some exchanges mining properties are listed, bought, and sold; although the latter is not common in the larger and more important exchanges. Cotton is a very important factor in some exchanges, and tobacco in others.

12. The goods dealt with on the trading floor and by brokers generally—food items—include wheat, corn, oats, pork, lard, and short ribs. Various listed stocks are also traded, a significant amount of business occurs in bonds, and in some exchanges, mining properties are listed, bought, and sold; although this is not common in the larger and more major exchanges. Cotton plays a significant role in some exchanges, and tobacco in others.

CORNERING THE MARKET

13. To corner the market is to offer to buy and be prepared to carry out your offer, for an amount more than is offered for sale, thus causing the price to advance. Sometimes this is done by large operators to their advantage and sometimes, in spite of their large purchases, which encourage a rising market, the prices fall before their deals are consummated, and they are left high and dry with a considerable loss instead of a large profit. The bull who tries to run a corner has a strong foretaste of what it means to advance sensationally, a staple article of consumption. Stocks and bonds may be hoisted ever so high; real estate may be boomed to far beyond its intrinsic or even potential worth—the public has no objection; the process is, in fact, rather pleasing to it. A lift in cereals or cotton above the normal lines encounters many protests and the higher the lift, the more savage the protest. This of course does not include the farmer or planter, unless he has disposed of his output; then he willingly enough joins the chorus of protestation.

13. To corner the market means to make an offer to buy and be ready to follow through with that offer, for a price higher than what’s being offered for sale, which causes the price to increase. Sometimes, big players do this for their own benefit, but at times, even with their large purchases boosting the market, prices can drop before their deals are completed, leaving them stuck with a significant loss instead of a big profit. The bull trying to corner the market gets a real taste of what it means to dramatically increase the price of a staple good. Stocks and bonds can go up as high as they want; real estate can be inflated beyond its true or even possible value—and the public typically doesn't mind; in fact, they often find it quite enjoyable. However, when prices of cereals or cotton rise above normal levels, there’s a lot of pushback, and the higher the price goes, the more intense the backlash becomes. This doesn’t include farmers or planters, unless they’ve already sold their products; then they happily join in on the protests.

VALUE OF THE WIRE

14. The telegraph is a very important factor to the grain and stock broker, as a large majority of their business is done by wire. Many of their clients are distributed through the country and keep 201close watch of the fluctuations of the market, sending their orders by wire, at what they consider an opportune time.

14. The telegraph is a key tool for grain and stock brokers since most of their business is conducted through it. Many of their clients are spread out across the country and closely monitor market fluctuations, sending their orders via wire when they think the timing is right. 201

Most brokerage firms have a number of customers outside of the city, and these customers as well as those in the city who are large buyers, keep a considerable deposit on hand with the broker at all times. This deposit is frequently augmented by advantageous sales or decreased by losses, commissions, and interest charges. Reports of the condition of customers' accounts are made with frequency and any customer who finds that he has more money in the hands of the broker than is considered necessary, can secure part of the same by asking, or if he desires to close all transactions, the total amount due him is paid over at once. All amounts thus deposited are credited to customers' accounts and properly taken care of through the bookkeeping department.

Most brokerage firms have several clients outside the city, and these clients, as well as larger buyers in the city, maintain a significant deposit with the broker at all times. This deposit is often increased by profitable trades or decreased by losses, commissions, and interest charges. Reports on the status of customer accounts are provided regularly, and any client who finds they have more money with the broker than necessary can request a portion of it back. If they want to close all their transactions, the full amount owed is paid out immediately. All deposits are credited to customer accounts and properly managed by the bookkeeping department.

SETTLEMENT OF CONTRACTS BY OFFSET

15. To quote from the rules of the Chicago Board of Trade:

15. To quote the rules of the Chicago Board of Trade:

In case it shall appear that the delivery of any outstanding trade or contract between members of the association may be offset by some other corresponding trade or contract, made by the parties with other members of the association; and the parties to such trade or contract, or their authorized agents, consent to such offset, such trade or contract shall be deemed to have been settled; any balance between the current value of the property covered by such trade or contract, and the several contract prices shall be due and payable immediately by the party from whom such balance may be due, to the party entitled to receive the same under his contract.

If it turns out that the delivery of any outstanding trade or contract between members of the association can be balanced out by another trade or contract made by those parties with other members of the association, and if the parties involved, or their authorized agents, agree to that offset, then that trade or contract will be considered settled. Any difference between the current value of the property involved and the respective contract prices will be due immediately from the party owing the balance to the party entitled to receive it under their contract.

This is the rule applying to ring settlements hereinbefore described. To quote further:

This is the rule for ring settlements mentioned earlier. To quote further:

"MARKET VALUE TO BE POSTED

The current market value of the property contracted for shall be conspicuously posted, at a stated hour each day, under the direction of the Board of Directors, in the Exchange Hall and in the Settlement Room of the Board, which posting shall serve as a basis for the adjustment of all contracts settled, as herein provided on that day.

The current market value of the property being contracted will be clearly displayed at a specific time each day, as directed by the Board of Directors, in the Exchange Hall and in the Settlement Room of the Board. This display will be the basis for adjusting all contracts settled on that day, as stated here.

"ADJUSTMENT OF BALANCES ON SETTLEMENT

In order to facilitate the operation of this section, each member is required to keep a settlement book, in which shall be entered the names of parties with whom settlements have been made and the dates and terms of the trades included in such settlement, and the terms of such settlements, and the prices at which the commodities were originally sold or purchased, and the amounts due to or from him or them on each separate settlement, also the net amount due to or from him or them on all settlements.

To make this section work, each member must keep a settlement book where they record the names of the parties involved in settlements, along with the dates and terms of the trades included in those settlements, the settlement terms, the prices at which the goods were originally sold or bought, the amounts owed to or from them on each separate settlement, and the total net amount due to or from them for all settlements.

202 "CLEARING HOUSE AND REPORTS

The Board of Directors is hereby authorized to provide a suitable office, with the necessary employes, to which members shall be required, at stated hours each day, to make reports, showing the net balance due to or from each member, as shown by such settlement book, and also the general balance due to or from him or them upon all such settlements; each report to be accompanied with an acceptable check for the balances, if any, due from him or them on the contracts so settled; whereupon, if said report is found to be correct, as compared with other reports rendered him, the person in charge of said office shall, at a stated hour each day, pay to each of the parties making such report any balances which he may have collected, and which shall appear to be due to them by said reports, less such charges as shall be prescribed by the Board of Directors as compensation for the services of said office.

The Board of Directors is authorized to provide an appropriate office, staffed with the necessary employees. Members are required to report at set times each day, showing the net balance owed to or by each member, as recorded in the settlement book, along with the overall balance due from them for all such settlements. Each report must be accompanied by an acceptable check for any balances owed from them based on the settled contracts. If the report is verified as accurate compared to other reports submitted, the person in charge of the office shall, at a designated time each day, pay each party who made a report any balances collected that are owed to them, minus any fees set by the Board of Directors for the services of the office.

"CONFIRMATION OF TRANSACTIONS FOR FUTURE
DELIVERY, ETC.

It shall be the duty of each member or firm making a transaction for future delivery of grain or flax-seed in five thousand or one thousand bushel lots, lard and pork in two hundred and fifty or fifty package lots, and D. S. short ribs and D. S. extra short clears in lots of fifty thousand or twenty-five thousand pounds, under the Rules of the Association, to confirm such transaction by sending to the clearing house a memorandum of the same by 6 o'clock P. M. of the day on which it is made; such memorandum shall be in writing, and shall state on its face the date of the transaction, the quantity and kind of property covered by the same, the month of delivery, the price, and the name of the party to whom sold or of whom bought, and shall be signed by the party or firm making the same. All transactions of the same date made with any member or firm may be included in one memorandum, and all such memoranda shall be sent to the clearing house by the member or firm making the same, in unsealed envelopes addressed to the member or firm with whom such transactions were made. It shall be the duty of the clearing house manager to assort and have ready for delivery by 8 o'clock A. M. of the following day, and to deliver, on application, all envelopes containing such memoranda as are left with him in compliance with this section.

It is the responsibility of each member or firm involved in transactions for future delivery of grain or flaxseed in lots of five thousand or one thousand bushels, lard and pork in lots of two hundred and fifty or fifty packages, and D.S. short ribs and D.S. extra short clears in lots of fifty thousand or twenty-five thousand pounds, under the Rules of the Association, to confirm these transactions by sending a memorandum to the clearing house by 6 PM on the day they occur. This memorandum must be written and clearly state the date of the transaction, the quantity and type of goods involved, the delivery month, the price, and the name of the buyer or seller, and must be signed by the party or firm creating it. All transactions from the same date with any member or firm can be included in one memorandum, and all such memoranda should be sent to the clearing house by the member or firm that made them, in unsealed envelopes addressed to the member or firm involved in those transactions. It is the duty of the clearing house manager to sort and have ready for delivery by 8 AM the next day, and to provide, upon request, all envelopes containing those memoranda that have been submitted in accordance with this section.

There is a fine imposed upon any member failing to comply with the above provisions.

There is a fine for any member who fails to comply with the above provisions.

"FAILURE TO DELIVER OR RECEIVE ON CONTRACT

In case any property contracted for future delivery is not delivered at maturity of contract, the purchaser may, if he shall so elect, consider the contract forfeited; or he may purchase the property on the market for the account of the seller, by 1:15 o'clock P. M. of the next business day, notifying him at once of such purchase; or he may require a settlement with the seller at the average market price on the day of maturity of contract, and any damages or loss due to the purchaser, by reason of such purchase or declared settlement, shall be due and payable by the seller immediately.

If any property that was agreed upon for future delivery is not delivered by the contract's due date, the buyer may choose to consider the contract canceled; or they can buy the property on the market for the seller's account by 1:15 PM on the next business day, notifying the seller immediately about this purchase; or they can request a settlement with the seller at the average market price on the contract's due date. Any damages or losses incurred by the buyer because of this purchase or declared settlement must be paid by the seller right away.

A SECTION IN THE GENERAL OFFICES OF THE SIMMONS HARDWARE COMPANY, ST. LOUIS, MO.

A SECTION IN THE GENERAL OFFICES OF THE SIMMONS HARDWARE COMPANY, ST. LOUIS, MO.

203In case any property contracted for future delivery is not received and paid for when properly tendered, it shall be the duty of the seller, in order to establish any claim on the purchaser, to sell it on the market at any time during the next twenty-four hours, at his discretion, after such default shall have been made, notifying the purchaser within one hour of such sale; and any loss resulting to the seller shall be paid by the party in default.

203 If any property that was agreed to be delivered in the future is not received and paid for when it’s properly offered, the seller must sell it on the market within the next twenty-four hours at their discretion after the default occurs. The seller must notify the purchaser within one hour of the sale; any loss incurred by the seller will be the responsibility of the party that defaulted.

DEPOSITS TO SECURE THE FULFILLMENT OF TIME CONTRACTS

Fig. 1. Memorandum of Deposit with Broker to Secure Contracts

Fig. 1. Memorandum of Deposit with Broker to Secure Contracts

16. The rules of the board of trade provide that on time contracts, purchasers shall have the right to require of sellers as security, a deposit of ten per cent, which amount is based on the contract price of the property purchased; they are also further allowed to demand security from time to time to the extent of any advance in the market value above selling price. Sellers shall have the same right on property sold, and, in addition, any difference that may exist or occur between the estimated legitimate value of any such property and the price of sale. It is required that all securities shall be deposited with the treasurer of the association or with some 204bank duly authorized by the board of directors to receive such deposits. The board requires in each instance a memorandum which shall state the name of the depository, the date on which the deposit is made, the name of the depositor, and also the name or names of the party or parties in whose favor the deposit is to be made, together with the amount of such deposit in detail and also in the aggregate. The left-hand part of the memorandum is retained by the depository selected, the right-hand portion thereof being taken by the depositor after being duly signed by the person authorized to receipt for the said deposit, and without delay this memorandum must be placed in the office of the clearing house. A detail of this memorandum is shown in Fig. 1.

16. The rules of the board of trade state that for time contracts, buyers have the right to require sellers to provide a security deposit of ten percent, based on the contract price of the property purchased. They can also request additional security as the market value rises above the selling price. Sellers have the same right for sold properties, along with any difference that may arise between the estimated legitimate value and the sale price. All securities must be deposited with the association's treasurer or with a bank that is authorized by the board of directors to accept such deposits. The board requires a memorandum in each case that states the name of the depository, the date of the deposit, the name of the depositor, and the names of the parties benefiting from the deposit, along with a detailed amount of the deposit and the total amount. The left side of the memorandum is kept by the selected depository, while the right side is given to the depositor after being signed by the authorized person who receives the deposit. This memorandum must then be promptly submitted to the clearing house office. A detailed example of this memorandum is shown in Fig. 1.

Upon the fulfillment or settlement of any contract or upon the closing of any contract—deposits upon which have been made—when the full adjustment of all differences relating to the same shall have been effected, the deposit shall be paid to the party depositing.

Upon the fulfillment or closure of any contract for which deposits have been made, and once all differences related to it have been fully resolved, the deposit will be returned to the party who made it.

COMMISSIONS ALLOWED BY BOARD TO BROKERS

17. The commissions to be collected by brokers from customers are fully prescribed by the board of trade in each city and do not materially differ. While it will not be possible to give all the rates of brokerage or the charges allowed for buying, selling, or accounting, the commissions allowed on the Chicago Board of Trade for buying or selling, or for buying and selling, are as follows:

17. The fees that brokers charge customers are set by the board of trade in each city and don’t really vary much. While we can't provide all the rates for brokerage or the fees for buying, selling, or accounting, here are the commissions allowed on the Chicago Board of Trade for buying or selling, or for buying and selling:

For the purchase, or for the sale, or for the purchase and sale by grade alone of wheat, corn, or oats, to be delivered in store, either for immediate or for future delivery, one-eighth of one cent per bushel.

For buying or selling, or for buying and selling based solely on grade of wheat, corn, or oats, to be delivered in-store, either for immediate or future delivery, it's one-eighth of a cent per bushel.

For the purchase, or for the sale, or for the purchase and sale, by grade alone, of rye, barley, or flax-seed, to be delivered in store, either for immediate or for future delivery, one-quarter of one cent per bushel.

For buying or selling, or for buying and selling, by grade only, of rye, barley, or flaxseed, to be delivered in store, either for immediate or future delivery, one-quarter of a cent per bushel.

For the purchase, or for the sale, or for the purchase and sale of lard, six cents per tierce.

For buying, selling, or both buying and selling lard, six cents per tierce.

For the purchase, or for the sale, or for the purchase and sale of pork, five cents per barrel.

For buying, selling, or buying and selling pork, five cents per barrel.

For the purchase, or for the sale, or for the purchase and sale of D. S. short ribs, or D. S. extra short clears, twenty-five cents per thousand pounds.

For the purchase, or for the sale, or for the purchase and sale of D. S. short ribs, or D. S. extra short clears, $0.25 per thousand pounds.

The minimum rates allowed upon the above transactions made for the account of members of the board are one-half of the foregoing minimum rates.

The minimum rates allowed for the transactions mentioned above, conducted for the benefit of board members, are half of the minimum rates stated earlier.

BOOKS AND FORMS USED

18. There are a number of ordinary forms, such as checks, drafts, receipts, requisitions, etc., that are common with most lines 205of business and used in the brokerage business, which will not be necessary to reproduce. Most brokers have all such forms printed or lithographed for their especial use with their name and address prominently displayed thereon.

18. There are several standard forms, like checks, drafts, receipts, requisitions, etc., that are commonly used in various businesses and in the brokerage industry, which don't need to be reproduced here. Most brokers have these forms printed or lithographed for their specific use, featuring their name and address prominently displayed. 205

ORDER BLANK

Fig. 2. Telegraphic Buying and Selling Orders

Fig. 2. Buying and Selling Orders via Telegraph

19. The first form of importance in connection with the accounting department of a brokerage firm is the order of the customer. This must invariably be in written form with the signature of the customer and the order must be expressed in the plainest terms so that there is no possibility of misconstruction. As these orders are frequently received by wire, or often dispatched by wire to New York or other branch office for execution, blanks for the purpose, as shown in Fig. 2, are furnished to customers, those used for buying orders being printed in black and those used for selling orders being printed in red. These orders are made out by the purchaser or 206his authorized agent and should not only show the date of the order but also the time of the day it was given, which is frequently of great importance in an active market. Whatever margin is required by the broker upon the deal must be deposited by the client at the time the order is given, as without this protection, the broker will not proceed to execute the order. It is sometimes the custom for brokers to accept collateral covering a certain amount of margin, in which case the broker gives the customer a receipt in due form, holding the collateral as trustee until settlement of account. All orders are executed at the earliest possible moment after their receipt. Legitimate brokers are members of the board of trade often in various cities and have their representatives on the floor, during the business hours of the board, to buy or sell as ordered.

19. The most important aspect of the accounting department in a brokerage firm is the customer order. This must always be in writing and signed by the customer, and the order should be stated as clearly as possible to avoid any misunderstandings. Since these orders are often received or sent via wire to New York or other branch offices for execution, forms for this purpose, as shown in Fig. 2, are provided to customers. Buying order forms are printed in black, while selling order forms are printed in red. These orders are filled out by the buyer or their authorized agent and should include not only the date of the order but also the time it was placed, which can be very important in a fast-moving market. Any required margin must be deposited by the client when the order is given; without this margin, the broker will not execute the order. Sometimes brokers will accept collateral as a form of margin, in which case the broker issues the customer a receipt and holds the collateral in trust until the account is settled. All orders are carried out as quickly as possible after they are received. Reputable brokers are members of the board of trade in various cities and have representatives on the trading floor during business hours to carry out buy or sell orders as instructed.

Fig. 3. Credit Slip Given to Customer by Broker

Fig. 3. Credit Slip Provided to Customer by Broker

DEBIT AND CREDIT SLIP

20. As soon as the transaction is accepted by the broker, he gives to the customer a debit or credit slip showing the nature of 207the transaction, or it is sent by mail, as soon as possible after business hours; the charge or credit depend upon whether it is a purchase or a sale. The blanks for this purpose, as shown in Fig. 3, should be printed on different colored paper; the debit blank is usually on white and the credit blank on buff or yellow paper. If a client buys, the amount of his purchase appears as a debit to his account, with the commission added. He receives credit for whatever amount of margin he deposits, and the account stands thus until delivery, when the entire balance must be paid. If a sale is made by the client before the time of delivery, the amount of the sale is credited to his account, less the commission due for selling and any other charges. The difference in the account, whether it is an amount due from the broker to the client or from the client to the broker, is paid in cash as soon as the deal is closed.

20. Once the broker accepts the transaction, they provide the customer with a debit or credit slip that outlines the details of the transaction, or it is mailed as soon as possible after business hours. The charge or credit depends on whether it's a purchase or a sale. The forms for this purpose, as shown in Fig. 3, should be printed on different colored paper; the debit slip is typically on white and the credit slip on buff or yellow paper. If a client makes a purchase, the amount is recorded as a debit to their account, including the commission. They receive credit for any margin they deposit, and the account remains that way until delivery, at which point the full balance must be paid. If the client makes a sale before delivery, the sale amount is credited to their account, minus the commission for selling and any other fees. The difference in the account, whether it's an amount owed from the broker to the client or from the client to the broker, is settled in cash as soon as the deal is finalized.

Fig. 4. Daily Sales Journal or Record of Stock Sales

Fig. 4. Daily Sales Journal or Record of Stock Sales

208

DAILY RECORD SHEET

21. As a most perfect record must be kept of every transaction, the daily record sheets, as shown in Fig. 4, are of the greatest importance. This book is called the daily journal as frequently as it is designated the daily record.

21. Since a perfect record needs to be maintained for every transaction, the daily record sheets, as illustrated in Fig. 4, are extremely important. This book is often referred to as the daily journal as much as it is called the daily record.

Fig. 5. Daily Sales Journal or Record of Grain Sales

Fig. 5. Daily Sales Journal or Record of Grain Sales

This book is most convenient when kept in loose-leaf form, as a small number of leaves may be kept in the binder for current use, and after the sheet is filled, it may be filed away for future reference. The size of the sheet is usually 16 by 14 inches, and it is ruled and printed to show date, remarks, shares, stock, price, charge stock account, commission, credit account of, and folio. The purchase blank for this record is exactly the same with the exception that it is used to credit stock account instead of charging, and to charge customers' accounts instead of crediting. There should also be a grain sales sheet and a grain purchase sheet, which differ slightly in the column headings but not necessarily in the ruling—number of bushels 209taking the place of the column headed shares, and kind of grain taking the place of stock, as shown in Fig. 5. There should also be a sundries sales and purchase sheet for recording orders upon other commodities than grain or stock. Its form is the same as that shown with the exception that amount takes the place of shares, and commodities the place of stock in each form.

This book is most useful when kept in loose-leaf format, as a small number of pages can be kept in the binder for current use, and once the page is filled, it can be filed away for future reference. The size of the page is usually 16 by 14 inches, and it is printed with sections for date, remarks, shares, stock, price, charge stock account, commission, credit account of, and folio. The purchase blank for this record is exactly the same except that it is used to credit the stock account instead of charging, and to charge customers' accounts instead of crediting. There should also be a grain sales sheet and a grain purchase sheet, which differ slightly in the column headings but not necessarily in the ruling—number of bushels 209 replaces the column headed shares, and kind of grain replaces stock, as shown in Fig. 5. Additionally, there should be a sundries sales and purchase sheet for recording orders for other commodities besides grain or stock. Its format is the same as what’s shown, except that amount takes the place of shares, and commodities replaces stock in each form.

Fig. 6. Special Journal Used by a Grain Commission Company

Fig. 6. Special Journal Used by a Grain Commission Company

As soon as an order is received, it is entered upon the proper record with all of the particulars, and the postings to customers' accounts are made daily, but the posting to the general ledger accounts need not be made more frequently than once a month, unless it is desired to take off a general ledger balance at more frequent intervals.

As soon as an order is received, it's recorded with all the details, and customer account updates are done daily. However, updates to the general ledger accounts don't need to happen more often than once a month, unless there's a need to check the general ledger balance more frequently.

210

Fig. 7. Daily Advice of Purchase or Sale Rendered to Customers

Fig. 7. Daily Buying or Selling Advice Given to Customers

211

GRAIN COMMISSION JOURNAL SHEET

22. In this connection it is advantageous for the student to study the journal form used by an exclusive grain commission company, Fig. 6. This form is used for recording the sales as they are made in a manner similar to that described in the daily record sheet. The form is loose-leaf and may be 11 by 14 inches in size, or if preferred could be made 16 by 14 inches, giving the advantage of a longer page. The necessity for a long or short page is determined altogether by the amount of business done by the house in one day, as it is the intention with this record to use one full page or more for each day's transactions. This journal bears the day and the date at the top of the page, and is ruled and printed to show columns for folio, names, number of sale, net proceeds, insurance, sack rent, freight and charges, commission, and total. The entries in this journal are made from the sales sheet, and the total amount is posted to the ledger for customers from this medium.

22. In this regard, it's helpful for students to study the format of the journal used by a specialized grain commission company, Fig. 6. This format is used to record sales as they happen, similar to what's described in the daily record sheet. The journal is loose-leaf and can be 11 by 14 inches in size, or if preferred, it could be 16 by 14 inches to allow for a longer page. Whether to use a long or short page depends entirely on the volume of business the company conducts in a day, as the goal of this record is to use one full page or more for each day's transactions. This journal includes the day and date at the top of the page and is organized with printed columns for folio, names, number of sale, net proceeds, insurance, sack rent, freight and charges, commission, and total. Entries in this journal are made from the sales sheet, and the total amount is posted to the ledger for customers based on this record.

Fig. 8. Record of Stocks in Hands of the Broker

Fig. 8. Record of Stocks Owned by the Broker

ADVICE OF PURCHASE OF SALE

23. A very important document used by commission merchants and brokers is the advice or notification to customer of their 212action in filling his orders. This advice is rendered daily to each customer and should be checked by him carefully, so that there may be no errors in the deals and no differences in opinion between the client and his broker. The advice would begin with the date and read something like this: "Mr. Geo. Bronson, Milwaukee, Wis.: We have this day bought for your account and risk, 100 shares American Car and Foundry (preferred) at 111⅛; 200 shares Canadian Pacific at 177; 100 shares Pullman at 187." On the lower part of the form, as shown in Fig. 7, are printed the rules of the house in regard to the order and it should be signed by some one in authority. If the customer accepts the same, it is an evidence that the transaction is according to orders.

23. A very important document used by commission merchants and brokers is the advice or notification to customer of their 212action in filling his orders. This advice is sent out daily to each customer and should be checked carefully to avoid any errors in the transactions and any misunderstandings between the client and their broker. The advice starts with the date and would say something like this: "Mr. Geo. Bronson, Milwaukee, Wis.: We have today purchased for your account and risk, 100 shares of American Car and Foundry (preferred) at 111⅛; 200 shares of Canadian Pacific at 177; 100 shares of Pullman at 187." At the bottom of the form, as shown in Fig. 7, are printed the house rules regarding the order, and it should be signed by someone in authority. If the customer agrees to it, it confirms that the transaction is in line with their orders.

STOCK RECORD

24. Owing to the fact that a very large amount of stock of various companies is being bought and sold continually by a brokerage firm, no book kept in the accounting department is of greater importance than the stock record. Not only is the broker's business with customers but it is also very largely with other brokerage concerns as he is buying and selling continually. Every share of stock which is bought or sold must be recorded in the stock record. This record shows: Record number, date, number of certificate, number of shares, from whom received, in name of, record number, number of shares, to whom delivered, and date of delivery, as in Fig. 8. It is not necessary in this book, to keep a record of either the price paid or the price at which sold, as this register is intended merely to show the disposition of the certificates of stock and whether they are still in the house, or if disposed of, to whom they have been delivered. It is needless to point to the necessity for the greatest care in keeping this record, as any errors might make it very difficult to trace the paper and result in loss, or at least considerable trouble for the house.

24. Because a brokerage firm is constantly buying and selling a huge amount of stock from various companies, no book in the accounting department is more important than the stock record. The broker deals not only with customers but also extensively with other brokerage firms since trading happens continuously. Every share of stock that is bought or sold must be documented in the stock record. This record includes: record number, date, certificate number, number of shares, from whom received, in the name of, record number, number of shares, to whom delivered, and date of delivery, as shown in Fig. 8. It’s not necessary to record the price paid or the selling price in this book, as its purpose is simply to indicate the status of the stock certificates and whether they are still with the firm or, if sold, to whom they were delivered. It's crucial to maintain this record with the utmost care, as any mistakes could make it difficult to track the certificates and result in losses or significant issues for the firm.

CASH BOOK

25. The general cash book for a brokerage firm in loose leaf should be sheet size 14 by 14 inches. In a bound book, it would not be necessary to have it more than 12 inches wide. In this particular business, it is not desirable to carry the general cash debit on one 213sheet and the general cash credit on another, although it might be advantageous in certain cases to run the grain in the general cash book and to keep a subsidiary cash book for the stocks, which might be run upon similarly ruled sheets, the total of the day's transactions being brought into the general cash at night. By doing this the posting clerk could be using one of the cash books while the cashier was working on the other.

25. The general cash book for a brokerage firm on loose-leaf paper should be 14 by 14 inches in size. In a bound book, it doesn’t need to be wider than 12 inches. In this business, it’s not ideal to have general cash debits on one sheet and general cash credits on another, although it could be helpful in some cases to include grain transactions in the general cash book and maintain a separate cash book for stocks, which could be organized on similarly ruled sheets, with the total of the day’s transactions entered into the general cash book at night. This way, the posting clerk could use one cash book while the cashier worked on the other.

Fig. 9. Broker's General Cash Book

Fig. 9. Broker's General Cash Book

At the heading of the general cash sheet appears the sheet number and either the date (providing one sheet or more is used for each day), or the month with an extra day column, next to the margin. The columns are ruled and printed to show stocks, grain, and general ledger on the debit side and the same on the credit side, with the posting columns and sufficient room for the names of customers in center, as in Fig. 9. In this cash book should be entered all payments for margin on purchases of either grain or stock, all deposits by customers, which should be carried into the column indicated 214by their account—if they deal in grain their account is in the grain ledger and if in stocks their account is in the stocks ledger. All items of receipts or expenditures, not from or to customers, should be entered in the general ledger column, except as shown in the subsidiary cash sheet called office cash disbursements. Cash book sheets should always be paged consecutively when made, and each sheet accounted for, if loose-leaf cash books are used.

At the top of the general cash sheet, you'll see the sheet number and either the date (if one or more sheets are used for each day) or the month along with an additional day column, next to the margin. The columns are lined and printed to show stocks, grain, and the general ledger on the debit side, and the same on the credit side, with posting columns and enough space for customer names in the center, as shown in Fig. 9. This cash book should include all payments for margin on purchases of either grain or stock, as well as all deposits made by customers, which should be recorded in the column designated by their account—if they're dealing in grain, their account is in the grain ledger; if in stocks, it's in the stocks ledger. All items of receipts or expenditures not involving customers should be recorded in the general ledger column, except as demonstrated in the subsidiary cash sheet titled office cash disbursements. Cash book sheets should always be numbered consecutively when created, and each sheet should be accounted for if using loose-leaf cash books.

The best binder to use for a loose-leaf cash book is a flat opening spring back holder, in which may be placed enough leaves to last for the month, to be used for the current work, and when the new month is started the sheets for the previous month are placed in a reserve binder—which should be of the sectional post variety—for reference. If the back of the binder is labeled as the front and the leaves are reversed when placed in the transfer binder, they will run consecutively as to pages and dates.

The best binder for a loose-leaf cash book is a flat opening spring-back holder, where you can fit enough sheets to last the month for current use. When a new month begins, the sheets from the previous month should be put into a reserve binder, which should be of the sectional post type, for reference. If the back of the binder is labeled like the front and the sheets are reversed when placed in the transfer binder, they will be in order by pages and dates.

At the end of the month the totals of the grain ledger and stocks ledger are brought into the general ledger column and posted to the controlling account for that ledger.

At the end of the month, the totals from the grain ledger and the stocks ledger are entered into the general ledger column and recorded in the controlling account for that ledger.

OFFICE CASH DISBURSEMENTS

26. As there are a number of disbursements for office help, advertising, telegraph, etc., that should be kept separate from the general cash, it is very desirable to establish an office cash fund. This fund is started by charging to office cash in the general ledger a definite amount, say $500.00, which amount is drawn from the bank or set aside for special checking for the payment of all miscellaneous bills or drawings of principals on account of salary, also the drawings of salaried employes. This account may be as large as is required for the purpose, and when the office cash becomes depleted, more is drawn which can be added to the account. At the end of the month, a statement is made of the totals of the different columns which should be a duplicate of the office disbursement sheet. These totals are entered in the general cash posted therefrom, a check given for office cash disbursements for the amount of the interest, say $500.00, and credit given the account for the difference in the amount spent as shown by the statement.

26. Since there are several expenses for office help, advertising, telegraph, etc., that should be kept separate from the main cash, it's important to set up an office cash fund. This fund starts by charging a specific amount, like $500.00, to office cash in the general ledger, which is then withdrawn from the bank or set aside for special checks to pay for all miscellaneous bills or for salary withdrawals by the principals, as well as the draws of salaried employees. This account can be as large as needed for its purpose, and when the office cash runs low, more can be withdrawn and added to the account. At the end of the month, a statement summarizing the totals from the different columns is created, which should match the office disbursement sheet. These totals are then entered into the general cash record, a check is issued for the office cash disbursements amounting to $500.00, and the account is credited for the difference based on the amount spent as indicated by the statement.

215

Fig. 10. Detailed Record of Office Cash Disbursements

Fig. 10. Detailed Record of Office Cash Disbursements

216The office cash disbursement sheet, shown in Fig. 10, should be 14 by 16 inches in size, with sheet number and month of, in the heading. The box headings are as follows: Day, item, posting, general ledger, salaries, office help, advertising, private wire, tickers, telephone and telegraph, special commissions, rent, and sundries. The office cash balance should be kept independent of the general cash balance and, preferably, by another clerk.

216The office cash disbursement sheet, shown in Fig. 10, should be 14 by 16 inches in size, with sheet number and month of in the heading. The column headings are: Day, item, posting, general ledger, salaries, office help, advertising, private wire, tickers, telephone and telegraph, special commissions, rent, and miscellaneous expenses. The office cash balance should be maintained separately from the general cash balance and, ideally, managed by a different clerk.

Entries should be made as money is disbursed, with the proper vouchers for the same, to be turned in with the report.

Entries should be recorded as money is spent, along with the appropriate receipts, which need to be submitted with the report.

Fig. 11. Record of Margin Balances to Protect the Customer's Account

Fig. 11. Record of Margin Balances to Safeguard the Customer's Account

The totals of the different accounts, having been entered in the general cash, are posted to the debit of their respective accounts in the general ledger.

The totals from the various accounts, after being entered into the general cash, are recorded as debits in their corresponding accounts in the general ledger.

In localities where cotton is largely dealt in, or where tobacco is largely dealt in, it may be necessary to add columns for the tobacco ledger or the cotton ledger in the general cash, but in localities where the transactions are not frequent, the accounts for such transactions and also the deals in provisions are carried in the grain ledger.

In areas where cotton or tobacco is commonly traded, it might be necessary to add sections for the tobacco ledger or cotton ledger in the general cash. However, in places where such transactions are infrequent, the accounts for those transactions, as well as deals in provisions, are recorded in the grain ledger.

217Any cash book sheet which should happen to be spoiled should be marked void in red ink, and filed in its regular order with the other cash sheets, but in no case should it be destroyed.

217Any cash book sheet that gets damaged should be marked void in red ink and filed in its normal order with the other cash sheets, but under no circumstances should it be destroyed.

MARGIN BOOK

27. It is as necessary in the brokerage business to know the condition of customers' accounts as it is in a bank, and perhaps a little more so, as fluctuations in the market may wipe out his margin without his knowledge, and while it is not absolutely obligatory on the part of the broker to notify his customer, still it is very much to his interest to do so.

27. In the brokerage business, it’s just as important to know the status of customers' accounts as it is in a bank, and maybe even more so, since market fluctuations can wipe out their margin without them realizing it. While brokers aren’t strictly required to inform their clients, it’s definitely in their best interest to do so.

The margin clerk has the balance of each customer every morning. All orders to buy or sell received during the day pass through his hands and he makes the necessary memorandum against the customer's account. He keeps posted on the fluctuations of the market and immediately notifies the principals of any account which needs protection. After the trading for the day is finished, which on the board is 1:15 o'clock P.M. on any day except Saturday, and Saturday at 12:00 M., the margin clerk extends the balances of the various customers' accounts, these balances are checked by the bookkeeper from his accounts to prove their correctness, and a new list of the balances is made for the use of the margin clerk the following day.

The margin clerk checks each customer's balance every morning. All buy or sell orders that come in during the day go through him, and he makes the necessary notes against the customer's account. He stays updated on market fluctuations and immediately informs the principals of any account that needs protection. After the day's trading wraps up, which is at 1:15 PM on any day except Saturday, and at 12:00 PM on Saturday, the margin clerk updates the balances of the various customers' accounts. These balances are then verified by the bookkeeper against his records to ensure accuracy, and a new list of the balances is created for the margin clerk to use the next day.

This book is kept in most houses as a form of blotter, but the best form is a short sheet with numbered lines for the names of customers and a long sheet with similarly numbered lines divided into inch columns, with the balance column at the beginning and at the end, to be inserted under the short sheet, to care for the transactions of the day. By this means the names of customers will not have to be duplicated daily.

This book is found in many homes as a type of blotter, but the best version is a short sheet with numbered lines for customer names and a long sheet with numbered lines divided into one-inch columns, featuring the balance column at both the beginning and the end. This long sheet should be placed under the short sheet to track daily transactions. This way, customer names won’t need to be written out again every day.

The sheets should be kept in a holder so that the names run alphabetically and the initial letter of the names on one short sheet should be penciled upon the long sheet each day. The bookkeeper can, if desired, have a duplicate set of the short sheets, shown in Fig. 11, to use for making up the balances for the succeeding day.

The sheets should be stored in a holder so that the names are organized alphabetically, and the initial letter of the names on one short sheet should be written in pencil on the long sheet each day. The bookkeeper can have a duplicate set of the short sheets, shown in Fig. 11, if needed, to prepare the balances for the following day.

Where there are a sufficient number of accounts to warrant, they should be divided by tabbed index sheets with a leather tab projecting, in alphabetical arrangement, so that any account may 218be turned to instantly; for instance, if the account of L. S. Tucker & Co. is wanted, turning up the tab T will bring to light all of the customers whose names begin with T. This index may be further subdivided if it is deemed advisable.

Where there are enough accounts to make it worthwhile, they should be organized with tabbed index sheets that have a leather tab sticking out, arranged alphabetically, so that any account can be found quickly; for example, if you need the account of L. S. Tucker & Co., flipping to the tab T will show all the customers whose names start with T. This index can be further divided if needed.

The sheets for each day's work should be dated at the beginning of the day and may be kept, if desired, for reference, although after they have been proven by the books, they are of no practical value.

The sheets for each day's work should be dated at the start of the day and can be kept for reference if needed, although once they've been verified by the books, they hold no real value.

Fig. 12. Ledger Account of Each Stock Handled

Fig. 12. Ledger Account for Each Stock Managed

THE LEDGERS

28. Stock Ledger. Some brokerage firms, besides keeping the stock record, keep a stock ledger, opening an account with each line of stock bought or sold and posting therein daily from the orders. This ledger account, with each class of stock, indicates at all times just how much of each line is held by the house and is very necessary in order to show what may be sold if occasion demands. As a large amount of stock held by brokerage firms is usually deposited with their bank as collateral for loans, and, as it is frequently the case that portions of this stock must be delivered to customers or sold upon their order, it is necessary to frequently change the collateral deposited with the bank, substituting other stock for that taken from the bank.

28. Stock Ledger. Some brokerage firms, in addition to maintaining the stock record, keep a stock ledger. They open an account for each type of stock bought or sold and update it daily based on the orders. This ledger account for each stock category shows how much of each type the firm currently holds, which is crucial for knowing what can be sold if needed. Since a significant amount of stock held by brokerage firms is typically deposited with their bank as collateral for loans, and because parts of this stock often need to be delivered to customers or sold at their request, it’s essential to frequently update the collateral deposited with the bank, substituting other stocks for those taken out.

BASEMENT SHIPPING PLATFORM, FARWELL, OZMUN, KIRK & CO. (WHOLESALE HARDWARE), ST. PAUL, MINN.

BASEMENT SHIPPING PLATFORM, FARWELL, OZMUN, KIRK & CO. (WHOLESALE HARDWARE), ST. PAUL, MINN.

219

Fig. 13. This Shows a Variety of Rulings for the Customers' Ledger

Fig. 13. This shows different types of rulings for the customers' ledger.

220The stock ledger form in loose leaf is 13¾ by 14 inches, and the name of the stock should be inserted in the heading. It is ruled and printed to show: Date bought, preferred, common, extra column, price, account, date sold, preferred, common, extra column, and price, as shown in Fig. 12. Each sheet should have a number, and these numbers should follow consecutively. There are two ways of indexing these accounts. The one strictly in accordance with the theory of loose leaf is the insertion of the sheets in their proper alphabetical sequence. When the accounts are carried in this manner, leather tabbed index sheets appear at intervals throughout the ledger or ledgers. The division of the alphabet depends entirely upon how many accounts it is necessary to run and ledgers may be alphabetically subdivided into from twenty-five to two hundred divisions. The better the subdivision, the easier it becomes to turn to an account.

220The stock ledger form in loose leaf measures 13¾ by 14 inches, and the stock name should be added in the heading. It’s designed to display: Date bought, preferred, common, an extra column, price, account, date sold, preferred, common, an extra column, and price, as shown in Fig. 12. Each sheet should be numbered, and these numbers should follow consecutively. There are two ways to index these accounts. The method that adheres strictly to the concept of loose leaf is to insert the sheets in proper alphabetical order. When accounts are maintained this way, leather tabbed index sheets appear at intervals throughout the ledger or ledgers. The division of the alphabet depends entirely on how many accounts need to be managed, with ledgers able to be subdivided alphabetically into twenty-five to two hundred divisions. The better the subdivision, the easier it is to locate an account.

Since the majority of listed stocks are designated by initials or abbreviations in order to handle them with greater ease, some firms prefer to run the stock ledger on the numerical plan. By this plan each account is numbered and the accounts follow consecutively. Tabbed index sheets occur at intervals of from ten to twenty numbers, showing the location of any numbered account. With this arrangement it is necessary to keep a separate index of the various listed stocks, with their respective numbers, and to find an account the number of the stock must first be ascertained. By constant handling and entering, the bookkeeper becomes very familiar with the numbers and it is but little trouble for him to locate an account. The greater difficulty would be for someone who is unfamiliar with the books to find an account when wanted. Owing to this fact, the alphabetical arrangement is preferred.

Since most listed stocks are represented by initials or abbreviations for easier management, some companies choose to maintain the stock ledger using a numerical system. In this system, each account is assigned a number and the accounts are organized in sequence. Tabbed index sheets are placed at intervals of ten to twenty numbers, indicating the location of any numbered account. With this setup, it's necessary to keep a separate index of the various listed stocks along with their corresponding numbers, and to find an account, the stock number must first be identified. Through regular handling and entries, the bookkeeper becomes quite familiar with the numbers, making it easy for him to locate an account. The bigger challenge would be for someone unfamiliar with the records to find an account when needed. Because of this, the alphabetical arrangement is often preferred.

29. Customers' Ledger. Brokers who deal in grain and other food products, cotton, and stocks, usually require ledger sheets slightly differing, to keep a record of customers' accounts. The different rulings are not frequently used for the same customer, as those who deal in grain are not often stock manipulators. As interest 221is charged to the customer for deferred payments upon stock deals, this item must be taken care of in the ledger. Upon grain transactions, the balance on the purchase price is not paid until the delivery of the goods, consequently there are no interest charges upon these accounts until after maturity.

29. Customers' Ledger. Brokers who work with grain, other food products, cotton, and stocks typically need slightly different ledger sheets to keep track of customer accounts. The varying formats are rarely used for the same customer, as those who trade grain usually don’t engage in stock manipulation. Since interest is charged to the customer for delayed payments on stock deals, this must be reflected in the ledger. For grain transactions, the balance of the purchase price isn't paid until the goods are delivered, so there are no interest charges on these accounts until after they are due.

Fig. 13 shows rulings of six ledgers used by prominent brokerage houses in Chicago and St. Louis, and a study of the different forms as to the columnar arrangement will show how varied are ideas in regard to ledger rulings. All of these forms are useful, and the choice is merely a matter of individual preference. One thing which should be borne in mind in regard to ledger rulings is that the information shown in the ledger account should be exactly the same as that which it is necessary to convey to the customer in his monthly or weekly statement. The reason for this is that it should never be necessary to refer to any book except the ledger in preparing customers' statements, and it will be noticed in the statement of Logan & Bryan, shown later, that it is not only a reproduction of the ledger account as to matter contained therein, but also follows it exactly in form and ruling.

Fig. 13 shows examples of six ledgers used by major brokerage firms in Chicago and St. Louis. A look at the different layouts will reveal how diverse the approaches to ledger rulings can be. All these formats are practical, and choosing one comes down to personal preference. One important thing to remember about ledger rulings is that the information in the ledger account should match exactly what needs to be communicated to the customer in their monthly or weekly statement. This is because you should never need to refer to any book other than the ledger when preparing customer statements. As you’ll see in the statement from Logan & Bryan, which will be shown later, it not only replicates the content of the ledger account but also mirrors its format and rulings precisely.

This book is used the same as any other loose-leaf ledger with the exception that there is much more detail entered in these ledger accounts than is usual in a mercantile business.

This book is used just like any other loose-leaf ledger, except that there's a lot more detail recorded in these ledger accounts than what’s typical in a retail business.

Not more than one account should be entered on one leaf, for the reason that it is impossible to maintain a perfect alphabetical arrangement unless each account is absolutely independent.

Not more than one account should be recorded on one page because it's impossible to keep a perfect alphabetical order unless each account is completely separate.

After the names have been entered, the ledger sheets should be arranged alphabetically under each leather tabbed indexed subdivision. This arrangement should be carried, if necessary, to the fifth or sixth letter and when names are the same, like Smith, they are indexed alphabetically by initials. The brokerage business is one where there should be no loss of time in referring to accounts, hence the more perfect the indexing the more easily the account is located. Ledgers can be balanced daily by the aid of an adding machine without writing off the amounts of the balances.

After entering the names, arrange the ledger sheets alphabetically under each leather-tabbed index section. This organization should continue, if needed, to the fifth or sixth letter, and when names are the same, like Smith, they are indexed alphabetically by initials. In the brokerage business, it's important to minimize delays in referencing accounts, so the more efficient the indexing, the easier it is to find the account. Ledgers can be balanced daily using an adding machine without having to write down the balances.

The binders to use for this ledger are a current binder for active accounts and a transfer binder for closed accounts.

The binders for this ledger should be a current binder for active accounts and a transfer binder for closed accounts.

Postings should be made from the daily record sheet to the ledger as soon as possible after the consummation of the deal, and the postings 222from the cash book must also necessarily be kept up to date. At any moment the statement of the customer may be required, and it would be quite inconvenient for the broker if, on account of delayed posting, the statement were incomplete or incorrect. The number of customers' ledgers that should be kept depends entirely upon the number of customers. One loose-leaf ledger binder will accommodate at least five hundred accounts, and if the number exceeds this, two current binders should be used. By keeping the ledgers well gleaned and transferring closed accounts to a transfer ledger, the active accounts only remain in the current binder, which facilitates posting, statement making, and reference.

Postings should be made from the daily record sheet to the ledger as soon as possible after the deal is finalized, and the postings from the cash book must also be kept up to date. At any moment, a customer's statement may be needed, and it would be quite inconvenient for the broker if, due to delayed posting, the statement were incomplete or incorrect. The number of customer ledgers that need to be kept depends entirely on how many customers there are. One loose-leaf ledger binder can hold at least five hundred accounts, and if that number exceeds this, two current binders should be used. By keeping the ledgers well organized and transferring closed accounts to a transfer ledger, only the active accounts remain in the current binder, making posting, statement creation, and reference easier.

Fig. 14. Conventional Balance Form for General Ledger

Fig. 14. Standard Balance Form for General Ledger

Some firms use the vertical filing drawer for transferred accounts instead of placing them in another binder, as it is much easier to secure these accounts for replacement in the current binder in case the account is reopened.

Some companies use the vertical filing drawer for transferred accounts instead of putting them in another binder since it's way easier to secure these accounts for replacement in the current binder if the account is reopened.

30. General Ledger. A general ledger should be kept for the personal accounts of members of the firm, controlling accounts of subsidiary 223ledgers, controlling account of bills receivable and bills payable, and all impersonal accounts. This book may be in loose leaf if desired, although many firms prefer to use a bound ledger for this purpose. The best form is the regular four-column ledger, debit, credit, debit balance, and credit balance, as in Fig. 14.

30. General Ledger. A general ledger should be maintained for the personal accounts of the firm's members, controlling accounts of subsidiary ledgers, controlling accounts for bills receivable and bills payable, and all non-personal accounts. This book can be in a loose-leaf format if preferred, although many firms choose to use a bound ledger for this purpose. The most effective format is the standard four-column ledger: debit, credit, debit balance, and credit balance, as shown in Fig. 14.

The periodical statement of the condition of the firm is taken from the general ledger, and all subsidiary books controlled through its accounts must balance with the amounts shown therein.

The regular statement of the firm's condition is taken from the general ledger, and all subsidiary books managed through its accounts must match the amounts shown there.

Fig. 15. Broker's Statement to a Customer, Which is a Duplicate of his Ledger Account

Fig. 15. Broker's Statement to a Customer, Which is a Duplicate of their Ledger Account

Most large brokerage houses have branches in 224different cities and it is necessary to keep accounts in the general ledger with each of these branches showing the expense of the branch and the receipts therefrom, taken from the regular statements furnished at whatever period required. It is very necessary that the profits or losses from these branches be readily computed as it might be deemed expedient, if it were known that the branch was not doing well, to discontinue it. Frequent statements, complete in their nature as to receipts and expenditures, should be demanded.

Most large brokerage firms have branches in 224 different cities, and it's important to maintain accounts in the general ledger for each of these branches, showing their expenses and income based on the regular statements provided as needed. It's essential to easily calculate the profits or losses from these branches, as it might be wise to shut down a branch if it's not performing well. Regular, comprehensive statements detailing income and expenses should be required.

The principal expense accounts of a brokerage firm are salaries, rent, private telegraph wires, telephone booths, tickers, advertising, special commissions, and sundry expenses. As before stated, the receipts are from commissions and interest. Commissions accruing to brokers from the sale of stock are twenty-five cents per share—twelve and one-half cents for sales, and the same amount for purchases.

The main expenses for a brokerage firm are salaries, rent, private telegraph lines, phone booths, tickers, advertising, special commissions, and various other costs. As mentioned earlier, the income comes from commissions and interest. Brokers earn twenty-five cents per share from stock sales—twelve and a half cents for sales and the same amount for purchases.

CUSTOMERS' STATEMENT

31. In a brokerage and commission business, customers are very likely to demand a statement at any time, and even should they not do so, it is deemed expedient to make statements to customers often enough to keep them fully posted regarding the condition of their accounts. The best form of statement to use for this purpose is shown in Fig. 15, and is an exact reproduction of the ledger account. As these statements are made very frequently it is unnecessary to provide blanks with more than nine or ten lines.

31. In a brokerage and commission business, customers often expect to receive a statement at any time, and even if they don’t ask for one, it’s a good idea to send them statements frequently enough to keep them updated on the status of their accounts. The best type of statement to use for this purpose is shown in Fig. 15, which is a direct copy of the ledger account. Since these statements are issued very often, there’s no need to include blanks with more than nine or ten lines.

BILLS PAYABLE RECORD

32. Taking into consideration the large amount of money borrowed in this business, and the constant fluctuation of the amount due to banks, it will be seen that a careful, complete, and simple bills payable record is a prime necessity. This usual record shows date of loan, call or time, from whom borrowed, to whose account, rate of interest, securities—amount, when paid; securities—when released. A more simple form of this record is shown in Fig. 16.

32. Considering the significant amount of money borrowed in this business and the constant changes in the total owed to banks, it’s clear that a careful, thorough, and straightforward bills payable record is essential. This standard record includes the date of the loan, the call or time, the lender, the borrower’s account, the interest rate, securities—amount, when paid; securities—when released. A simpler version of this record is shown in Fig. 16.

225

Fig. 16. A Detailed Record of Loans Payable During Each Month

Fig. 16. A Detailed Record of Loans Due Each Month

226Loans made should be reported immediately to the cashier in writing, and the data concerning them should be entered at once in the cash book and the bills payable record. In some cases, banks arrange with the brokerage firm for what is called a blanket loan varying in amount—from $100,000.00 upward—according to the requirements of the firm. In increasing a loan of this character it is always necessary to keep upon deposit with the bank, collateral amply sufficient to cover the highest amount required, and any part of this collateral may be withdrawn by the substitution of other collateral satisfactory to the bank. In such a case there should be a blanket loan account kept in the general ledger showing, specifically, the collateral in the hands of the bank, and by the system of debit and credit, the record of that withdrawn and that substituted should be kept.

226Loans should be reported immediately to the cashier in writing, and the details must be entered right away in the cash book and bills payable record. In some cases, banks set up what’s known as a blanket loan with the brokerage firm, which can range from $100,000.00 and up, depending on the firm's needs. When increasing this type of loan, it's essential to keep enough collateral on deposit with the bank to cover the maximum amount needed, and any part of this collateral can be replaced with other collateral that the bank finds acceptable. In this scenario, a blanket loan account should be maintained in the general ledger, specifically detailing the collateral held by the bank, while using a system of debits and credits to keep track of what has been withdrawn and what has been substituted.

In case there is sufficient fluctuation in values to warrant, a bank can demand additional security at any time or the withdrawal of that held by them and the substitution of something more acceptable, or they may, upon call loans, demand a part or full payment at any time, in which case it is necessary for the broker to make arrangements to take up the loan at once.

If there’s enough fluctuation in values to justify it, a bank can request additional security at any time or ask for the withdrawal of the current security and replace it with something more acceptable. They may also demand partial or full payment on call loans at any time, which means the broker needs to make arrangements to pay off the loan immediately.

JOURNAL

33. All orders received are copied from the order blank into the journal, as the order blank used is not of a character to allow its being numbered and filed consecutively, nor can it be readily adapted to the division of the buying and selling accounts.

33. All orders received are transferred from the order form into the journal, since the order form can't be numbered and filed sequentially, nor can it easily be adjusted for separating the buying and selling accounts.

The journal sheet should have debit and credit columns for each ledger used for customers, and a general ledger column as shown in Fig. 17. Entries from the orders are carried into the proper ledger column. If a man buys stock, he is debited in the stock ledger column; if he buys grain he is debited in the grain ledger column; and if he sells either, he is credited in the proper column.

The journal sheet should have debit and credit columns for each customer ledger, along with a general ledger column, as shown in Fig. 17. Entries from the orders are entered into the correct ledger column. If someone buys stock, they are debited in the stock ledger column; if they buy grain, they are debited in the grain ledger column; and if they sell either, they are credited in the appropriate column.

In making a statement to the customer of purchase and sale, the profit or loss together with the commission charged is shown.

In the purchase and sale statement provided to the customer, the profit or loss along with the commission charged is displayed.

ILLUSTRATION

ILLUSTRATION

227

CHECK REGISTER

34. Most brokers have accounts with several banks; it is therefore necessary that a check register be kept with each bank, showing the date, number, to whom issued, amount of each check drawn, the deposits, and the daily balance, as in Fig. 18.

34. Most brokers have accounts with multiple banks; it’s essential to maintain a check register with each bank, showing the date, number, payee, amount of each check written, the deposits, and the daily balance, as shown in Fig. 18.

Fig. 17. General Journal in Which All Orders are Entered

Fig. 17. General Journal Where All Orders are Recorded

By using this register the account with each bank may be kept separately, and the necessity for filling out stubs in a check book entirely avoided. Many houses have given up the use of check books altogether, having their checks padded in numerical sequence and as the numbers follow consecutively on the 228check register, each numbered check must be accounted for. In case a check is spoiled, the line should be voided in red ink, and the spoiled check filed with returned checks.

By using this register, each bank account can be kept separate, eliminating the need to fill out stubs in a checkbook. Many businesses have completely stopped using checkbooks, opting instead to have their checks printed in numerical order. Since the numbers follow consecutively on the 228 check register, every numbered check must be accounted for. If a check is messed up, the line should be voided in red ink, and the spoiled check should be filed with the returned checks.

In case the office cash carries an account for itself from which checks are made, a separate check register should be kept for this account, as its balance does not enter into the general cash balance of the firm.

In case the office cash has its own account for issuing checks, a separate check register should be maintained for this account, since its balance doesn't factor into the overall cash balance of the company.

Fig. 18. Check Register Showing Condition of Bank Account

Fig. 18. Check Register Showing Status of Bank Account

In no just sense can a broker be held to be the owner of shares of stock which he purchases and carries for a customer, and it is a breach of trust to use this collateral to his own advantage. The certificate of shares of stock is not considered, according to the decision of the Supreme Court of the United States, property itself; it is but the evidence of the property in the shares.

In no fair sense can a broker be considered the owner of stock shares that he buys and manages for a customer, and it is a breach of trust to use this collateral for his own benefit. According to the Supreme Court of the United States, the stock certificate is not seen as property itself; it merely serves as proof of ownership of the shares.

To sum up, the accounting work in connection with the brokerage business is in taking care of the orders received from customers, being sure that they are correctly interpreted and promptly filled, 229noting the loans necessary to complete the contract, keeping a careful record of commissions and interest due the house, being watchful in regard to the margins of customers, and arranging all accounts with customers so that they may be kept up to date and instantly available.

To sum up, the accounting work related to the brokerage business involves handling customer orders, ensuring they are accurately interpreted and promptly processed, 229tracking the loans needed to complete the contracts, maintaining accurate records of commissions and interest owed to the company, monitoring customer margins closely, and organizing all customer accounts to keep them current and readily accessible.

GLOSSARY OF BOARD OF TRADE TERMS

BEAR: One who believes the conditions are ripe for a decline in prices, or one who desires such an event. One may believe that the price of a certain security is about to decline and therefore is said to be a bear on that particular security, whereas he may not be so on others. The natural attitude of a bear is that of a seller but he may be so for the sake of buying at a lower price later.

BEAR: A person who thinks the conditions are right for prices to drop, or someone who hopes for that situation. Someone might believe that the price of a specific security is about to decline and is therefore considered a bear for that particular security, even if they aren’t a bear for others. Generally, a bear tends to have a selling mindset, but they might sell in order to buy later at a lower price.

BEARING THE MARKET: An artificial lowering or forcing down of prices.

BEARING THE MARKET: An intentional decrease or manipulation of prices.

BID PRICE: The price offered or bid for any security or commodity.

BID PRICE: The price proposed or offered for any security or commodity.

BORROWING STOCK: A broker borrows stock when he has made a contract to deliver and the stock which he has sold, for any one of various reasons cannot be delivered at the time agreed.

BORROWING STOCK: A broker borrows stock when they have made a deal to deliver it, but for various reasons, the stock they sold cannot be delivered at the agreed time.

BREAK IN THE MARKET: A sudden and considerable decline in price.

BREAK IN THE MARKET: A sudden and significant drop in price.

BROKEN LOT: Same as odd lot in reference to stocks and less than ten thousand dollars par value in bonds.

BROKEN LOT: The same as odd lot when talking about stocks and bonds with a par value of less than ten thousand dollars.

BUCKET SHOPS: Offices run by irresponsible brokers not members of any stock exchange and who do a marginal business upon one dollar per share and upwards. As a matter of fact the stock itself is neither purchased nor sold for the customer by these operators. If the order is actually executed upon a bonâ fide exchange then the bucket shop puts in a contrary order for a like amount. For example: This kind of a dealer would sell an amount equivalent to a customer's purchase or purchase an amount equivalent to a customer's sale, thus, in no event carrying stocks.

BUCKET SHOPS: Offices run by irresponsible brokers who aren't members of any stock exchange and do a minimal business starting at one dollar per share. In fact, the stocks themselves are neither bought nor sold for the customer by these operators. If the order is actually executed on a bona fide exchange, then the bucket shop places a counter order for the same amount. For example: This type of dealer would sell an amount equivalent to a customer's purchase or buy an amount equivalent to a customer's sale, so they never hold any stocks.

BULL: One who believes that conditions are ripe for an advance in prices or one who desires such an advance and talks bullish in consequence. One writer defines a bull as a man who has something to sell, consequently he is anxiously waiting for prices to go up that he may sell at a good price.

BULL: A person who thinks that it's a good time for prices to go up or someone who wants that increase and speaks bullishly because of it. One writer describes a bull as someone who has something to sell, so he is eagerly hoping for prices to rise so he can sell it for a good price.

BUY AT MARKET: An order to buy at the lowest prices at which the security can be obtained without any price limit being set by the one giving the order.

BUY AT MARKET: An order to purchase at the lowest prices available for the security, without setting any price limit by the person placing the order.

BUYER'S OPTION: A contract under the terms of which the buyer of a security need not receive delivery until the end of a specified time, but he has the right to demand delivery at any time within the period covered by the contract by giving the seller one day's notice. The understanding is briefly expressed as "buyer 4," "buyer 10," the figures indicating the number of days provided for in the agreement.

BUYER'S OPTION: A contract that allows the buyer of a security to wait for delivery until the end of a specified time, but gives them the right to request delivery at any point during that period by notifying the seller one day in advance. This arrangement is simply referred to as "buyer 4," "buyer 10," with the numbers representing the number of days outlined in the agreement.

230BUYING ORDER: An order given to a broker to buy a certain security with or without limit as to price as the case may be. An order to buy is good for the date for which it was given only, unless otherwise specified. Sometimes an order is given "until countermanded" or "until cancelled" by which the broker understands that there is no definite limit as to time; but brokers usually remind their customers regarding orders to be sure that they still desire them to be kept in force.

230BUYING ORDER: An instruction to a broker to purchase a specific security, with or without a price limit depending on the situation. A buy order is valid only for the date it was placed unless stated otherwise. Occasionally, an order is given "until revoked" or "until cancelled," meaning the broker knows there isn't a set time limit; however, brokers typically remind their clients about orders to ensure they still want them active.

CABLES: Telegrams from foreign countries on the conditions of the market. Large brokers receive cables each morning from London, Paris, and other points giving closing prices of grain and provision in that market.

CABLES: Messages from overseas about market conditions. Major brokers get updates every morning from London, Paris, and other locations that provide the closing prices for grain and provisions in those markets.

CALL: A privilege which one party buys of another to call (receive) from him a certain amount of stocks, grain, etc., at a certain price and date.

CALL: A privilege that one party purchases from another to call (receive) a specific amount of stocks, grain, etc., at a predetermined price and date.

CARRYING CHARGES: The interest charged by brokers for the amount of money advanced by them to customers in marginal transactions; also used by a Chicago firm to indicate storage rates, interest, and insurance on grain or provisions.

CARRYING CHARGES: The interest that brokers charge for the money they lend to customers in margin transactions; also used by a Chicago firm to refer to storage rates, interest, and insurance on grain or provisions.

CASH GRAIN: Grain for delivery at once. Spot grain has the same meaning.

CASH GRAIN: Grain that is available for immediate delivery. Spot grain means the same thing.

COMMISSIONS: The charge made by any broker for buying or selling securities for someone else.

COMMISSIONS: The fee charged by any broker for buying or selling securities on behalf of someone else.

CURB: Securities which are not traded in upon the large stock exchanges or new securities which have not yet been listed upon such exchanges are handled in what is known as the curb market. The reason for the existence of "curb market" in the open rather than in some building is that if the latter plan were pursued there would, in truth, exist another exchange, and it would not be permissible for a member of the regular exchange of the same city to be represented thereon as he frequently now is upon the curb.

CURB: Securities that aren't traded on major stock exchanges or new securities that haven't been listed on those exchanges yet are dealt with in what's called the curb market. The reason the "curb market" operates openly instead of in a building is that if it were held indoors, it would effectively create another exchange, and members of the regular exchange in the same city wouldn't be allowed to participate there as they often do on the curb.

CURBSTONE BROKER: One who usually, not being a member of the stock exchange, goes from office to office or transacts his business on the curb.

CURBSTONE BROKER: Someone who typically, not being a member of the stock exchange, moves from office to office or does their business on the curb.

DELIVERY: The actual turning over to the buyer of the thing bought. If delivery is offered after hours, the buyer may refuse it until the following business day, but the seller has no right to demand interest for extended time.

DELIVERY: The actual transfer of the purchased item to the buyer. If delivery is offered after hours, the buyer can decline it until the next business day, but the seller cannot demand interest for the extra time.

DIVIDEND: A portion of the profit of a corporation authorized by the board of directors to be paid to the stockholders.

DIVIDEND: A share of a corporation's profit that the board of directors has approved to be distributed to the shareholders.

DUMP: An amount of stock that is forced upon the market for the purpose of getting rid of it. It does not mean so much the disposing of an undesirable investment but in offering any investment in large amounts.

DUMP: A quantity of stock that is pushed onto the market to sell it off. It doesn't just refer to getting rid of a bad investment but also includes selling any investment in large quantities.

EVEN: A broker is even on stock when he has contracted to receive and deliver equal amounts of the same stock with another broker. A settlement of the difference in prices is the only thing called for.

EVEN: A broker is even on stock when he has agreed to buy and sell equal amounts of the same stock with another broker. The only thing needed is a settlement of the price difference.

FLURRY: A small panic. An excitement caused by a rapidly falling market and advancing money rates.

FLURRY: A minor panic. An excitement triggered by a quickly dropping market and rising interest rates.

231FUTURES: Buying or selling grain for future delivery. Literally speaking when you buy grain in February which is known as May grain you contract for delivery in May at prices then existing.

231FUTURES: Buying or selling grain for future delivery. Specifically, when you buy grain in February, referred to as May grain, you’re agreeing to receive it in May at the prices that are available at that time.

IN SIGHT: The amount of grain, coffee, cotton, tobacco, or any commodity available for immediate use.

IN SIGHT: The quantity of grain, coffee, cotton, tobacco, or any product ready for immediate use.

LIMIT: A price which a broker must not exceed in executing an order for his customers. It may also be a restriction of the amount to be purchased or sold.

LIMIT: A price that a broker cannot go over when filling an order for their clients. It can also refer to a limit on the quantity to be bought or sold.

LISTED SECURITIES: Securities before they can be listed upon any board of trade or stock exchange must have complied with certain rules of the exchange. This does not imply that listed stock has any greater intrinsic merit than unlisted stock but it merely shows that certain facts and figures in relation to the security have been given more or less publicity.

LISTED SECURITIES: Before securities can be listed on any trading board or stock exchange, they must meet specific rules set by the exchange. This doesn’t mean that listed stocks are inherently better than unlisted stocks; it simply indicates that certain information and data about the security have been made more or less public.

LONG: One who holds stock or grain for a rise in price, or, one who has a contract under which he can demand such stock or grain on or before a certain day. The opposite of short.

LONG: Someone who keeps stock or grain hoping that the price will go up, or someone who has a contract that allows them to request that stock or grain on or before a specific date. The opposite of short.

MARGIN: An amount of money deposited with the broker to insure him against loss; a part of the purchase or selling price.

MARGIN: The money you deposit with the broker to protect them against loss; a portion of the purchase or selling price.

O: The "Ticker" abbreviation for offered when accompanied by figures; for instance, "G. N. O. 76" would mean that Great Northern Common Stock was offered at $76.00 per share.

O: The "Ticker" abbreviation for offered when paired with numbers; for example, "G. N. O. 76" would indicate that Great Northern Common Stock was offered at $76.00 per share.

OPEN MARKET: A market where any or all may buy or sell.

OPEN MARKET: A market where anyone can buy or sell.

OPEN ORDER: An order which is good until cancelled.

OPEN ORDER: An order that remains active until it is cancelled.

OPTION: An agreement of purchase or sale, good only for a certain time.

OPTION: A purchase or sale agreement that is valid only for a specific period.

PIT: The portion of the board of trade where floor trades are made. This term is particularly applied to Chicago. Other stock exchanges set aside certain places signified by posts set in the floor for trading and in these exchanges the trading points are called posts instead of pits.

PIT: The part of the trading floor where trades happen. This term is mainly used in Chicago. Other stock exchanges have specific areas marked by posts on the floor for trading, and in those exchanges, the trading areas are called posts instead of pits.

POOL: A combination of buyers who work together and invest their joint capital as one. (The different boards of trade have enacted strict rules against pooling.)

POOL: A group of buyers who collaborate and invest their combined capital as a single entity. (The various boards of trade have established strict rules against pooling.)

PUT: A privilege which one party buys of another to put (deliver) to him a certain amount of stock, grain, etc., at a certain price and date.

PUT: A privilege that one party purchases from another to put (deliver) a specific quantity of stock, grain, etc., at a designated price and date.

PUT AND CALL: A put and a call may be combined in one instrument, the holder of which may either buy or sell as he chooses at a fixed price and date.

PUT AND CALL: A put and a call can be combined into one instrument, allowing the holder to either buy or sell at a predetermined price and date.

REMARGIN: To give more margin.

REMARGIN: To increase margin.

RING: A combination of brokers to offset and settle trades with each other; also an exclusive combination of persons for a selfish purpose as, to control the market. (Rings have the same standing in the board of trade as pooling, if of the same character.)

RING: A group of brokers who work together to balance and finalize trades among themselves; also, a select group of individuals working for their own interests, like controlling the market. (Rings hold the same status in the board of trade as pooling, if they have a similar nature.)

SELL AT MARKET: An order to one's broker giving authority to sell stock or grain at market price.

SELL AT MARKET: An order to your broker giving permission to sell stock or grain at the current market price.

SELL AT OPENING: An order to sell immediately after the opening of the stock exchange at the best price obtainable.

Sell at opening: An order to sell right after the stock exchange opens at the best price available.

232SELLING ORDER: An order given to a broker to sell a certain security with or without limit as to price, as the case may be. A selling order is good for the day for which it is given only unless otherwise specified.

232SELLING ORDER: An instruction given to a broker to sell a specific security with or without a price limit, depending on the situation. A selling order is valid only for the day it is placed unless stated otherwise.

SETTLEMENT: The payment of differences in trades between brokers.

SETTLEMENT: The payment of discrepancies in trades between brokers.

SHORT: One who has sold for future delivery what he does not own, but hopes to buy at a lower rate.

SHORT: Someone who has sold something they don't own yet, but plans to buy it later at a lower price.

SKYROCKETING: Pushing the prices of securities up to unnatural levels or forcing the price up with startling rapidity.

SKYROCKETING: Driving the prices of securities to unrealistic levels or rapidly pushing the price up in a shocking way.

SLUMP: A sudden and a considerable fall in prices.

SLUMP: A sudden and significant drop in prices.

SPREAD: A "put and call" at differing prices.

SPREAD: A "put and call" at different prices.

STOP LOSS ORDER: This is a method of limiting losses by giving a stop order to the broker to sell if stock declines below a certain point. These are sometimes called stock orders.

STOP LOSS ORDER: This is a way to prevent losses by instructing the broker to sell if the stock falls below a specific level. These are sometimes referred to as stock orders.

STRADDLE: A "put and a call."

STRADDLE: A "put and call."

SWEETEN: To give more collateral or margin.

SWEETEN: To provide additional collateral or margin.

TICKER: A small printing machine operated by telegraph by which the outside world obtains the reliable information as to the prices of securities and commodities dealt in upon the principal exchanges of the world. It is a never failing source of information to the broker. The results are printed on a strip of paper like a ribbon which automatically unwinds and after passing under the printing device runs into a basket. The ribbon is called the tape. All fluctuations in prices are thus wired to the principal exchanges immediately.

TICKER: A small printing machine connected to the telegraph that provides the outside world with accurate information about the prices of stocks and commodities traded on major exchanges globally. It's an unfailing source of information for brokers. The results are printed on a strip of paper like a ribbon, which automatically feeds out and, after passing under the printing mechanism, rolls into a basket. This ribbon is called the tape. All price fluctuations are instantly sent to the main exchanges.

WASH SALE: An illegitimate or fictitious transaction.

WASH SALE: A fake or bogus transaction.

THE WHOLESALE HOUSE OF MARSHALL FIELD & CO., CHICAGO, ILL.

THE WHOLESALE HOUSE OF MARSHALL FIELD & CO., CHICAGO, ILL.

235

BILLING AND ORDER RECORDING[5]

Introduction. The survival of the fittest applies most forcefully to business men and their methods. The success of the men depends upon their methods; the efficiency of the methods, upon the men. Large corporations of to-day would be impossible without method. They plan their work, and method tells them daily whether they are working their plan successfully or unsuccessfully.

Introduction. The idea of survival of the fittest is especially relevant to businesspeople and their approaches. A person's success relies on their methods; the effectiveness of these methods depends on the person. Today’s large corporations couldn’t function without having a method in place. They organize their tasks, and their methods show them every day whether they are implementing their plans effectively or not.

5.  Copyright, 1909, by American School of Correspondence.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.Copyright, 1909, by American School of Correspondence.

It is commonly supposed by the smaller business men that method is a result of business growth. Sometimes it is. If a business grows fast, better methods become a necessity. Without method any business must remain small—with few exceptions, just as small as the capacity of the man at the helm. "To the extent which system is intelligently used, it multiplies one's powers of achievement in all directions."

It’s often thought by smaller business owners that having a methodology comes from business growth. Sometimes that’s true. When a business grows quickly, better methods become essential. Without a method, any business is likely to stay small—unless there are rare exceptions—limited by the capabilities of the person in charge. "When system is used intelligently, it increases one's ability to achieve in every area."

The importance of the order billing and shipping departments, the amount of waste effort therein, and the relation of each to all other branches of the business, make them a most interesting and profitable study for the progressive business student, whether he be a beginner, an executive, or an owner. To attain quick results and to eliminate useless head, hand, and leg work, learn the capacity, capability, and usefulness of office machinery and the short-cut methods made possible thereby.

The order billing and shipping departments are crucial, and the amount of wasted effort in them, along with their connection to other parts of the business, makes them a fascinating and valuable area of study for any ambitious business student, whether you're a beginner, an executive, or a business owner. To achieve quick results and cut out unnecessary work, it’s essential to understand the capacity, capability, and usefulness of office machinery and the shortcuts that it enables.

During the last eight years there has been a tremendous amount of improvement made both in this country and abroad in handling office work, changing from hand to machine methods. Most of these improvements have been literally forced upon the business men of the country by specialty companies having labor-saving devices for sale. Wide-awake merchants have in some cases left the installation of such devices to office people who feared the loss of their positions through the use of them.

Over the past eight years, there has been a huge amount of progress in managing office work, shifting from manual to machine methods, both in this country and internationally. Many of these advancements have been pushed onto business owners by specialty companies selling labor-saving devices. Alert merchants have, in some cases, allowed office staff to handle the installation of these devices, despite their concerns about losing their jobs due to automation.

236One of the pioneers in the development of the class of work above mentioned is Hiram J. Halle, who overcame all obstacles, and gave the impetus to modern billing methods which has been such a help to our economic results in office practice. The typewriter companies have followed his lead and equipped cylinder machines with the necessary attachments for accomplishing almost any desired result, except writing in a bound book. In order to overcome this obstacle, the McMillan and the Empire and some other loose-leaf books have been invented. These books are loose-leaf only while they are being written upon; after completion they are permanently bound by a simple device, and become as secure as a sewed book.

236One of the pioneers in developing the type of work mentioned above is Hiram J. Halle, who faced and overcame all challenges, providing the momentum for modern billing methods that have greatly improved our economic performance in office practices. The typewriter companies have followed his example and equipped cylinder machines with the necessary attachments to achieve nearly any desired outcome, except for writing in a bound book. To address this issue, the McMillan, the Empire, and other loose-leaf books were created. These books are only loose-leaf while they are being written on; once completed, they are permanently bound with a simple device, making them as secure as a sewn book.

In any book of this character, the student must consider the text as a series of problems, with explanations of how each has been solved. If the student does not learn to exercise his own powers of originality as a result of a study of this volume, he will fail to secure the result intended. Rarely, if ever, will two problems be met in two commercial establishments which will be alike. The judgment of the person installing the system will determine the best method to be used under certain conditions.

In any book like this, the student should view the text as a collection of problems, along with explanations of how each one has been solved. If the student doesn’t develop their own creativity from studying this material, they won’t achieve the intended outcome. It’s very unlikely that two problems will be the same in two different businesses. The judgment of the person setting up the system will determine the best approach to take under specific circumstances.

Before starting in on the regular work, it will not be out of place to give a comparison of the methods of business in various foreign countries.

Before diving into the regular work, it’s a good idea to compare the business methods used in different foreign countries.

The rush in the business life of the United States is accounted for by our fast growth and national desire to accumulate wealth. Commercial concerns have grown both fast and slowly to undreamed proportions. Strenuous efforts have been made to secure business, and then a corresponding effort has been made to effect the small economies which in a large business aggregate large sums. As a nation, we are rushing at headlong speed, seeking all the means which will give us results. In transportation we advance from steam to electricity; in social life we turn from horses and carriages to automobiles; in commercial life we use every known device to short-cut the work and effect economies—adding machines, typewriters, cash registers, envelope openers, envelope sealers, multigraphs, etc.

The fast pace of business life in the United States is due to our rapid growth and national ambition to accumulate wealth. Commercial enterprises have expanded both quickly and gradually to unimaginable scales. We've made intense efforts to secure business, followed by focused attempts to achieve small savings that, when combined in a large business, amount to significant sums. As a nation, we're racing ahead, looking for all the methods that will yield results. In transportation, we’re moving from steam to electricity; in social life, we're transitioning from horses and carriages to cars; in the business world, we’re using every available tool to streamline work and save money—adding machines, typewriters, cash registers, envelope openers, envelope sealers, multigraphs, and so on.

A distinct surprise awaits the person visiting Europe on a mission of introducing "short-cut" methods. While we are in business to make all the money we can, most of the Europeans are in business to make a living, or reasonable earnings.

A surprising realization greets anyone visiting Europe to promote "short-cut" methods. While we're in business to maximize our profits, most Europeans are in business to earn a decent living or make reasonable income.

237Imagine the surprise of the writer when told by the managing director of one of the largest department stores in London that they did not care to save the services of thirty-five clerks (which was possible by modern methods) as they were making a certain amount of money each year, and did not care to make any more; besides, they did not wish to put these people out of positions. It is not an easy matter to secure positions in England. Employes are very diligent and pay strict attention to business. A manager of one of the large banks in London said that once a clerk is hired he is discharged for gross misconduct only—not even for incompetency. There are young men clerks (pronounced clarks) in the Bank of England who are doing the same work for the bank as done by their grandfathers. There are old men in the Bank of England to-day who still use quill pens and the sand box instead of a blotter. There are, however, adding machines being used there by the younger generation, and they are of more use to them than to us in a way, as their currency is so much more difficult to add.

237Imagine the writer's surprise when the managing director of one of the biggest department stores in London said they weren’t interested in keeping the services of thirty-five clerks (which modern methods could accomplish) since they were already making a decent profit each year and didn’t want to make any more; besides, they didn’t want to put those people out of work. Finding a job in England isn’t easy. Employees are very hard-working and pay close attention to their tasks. A manager at one of the large banks in London mentioned that once a clerk is hired, they’re only let go for serious misconduct—not even for being incompetent. There are young clerks (pronounced clarks) at the Bank of England doing the same work their grandfathers did. There are older employees at the Bank of England today who still use quill pens and sand boxes instead of blotters. However, younger staff members do use adding machines, which are more useful for them than for us, as their currency is much harder to add up.

Each year, more improved methods are being introduced into England. Typewriters have been used for a number of years, and of late years adding machines have made headway. It is more difficult there to introduce new methods, but, once installed, it is difficult to dislodge them for other ones.

Each year, more advanced methods are being introduced in England. Typewriters have been used for several years, and recently, adding machines have gained popularity. It's harder to introduce new methods there, but once they're in place, it’s tough to replace them with others.

Some of the wholesale houses have very old methods. In one house in London, an order was copied twenty-nine times from the time it was received until it was finally charged. The concern was over two hundred years old and had never made any effort to improve its methods. It had four boys whose duty it was to hunt orders lost about the warerooms. A system of manifolding was installed, which eliminated so much waste of time in copying and recopying orders that it was difficult to convince the firm that something had not been overlooked. After four weeks they were delighted.

Some of the wholesale businesses use very outdated methods. In one place in London, an order was copied twenty-nine times from the moment it was received until it was finally charged. The company was over two hundred years old and had never tried to improve its processes. It employed four boys whose job was to search for lost orders around the warehouse. A system of manifolding was set up, which saved so much time that it was hard to convince the company that something hadn’t been missed. After four weeks, they were thrilled.

An American going abroad is much impressed by the deliberation of Europeans and is inclined to criticise them for it. After a time, they can point out enough Americans who have worn out at forty years of age, and are in Europe seeking health, to convince them that perhaps the Europeans are not wholly wrong.

An American traveling abroad is often struck by how deliberate Europeans are and tends to criticize them for it. Eventually, they can notice enough Americans who are burnt out by the age of forty and are in Europe looking for health that it makes them realize that maybe Europeans aren’t completely wrong.

In Germany, the railroads are controlled by the government. When one attempts to introduce short-cut methods, he is confronted 238by the fact that work is needed to keep busy old soldiers for whom the government has to care. In asking an agent of an American firm dealing in labor-saving devices why he did not use any of the devices, the answer was given that in Germany the young men work three years for nothing; he did not feel the necessity of doing away with any of them. At the end of three years' work in an office, a young man receives a diploma for efficiency, if he has attained it. The government exercises a strict supervision over all commercial concerns, and inspects their books at periodic intervals. Commercial failures are therefore more rare there than at home. Fraudulent schemes are dealt with severely.

In Germany, the railroads are run by the government. When someone tries to implement shortcuts, they find that there’s a need to keep older soldiers occupied, whom the government is responsible for. When I asked an agent from an American company that sells labor-saving devices why he didn’t use any of them, he explained that in Germany, young men work for three years without pay; he didn’t see the need to get rid of any of them. After three years of working in an office, a young man earns a diploma for efficiency, provided he has achieved it. The government closely monitors all businesses and checks their financial records at regular intervals. Because of this, commercial failures are less common there than back home. Fraudulent schemes are met with harsh penalties.

There are many large firms in Germany, both jobbers and manufacturers, that are striving to be progressive. The Siemens-Halske Electric Co. are just as progressive in their order and billing methods as any American firm in the same line. To show the attention to details given by the Germans—a managing director of one of the large department stores in Berlin, when asked how long he had lived in the United States, said he had never been there. Upon being complimented upon his American accent, he replied that when talking to an American he always used the American accent, slang, intonation, etc., and when talking to an Englishman he changed his accent, etc., to correspond. He had all the American devices in his accounting department which one would find in any department store in the United States, and sent out monthly typewritten bills the same as John Wanamaker, Altman, and others of New York, and the same as all large department stores do in all American cities.

There are many large companies in Germany, both wholesalers and manufacturers, that are aiming to be innovative. The Siemens-Halske Electric Co. is just as modern in their ordering and billing processes as any American company in the same industry. To illustrate the attention to detail that Germans have—a managing director of one of the large department stores in Berlin, when asked how long he had lived in the United States, said he had never been there. When complimented on his American accent, he replied that when speaking with an American, he always used the American accent, slang, intonation, etc., and when talking to an Englishman, he changed his accent, etc., accordingly. He had all the American tools in his accounting department that you would find in any department store in the U.S., and he sent out monthly typewritten invoices just like John Wanamaker, Altman, and other stores in New York, and just like all large department stores do in American cities.

In France, the commercial houses are very conservative and are subject to the same government supervision as practiced in Germany. In one of the railroad companies, the Chemin de fer du Nord, they use the manibill system of billing (whereby each shipment is billed separately and manifolded on a form of seven sheets) which is the shortest form of billing known, but which has never been adopted by American railroads on account of the bulk of papers increasing too rapidly. The present American method is to put several shipments on a way bill for shipments to any given town, and when the goods arrive at the given town, the receiving stations make out separate freight bills for each shipment, copying the information from the blanket way bill made out at the forwarding station. Some 239of the American railroads are now adopting the special roll machine for car accountants' work, as shown in Fig. 1.

In France, the businesses are quite traditional and are under the same government oversight as in Germany. In one of the railway companies, the Northern Railway, they use the manibill billing system (where each shipment is billed separately on a seven-sheet form), which is the most concise billing format available. However, it hasn't been adopted by American railroads due to the rapid increase in paper volume. Currently, American railroads group several shipments on a waybill for deliveries to any particular town, and when the goods reach that town, the receiving stations create separate freight bills for each shipment, taking the information from the comprehensive waybill prepared at the shipping station. Some 239 of the American railroads are now implementing special roll machines for car accounting tasks, as illustrated in Fig. 1.

Fig. 1. Underwood Special Roll Machine for Car Accountants' Work

Fig. 1. Underwood Special Roll Machine for Car Accountants' Work

The French people do not, as a rule, form large companies like the Americans and Germans and English. There are a large number of small manufacturers and jobbers in France. The large department stores, like the Louvre, in Paris, are run on a strictly cash basis.

The French typically don't operate large companies like the Americans, Germans, and English do. Instead, France has many small manufacturers and wholesalers. The big department stores, like the Louvre in Paris, are managed on a strictly cash basis.

MACHINES FOR MANIFOLDING

Neither the billing machines (book-writing machines) nor typewriters were originally intended for heavy manifolding work. The flat-bed billing machines were originally invented to write in books used for court records, sales books, etc. The book was to remain 240stationary and the machine was to travel over the books. The flat-bed machines are the only machines made for writing in bound books—the latter are being gradually replaced by loose-leaf books. A flat-bed machine for bound books is shown in Fig. 2.

Neither the billing machines (book-writing machines) nor typewriters were originally designed for heavy multi-copy tasks. The flat-bed billing machines were initially invented to write in books used for court records, sales books, and so on. The book was meant to stay in place while the machine moved over it. The flat-bed machines are the only ones made for writing in bound books, which are gradually being replaced by loose-leaf books. A flat-bed machine for bound books is shown in Fig. 2.

Fig. 2. Flat-Bed Typewriter for Bound Books. Elliott-Fisher Co.

Fig. 2. Flat-Bed Typewriter for Bound Books. Elliott-Fisher Co.

The typewriter was originally intended to write on one sheet of paper only. If extra copies were needed, a copying ribbon was used, and a wet copy taken in a letter-press book. In the evolution from bound books (official record and commercial) to loose sheets, the book typewriter was equipped with devices for holding loose sheets of paper—used alone or in connection with books. In the evolution from letter-press copies to carbon copies, the typewriter was equipped with hard-rubber and brass platens for taking from one to twenty-five copies, and in some cases even more, with extremely thin paper and carbon paper.

The typewriter was originally designed to write on a single sheet of paper. If additional copies were needed, a copying ribbon was used to make a wet copy in a letterpress book. As we moved from bound books (for official and commercial use) to loose sheets, the book typewriter got features for holding loose sheets of paper—whether used alone or alongside books. In the transition from letterpress copies to carbon copies, the typewriter was equipped with hard rubber and brass platens that could produce one to twenty-five copies, and sometimes even more, by using very thin paper and carbon paper.

241The flat-bed billing machines are equipped with heavier type-bar springs than the cylinder machines. The operator in depressing the keys overcomes the additional resistance to the touch, due to the heavier type-bar springs, and strikes a heavy blow on the paper, making a good manifold copy in all cases. The operator on a cylinder billing machine strikes a heavier blow than usual to secure the heavy manifolding results. The heavier the blow, the clearer the result on a billing machine. The Underwood billing machine is shown in Fig. 3.

241The flat-bed billing machines have stronger type-bar springs compared to the cylinder machines. When the operator presses the keys, they have to push against the extra resistance from the stronger springs, resulting in a solid impact on the paper that creates a good copy every time. In contrast, the operator on a cylinder billing machine delivers a harder hit than normal to achieve the strong copy results. The harder the hit, the clearer the outcome on a billing machine. The Underwood billing machine is illustrated in Fig. 3.

Fig. 3. Underwood Billing Machine

Fig. 3. Underwood Billing Machine

All typewriters equipped with special attachments for holding the sales sheets, invoices, and orders are called cylinder billing machines. The paper upon which the machine writes is held by, and passes over and around, a round rubber roll, the cylinder.

All typewriters that come with special attachments for holding sales sheets, invoices, and orders are called cylinder billing machines. The paper that the machine writes on is held by and moves over and around a round rubber roll, the cylinder.

This is in contrast to the flat-bed billing machines (or book 242typewriters) on which the paper lies flat on a rubber plate while the machine moves over the paper.

This is in contrast to the flat-bed billing machines (or book typewriters) where the paper sits flat on a rubber plate while the machine moves over it.

Development of Billing Machines. This text has been prepared by taking the simplest forms of billing and order work, and leading up gradually to the more complicated forms. This is actually what took place in the improvement of office and factory work.

Development of Billing Machines. This text has been created by starting with the most basic types of billing and order tasks, gradually moving towards the more complex ones. This is essentially how office and factory work evolved over time.

A bill and a copy were first made—an extra sheet was made for some additional purpose. The advantages of doing two or three things at once led to further investigation. This resulted in still additional sheets being used for other purposes. Every time an additional sheet was added, the labor of typewriting that sheet separately was eliminated.

A bill and a copy were created first—an extra sheet was added for some other purpose. The benefits of multitasking led to more exploration. This resulted in even more sheets being used for different purposes. Each time an extra sheet was added, the effort of typing that sheet separately was saved.

Gradually it developed that it would be useful to copy a part only of the typewritten information on some of the under sheets. Means were found for accomplishing this. For instance, on an order form, it was desirable to have the prices show on the office copy, but not on the copy which was intended for the warehouse or factory.

Gradually, it became clear that it would be helpful to copy only part of the typed information on some of the under sheets. Ways to do this were found. For example, on an order form, it was important to have the prices appear on the office copy, but not on the copy meant for the warehouse or factory.

In some cases it was desirable to write all the information on the top copies and split up the information thereon on the sheets underneath. The final development of all the above ideas is embodied in the compound form, in which all sheets for the office, customer, warehouse, factory, shipping room, and loading platform are typewritten at one operation, and the invoice and duplicate finished as a separate operation.

In some cases, it made sense to write all the information on the top copies and distribute the details on the sheets underneath. The final development of all these ideas is reflected in the compound form, where all sheets for the office, customer, warehouse, factory, shipping room, and loading platform are typewritten in one go, and the invoice and duplicate are completed as a separate task.

Wholesale and manufacturing lines are used mostly in this text to illustrate the evolution and improvement of billing and order work. Some of the conditions which have to be considered in installing office systems are as follows:

Wholesale and manufacturing lines are primarily used in this text to demonstrate the evolution and improvement of billing and order processes. Some of the factors that need to be considered when setting up office systems are as follows:

Whether the orders are received from customers or salesmen or both, and which are in the majority.

Whether the orders come from customers or salespeople, or both, and which group sends more orders.

Whether the goods are carried in stock or manufactured or bought outside, or all of these.

Whether the goods are kept in stock, produced, purchased externally, or a combination of all these.

Whether the orders can be filled completely, or nearly so.

Whether the orders can be filled completely, or almost entirely.

Whether or not the factory may know the prices.

Whether or not the factory knows the prices.

Whether the goods are shipped by freight, mail, express, or all of these.

Whether the goods are shipped by freight, mail, express, or any combination of these.

243Whether copies of the bills have to be made for any other purpose.

243Whether copies of the bills need to be made for any other reason.

Whether a copy of the sales sheet has to be sent to the home office, or made for any department.

Whether a copy of the sales sheet needs to be sent to the head office, or created for any department.

If additional copies of either are necessary, what colors to use for readily distinguishing them.

If you need more copies of either, what colors should you use to easily tell them apart?

How many ledger clerks, and how to sort their work to the best advantage so that each clerk handles his work only.

How many ledger clerks are there, and how can we organize their tasks effectively so that each clerk is responsible for their own work?

How to file office and factory copies for quick reference.

How to organize office and factory copies for easy reference.

How to plan all the above so that improper filing of sheets does not destroy the chain of record.

How to plan everything above so that misfiling documents doesn’t disrupt the record chain.

The reasons for these considerations will be better appreciated after further progress is made.

The reasons for these thoughts will be clearer once more progress is made.

If the business student learns the capabilities of office machinery, the advantage of manifolding, the use of colored papers, and the important feature of correctly grouping statistics (which is almost an art in itself), he will have accomplished much. He should learn also to develop his own power of originality and suggestion.

If the business student learns how to use office machines, the benefits of manifold printing, the use of colored paper, and the crucial skill of accurately organizing statistics (which is practically an art form), he will have achieved a lot. He should also work on developing his own creativity and ability to suggest ideas.

The natural order in which order billing and shipping ought to be presented is the way in which the transactions occur. Methods of billing (making out invoices) in many businesses govern the manner in which the orders are made up, and therefore will be considered first.

The natural sequence in which billing and shipping should be displayed reflects how transactions actually happen. Billing methods (creating invoices) in many businesses determine how orders are prepared, so we will look at this first.

In order to more clearly bring out the advantages of new methods, it is deemed advisable to consider old-style methods and contrast them with the newer ideas. By showing the weak points in the older methods and why the new are better, the gradual evolution and improvements can be traced.

To better highlight the benefits of new methods, it's recommended to look at traditional methods and compare them with modern ideas. By pointing out the flaws in the older methods and explaining why the new ones are superior, we can track the gradual evolution and improvements.

Old-Style Method of Billing and Making Wet Copy in Tissue Book. There are enough firms who still follow this plan of billing to resent the term "old-style." The best that can be said for this plan is that it is shorter than writing the bill-and-sales book, or sales journal, separately. The wet copy takes the place of rewriting the bill. One objection to this method of copying bills is that if all the bills are copied some of them are either blurred or are too light when the copy has dried on the tissue leaf. This is a difficulty which can be corrected by careful attention.

Old-Style Method of Billing and Making Wet Copy in Tissue Book. There are still enough companies that use this billing method to be unhappy with the term "old-style." The best thing to say about this method is that it’s quicker than writing separate bill-and-sales books or sales journals. The wet copy eliminates the need to rewrite the bill. One drawback of this method is that if all the bills are copied, some of them may come out blurry or too light when the copy dries on the tissue leaf. This issue can be fixed with careful attention.

The worst feature is that one never knows whether all the 244bills have been copied, and there is no way of knowing this unless the copies in the tissue book are checked back with the orders from which the bills were made. Many firms spend thousands of dollars in advertising, traveling expense, labor, etc., ship out and bill large invoices of goods, "double check" the invoices, and leave the copying of the invoices in tissue books to a young office boy. They never think to check back the invoices with the orders to be absolutely certain that the goods have been charged as well as invoiced (billed out).

The worst part is that you never know if all the bills have been copied, and there's no way to find out unless you compare the copies in the tissue book with the original orders that the bills were generated from. Many companies spend thousands on advertising, travel, labor, and more, ship out and bill huge invoices for goods, "double-check" the invoices, and then leave the copying of those invoices in tissue books to an inexperienced office assistant. They never think to verify the invoices against the orders to be completely sure that the goods have been charged as well as invoiced.

Fig. 4. Old-Style Cloth Bath. Underwood Typewriter Co.

Fig. 4. Vintage Cloth Bath. Underwood Typewriter Co.

If one should ask them how they know that all invoices are charged (or copied into the tissue books) the invariable answer would be, "Oh! we never lose any bills before they are copied." Ask them how they know none are lost and, after thinking a while, they will admit that they really do not know for sure. They begin to check back the tissue book after some customer brings in a bill for payment which has never been copied into the tissue book, and hence has not been posted to the customer's account.

If you were to ask them how they know that all invoices have been charged (or copied into the tissue books), the standard response would be, "Oh! We never lose any bills before they're copied." If you ask them how they know none are lost, after some reflection, they would admit that they don't really know for sure. They start to check the tissue book after a customer comes in with a bill for payment that hasn't been copied into the tissue book and, therefore, hasn’t been posted to the customer's account.

Fig. 5. Old-Style Copy Press. Underwood Typewriter Co.

Fig. 5. Vintage Copy Press. Underwood Typewriter Co.

Fig. 4 shows the old-style cloth bath, Fig. 5 the old-style copy press, and Fig. 6 the old-style sales book (tissue paper leaves).

Fig. 4 shows the vintage cloth bath, Fig. 5 the vintage copy press, and Fig. 6 the vintage sales book (with tissue paper pages).

LOOSE-LEAF SALES SHEETS AND INVOICES

This style of billing was the first variation from the plan of using copying ink, or pencil, on invoices and then transferring the ink to tissue paper books, by wetting the leaves with water and then absorbing the surplus water with paper blotters. Or this was done by placing damp cloths on the under side of the leaf and covering 245it with a leaf, placing the invoice downward on the tissue leaf, closing the book, and placing it in a copying press. The ink from the invoice was sufficiently transferred to the tissue paper to make an impression thereon.

This method of billing was the first change from the approach of using copying ink or pencil on invoices and then transferring the ink to tissue paper books. This was done by wetting the pages with water and then soaking up the extra water with blotting paper. Alternatively, damp cloths were placed on the underside of the page, and a leaf was placed on top of it, with the invoice facing down on the tissue page. Then the book was closed and put into a copying press. The ink from the invoice transferred enough to the tissue paper to create a clear impression.

Fig. 6. Old-Style Sales Book. Underwood Typewriter Co.

Fig. 6. Vintage Sales Book. Underwood Typewriter Co.

If the person who did the copying did not use due care, the paper would be too wet and the ink would run and blur the copy and the invoice. If two invoices were accidently picked up by the person copying, the top invoice would not be copied on the tissue sheet. This is a most serious objection, for the reason that the copy in the tissue was used as record of the invoice for the purpose of posting into the ledger.

If the person copying didn't take proper care, the paper would be too wet and the ink would smudge and blur the copy and the invoice. If the person copying accidentally grabbed two invoices, the top invoice wouldn't get copied onto the tissue sheet. This is a significant issue because the copy on the tissue serves as a record of the invoice for entering into the ledger.

Another difficulty was the usual one experienced through the use of bound books in office work. Only one person can use a book at one time. If Fayette Henry, the accountant, was using the tissue-copy book, and Dave Pike, the order clerk, wanted to use it to see if all invoices had been copied by the office boy, he had to wait on Fayette Henry. The loose-leaf sales sheet shown in Fig. 7, with the pages serially numbered and placed in proper binders after each sheet has been filed, overcomes all of the difficulties mentioned—with many additional benefits.

Another challenge was the common one faced with bound books in office work. Only one person can use a book at a time. If Fayette Henry, the accountant, was using the tissue-copy book, and Dave Pike, the order clerk, needed to check if all invoices had been copied by the office boy, he had to wait for Fayette Henry. The loose-leaf sales sheet shown in Fig. 7, with pages numbered and organized in proper binders after each sheet has been filed, solves all of these issues—along with many additional benefits.

246

Fig. 7. Loose-Leaf Sales Sheet and Invoices. No Ruling on Sales Sheet. Remington Typewriter Co.

Fig. 7. Loose-Leaf Sales Sheet and Invoices. No Ruling on Sales Sheet. Remington Typewriter Co.

247The loose-leaf sales sheet and invoice were first used with the flat-bed billing machine, the sales sheet being held in position by being placed over studs (round metal posts), which fitted into the punched holes in the edge of the paper. These punched holes were used ultimately for fitting over the metal binder posts in the loose-leaf binders. The invoices were wider than the regular-size invoice and were perforated about 1 inch or 1½ inches from the left side, as shown in Fig. 8. To the left of the perforated edge were two small holes about 2¾ inches apart, which fitted over two small studs on a sliding bill-holder device. This plan provided a means of holding the large sheet and invoice in proper relation to each other. A piece of carbon paper the same size as the sales sheet was placed between the invoice and the sales sheet. This ruling of the sales sheet is shown in Fig. 9.

247The loose-leaf sales sheet and invoice were first used with the flat-bed billing machine. The sales sheet was held in place by being placed over studs (round metal posts) that fit into the punched holes along the edge of the paper. These punched holes were eventually used to fit over the metal binder posts in the loose-leaf binders. The invoices were wider than the standard invoice and had perforations about 1 inch or 1½ inches from the left side, as shown in Fig. 8. To the left of the perforated edge were two small holes that were about 2¾ inches apart, designed to fit over two small studs on a sliding bill-holder device. This setup created a way to keep the large sheet and invoice properly aligned with each other. A piece of carbon paper the same size as the sales sheet was placed between the invoice and the sales sheet. This layout of the sales sheet is shown in Fig. 9.

Fig. 8. Invoice for Use on Billing Machine

Fig. 8. Invoice for Use on Billing Machine

When an invoice was written on the billing machine, it was manifolded on the sales sheet beneath. When the invoice was finished it was ready to mail—no delay in copying invoices, no blurred invoices through careless copying. No fading of the manifolded copy where black carbon paper was used. Inks are not made of indestructible carbons as black carbon paper is made. A condensed billing or invoicing loose-leaf sales book for this purpose is shown in Fig. 10.

When an invoice was created on the billing machine, a copy was automatically generated on the sales sheet below it. Once the invoice was complete, it was ready to be mailed—eliminating any delays in copying invoices, and avoiding any smudged invoices due to careless copying. There was no risk of the copied version fading because of the black carbon paper used. Inks today are not as durable as the carbon paper was. A compact billing or invoicing loose-leaf sales book for this purpose is shown in Fig. 10.

The following are some of the many good features of the condensed system, as it is in use to-day, briefly stated:

The following are some of the many advantages of the condensed system, as it's used today, briefly stated:

248

Fig. 9. Loose-Leaf Sales Sheet

Fig. 9. Loose-Leaf Sales Page

249Bill and entry in sales book are obtained at one operation.

249Bill and entry in the sales book are obtained in one operation.

Entries upon sales book agree absolutely with bill rendered.

Entries in the sales book match perfectly with the bill provided.

The bill clerk becomes bill and entry clerk combined.

The bill clerk becomes a combined bill and entry clerk.

There is no danger of a bill being rendered without the proper charge being made.

There’s no risk of a bill being issued without the right charge being applied.

Entries under this system occupy but one-fourth the space required for those written with the pen.

Entries under this system take up only one-fourth the space needed for those written by hand.

There is no waste space upon sales sheet.

There is no wasted space on the sales sheet.

Both sides of the sales sheet may be utilized.

Both sides of the sales sheet can be used.

The saving in vault space alone is worthy of special consideration.

The savings in vault space alone should be given special attention.

Fig. 10. Condensed Billing or Invoicing Loose-Leaf Sales Book.
Underwood Typewriter Co.

Fig. 10. Compact Billing or Invoicing Loose-Leaf Sales Book.
Underwood Typewriter Co.

In recent years, the typewriter companies have placed devices on their typewriters which permit of the sales sheet being held independently of the invoices. This permits one to hold the large sales sheet in the machine until enough invoices have been manifolded thereon to cover the page, at which time the sales sheet is reversed. The invoices can be placed in the machine and removed therefrom after being written, without interfering with the sales sheet. No 250extra width of invoice is required, which permits of old stationery being used in the form of invoices. The flat-bed machines can use old stationery, but not quite so well. However, when billing by machinery, it is false economy to use stationery designed for pen work. The reasons for this will be touched upon later.

In recent years, typewriter companies have added features to their machines that allow the sales sheet to be kept separate from the invoices. This lets you hold the large sales sheet in the machine until enough invoices are printed on it to fill the page, at which point the sales sheet is flipped over. Invoices can be loaded into the machine and taken out after being written, without disrupting the sales sheet. No extra width of invoice is needed, which means you can use old stationery as invoices. Flat-bed machines can also use old stationery, but not as effectively. However, when billing with machinery, it's not cost-effective to use stationery made for handwriting. The reasons for this will be discussed later.

The use of two ledgers necessitates the use of two columns at the right side of the page. All names from A to L are placed in the first column; all names from M to Z are placed in the second. For instance, an invoice reading as shown in the sales journal, Fig. 11, illustrates the idea of writing the totals in the two columns at the right side of sheet according to the initials of the last name of the firm or the individual, as the respective ledgers are arranged in that manner. If at the end of the month the first column shows a total of $3,000.00 the bookkeeper knows that he has posted that amount into Ledger A-L, etc.

The use of two ledgers requires two columns on the right side of the page. All names from A to L are listed in the first column, while all names from M to Z go in the second. For example, an invoice as shown in the sales journal, Fig. 11, demonstrates the idea of writing the totals in the two columns on the right side of the sheet based on the initials of the last name of the company or person, as the ledgers are organized that way. If at the end of the month the first column totals $3,000.00, the bookkeeper knows that amount has been posted to Ledger A-L, and so on.

The above plan enables the bookkeeper to add separately the totals which are posted to the respective ledgers. The desire to separate the charges to a country ledger and a city ledger can be accomplished by using two columns in the same way.

The plan above allows the bookkeeper to individually add the totals that are posted to the respective ledgers. The goal of separating the charges into a country ledger and a city ledger can also be achieved by using two columns in the same way.

The desire to place all credit memoranda in the sales book can be accomplished by using two columns in the sales book as noted above. The first column is used for the charges, and the second one for entering the credits. One difficulty arises in connection with this plan. Credits are liable to be entered in the debit column. To obviate this, the invoices are made just wide enough to reach over the first column, the credit memoranda are made wider to reach over the last column. When an amount is written in the last column of the invoice, it manifolds in the proper column of the sales sheet. The same is true of an amount written in the last column of a credit memo.

The goal of putting all credit memos in the sales book can be achieved by using two columns in the sales book as mentioned above. The first column is for charges, and the second one is for credits. However, there is one issue with this approach: credits might end up being recorded in the debit column. To prevent this, the invoices are designed to be just wide enough to cover the first column, while the credit memos are wider to span the last column. When an amount is filled in the last column of the invoice, it correctly appears in the appropriate column of the sales sheet. The same applies to an amount filled in the last column of a credit memo.

This subdivision of columns is carried a step further to permit of the analyzation of sales in several ways.

This breakdown of columns goes a step further to allow for the analysis of sales in multiple ways.

According to classes of goods, as follows:

According to types of goods, as follows:

LAMSON FOUR-INCH PNEUMATIC TUBE ORDER CARRYING SYSTEM FOR A LARGE WHOLESALE ESTABLISHMENT OR A FACTORY
Lamson Consolidated Store Service Co.

LAMSON FOUR-INCH PNEUMATIC TUBE ORDER CARRYING SYSTEM FOR A LARGE WHOLESALE BUSINESS OR A FACTORY
Lamson Consolidated Store Service Co.

251

Fig. 11. Sales Journal Arranged for Distribution to Two Ledgers

Fig. 11. Sales Journal Set Up for Distribution to Two Ledgers

252According to territory, as follows:

By territory, as follows:

According to salesmen, as follows:

According to salespeople, as follows:

To separate the sale of regular goods from goods which are being sold on consignment, as follows:

To distinguish between the sale of regular goods and goods that are sold on consignment, as follows:

Generally the invoice is wide enough to reach over the total column only, as shown in Fig. 12. Therefore, a total amount written in the total column of the invoice will manifold onto the sales sheet, and in the column marked Total.

Generally, the invoice is wide enough to cover just the total column, as shown in Fig. 12. Therefore, a total amount written in the total column of the invoice will be copied onto the sales sheet, specifically in the column marked Total.

A wide-carriage billing machine, if used, can be adjusted with tabulator stops to jump to any column desired. The total amount is then written therein a second time. The amount of the total column should always equal the total of all the columns placed to the right of the total column. This plan eliminates the old way of waiting until the end of the month, and then laboriously going over the 253sales book with one total column only, and picking out the various items according to the classification wanted.

A wide-carriage billing machine, when used, can be set up with tabulator stops to move to any desired column. The total amount is then written there a second time. The total column should always match the sum of all the columns to the right of it. This method removes the need to wait until the end of the month and then painstakingly going through the 253 sales book with just one total column, picking out different items based on the needed classification.

Fig. 12. Loose-Leaf Sales Sheet and Invoices with Columns for Distribution of Labor and Stock

Fig. 12. Sales Sheet and Invoices with Sections for Tracking Labor and Inventory Distribution

The work should be planned in a manner which permits of each day's work being finished each day—leaving nothing to accumulate until the end of the month, necessitating the retracing of steps to secure certain statistical information.

The work should be organized in a way that allows each day's tasks to be completed by the end of the day—avoiding any buildup until the end of the month, which would require going back to gather specific statistical information.

In certain lines of business it is desirable to make two sales sheets, 254one of which is retained in a binder for an office record and the other is used for various purposes. It can be used as record of sales from a branch to a home office, each page being numbered in duplicate, and of a distinctive color. This is the plan used all over the world by the Standard Oil Company. As the sales sheets arrive at the home office, they are placed in their respective binders and are gradually made into a built-up book. The loss of a sheet would be instantly detected by the missing page number.

In some businesses, it's useful to create two sales sheets, 254one kept in a binder for the office records and the other used for different purposes. It can serve as a record of sales from a branch to the home office, with each page numbered in duplicate and in a unique color. This method is used globally by the Standard Oil Company. As the sales sheets arrive at the home office, they are filed in their designated binders and gradually compiled into a complete book. If a sheet is lost, it would be immediately noticed because of the missing page number.

A large French perfumery firm in New York pursues this plan, and sends to Paris the duplicate sales sheet on thin paper. It gives the home office a fine record of every invoice sent out to any customer by the branch office or warehouse. As several invoices can be manifolded on each page, and on both sides of the sheet, it is the most economical method of billing as far as stationery is involved. The name condensed billing indicates this fact.

A large French perfume company in New York follows this plan and sends a copy of the sales sheet on thin paper to Paris. It provides the main office with a detailed record of every invoice sent to any customer by the branch office or warehouse. Since multiple invoices can be printed on each page, and on both sides of the sheet, this is the most cost-effective way to handle billing regarding stationery. The term condensed billing reflects this fact.

In other instances, the duplicate sales sheet is wide enough only to allow quantity and description of goods to be manifolded thereon, prices and extensions not showing. This narrow sheet can be used for posting to the stock records without disclosing to that department the prices at which the particular goods have been sold. This form of the sales sheet is shown in Fig 13.

In other cases, the duplicate sales sheet is only wide enough to include the quantity and description

Duplicate Invoices. There are many reasons, in various lines, why duplicate invoices are desirable and even necessary. Some customers request invoices rendered in duplicate with one copy complete, the other minus the prices and extensions. To accomplish this, it is either necessary to place a piece of paper between the carbon and duplicate invoice in such a manner that the prices and extensions will not copy, or to use a short invoice cut off at the left of the price column, or to use a short piece of carbon paper between the original and second, or duplicate, invoice.

Duplicate Invoices. There are many reasons, across different fields, why duplicate invoices are useful and sometimes required. Some customers ask for invoices in duplicate, with one copy being complete and the other lacking prices and extensions. To achieve this, you either need to place a piece of paper between the carbon and the duplicate invoice to prevent the prices and extensions from copying, use a short invoice that cuts off to the left of the price column, or incorporate a smaller piece of carbon paper between the original and the duplicate invoice.

It is desirable to make extra copies of invoices or duplicates for the use of various departments of a business, for instance, analysis of sales by salesmen. Where a company employs a large number of salesmen, it is very convenient to file in binders a duplicate copy of all invoices sold by each salesman, using a binder for each salesman. This is preferable to having separate columns in the sales book (sales sheets in binders). The latter method permits each salesman to see what every other salesman is doing.

It’s a good idea to create extra copies of invoices or duplicates for different departments within a business, like analyzing sales by salespeople. When a company has many salespeople, it’s really practical to keep a duplicate copy of all invoices sold by each salesperson in separate binders, one for each salesperson. This approach is better than having separate columns in the sales book (sales sheets in binders). The latter method allows each salesperson to see what all the other salespeople are doing.

255

Fig. 13. Sales Sheet for Condensed Billing

Fig. 13. Sales Sheet for Condensed Billing

256Department Records. A separate binder allows each man to consult his record without inconvenience to any other one. In large companies having a traffic department, it is necessary to provide a duplicate copy of each invoice for the record, showing complete details of every charge.

256Department Records. A separate binder lets each person check their record without bothering anyone else. In big companies with a traffic department, it’s essential to keep a duplicate copy of each invoice for the record, showing all the details of every charge.

A distinction should be made between those firms who make their invoices before the goods are shipped, and those who make the invoices after the goods have been shipped. In the cloak business, for instance, the goods are generally billed before the goods are shipped, the invoice being placed in an envelope and packed with the goods.

A distinction should be made between companies that create their invoices before shipping the goods and those that create the invoices after the goods have been shipped. In the cloak business, for example, the goods are usually invoiced before they are shipped, with the invoice placed in an envelope and packed with the goods.

Ofttimes the goods are manufactured in proper quantities, properly checked from the order to the packers' table, and then packed improperly—some customer receiving too many garments, another, too few. Yet the order will be properly checked. To obviate this difficulty, a scheme was devised whereby the packer received a duplicate typewritten copy of the bill (or invoice) showing everything but the quantities. This makes it necessary for the packer to count all the garments and mark down in pencil on this copy of the bill the quantity of each style and kind to be shipped. Before the goods are shipped, the packer's copy of the invoice, with his quantities marked in lead pencil, is compared with the quantities charged on the sales sheet. This scheme forces the packer to count all garments instead of double checking someone else's figures in an absent-minded, or even neglectful, way.

Often, the products are made in the right quantities, checked properly from the order to the packers' table, and then packed incorrectly—some customers get too many items, while others get too few. However, the order is still checked accurately. To solve this issue, a system was created where the packer gets a duplicate typewritten copy of the bill (or invoice) that shows everything except the quantities. This requires the packer to count all the items and write down the quantity of each style and type on this copy of the bill in pencil. Before the items are shipped, the packer's invoice copy, with his counted quantities in pencil, is compared with the quantities listed on the sales sheet. This system ensures the packer counts all items instead of just verifying someone else's figures without paying full attention.

This is accomplished by placing a narrow strip of paper over the quantity column of the duplicate invoice, but under the carbon paper. The quantity figures manifold onto the strip of paper instead of onto the duplicate invoice. This plan is termed using a blind. The narrow strip of paper between the invoice and duplicate is the blind described a little further on.

This is done by putting a narrow strip of paper over the quantity column of the duplicate invoice, but underneath the carbon paper. The quantity numbers print onto the strip of paper instead of the duplicate invoice. This method is called using a blind. The narrow strip of paper between the invoice and the duplicate is the blind mentioned a bit later.

The next step in short cutting work is the printing of a label in connection with the invoice and sales sheet. In the book business, where it is generally possible to fill orders from stock, and where the invoice can be made before the goods are shipped, it is possible to place a small piece of paper (the label) between a folded invoice in such a manner that when the name is written on the invoice it manifolds onto the label as well as onto the duplicate invoice and sales sheet.

The next step in streamlining work is printing a label alongside the invoice and sales sheet. In the book business, where it's usually feasible to fulfill orders from stock and where the invoice can be prepared before shipping the goods, you can put a small piece of paper (the label) between a folded invoice so that when the name is written on the invoice, it also gets copied onto the label and the duplicate invoice and sales sheet.

257Analysis of Quantities and Amounts. In certain lines of business which sell three or four varieties of goods, it is desirable to analyze the weights or quantities in the proper columns, which in turn manifold onto the sales sheets, as shown in Fig. 14.

257Analysis of Quantities and Amounts. In some types of businesses that sell three or four different kinds of products, it's important to break down the weights or quantities into the correct columns, which then multiply onto the sales sheets, as illustrated in Fig. 14.

Fig. 14. Sales Sheet for Analyzing Quantities and Amounts of Goods

Fig. 14. Sales Sheet for Analyzing Quantities and Amounts of Goods

This saves a great deal of time as compared with making out the same invoice in the following way:

This saves a lot of time compared to creating the same invoice like this:

3000 # Brass Rods @20 $60.00
2500 # Brass Bars @21 $52.50
1000 # Zinc Bars @15 $15.00

By following the first plan, all of the weights for the respective classes of goods will be manifolded into the proper columns, and it is therefore an easy matter to total each column, and at the end of the month the classification of sales will be totaled according to weights as well as according to dollars and cents. The invoice is ruled to match the sales sheet.

By following the first plan, all the weights for the different classes of goods will be organized into the right columns, making it easy to total each column. At the end of the month, sales will be totaled based on both weights and dollar amounts. The invoice is set up to align with the sales sheet.

Information on Sales Sheet Not on Invoice. In certain lines of business, such as wire-screen manufacture, it is desirable at times to substitute the next size of wire in order to fill orders promptly. In such cases, it is necessary to have the invoice show the size of wire ordered, but to have the sales sheet show the size really sent. It would seem impossible therefore to write No. 8 wire on the invoice and have No. 9 wire manifold on the sales sheet.

Information on Sales Sheet Not on Invoice. In some industries, like wire-screen manufacturing, it can be helpful to use the next size of wire to fulfill orders quickly. In these situations, the invoice needs to reflect the size of wire that was ordered, but the sales sheet must indicate the actual size that was sent. Therefore, it would be unusual to write No. 8 wire on the invoice while having No. 9 wire listed on the sales sheet.

258The idea used to accomplish the desired result is to place the invoice in such a position with relation to the sales sheet that a margin is left on the left-hand side of the sales sheet, which would permit the operator typewriting directly on the sales sheet, and placing thereon the actual size of the wire shipped. The size ordered would be written on the invoice in the regular manner, and of course would manifold onto the sales sheet.

258The way to achieve the desired outcome is to position the invoice next to the sales sheet so that there’s a margin on the left side of the sales sheet. This allows the operator to type directly on the sales sheet and include the actual size of the wire shipped. The ordered size would be noted on the invoice as usual, and it would automatically be transferred to the sales sheet.

There are other cases where it is desirable to use this idea. For instance, wholesale dry goods firms when purchasing dry goods from eastern manufacturers request the latter when billing to use lot numbers furnished by the purchaser. It is also necessary for the manufacturers to bill the goods according to their own lot numbers. Hence it becomes necessary to have both the customer's lot number and their own on the sales sheet. This is accomplished by writing their own lot numbers directly upon the sales sheets at the left of the invoice and then making the invoice out in the regular way. This idea carries out the customer's wishes, and always gives a comparison of lot numbers to the manufacturers on their sales sheets. Flat-bed machines require wider invoice, Fig. 15.

There are other situations where this concept is useful. For example, wholesale dry goods companies, when buying products from manufacturers in the East, ask those manufacturers to use lot numbers provided by the buyer when creating invoices. It's also important for the manufacturers to bill the products using their own lot numbers. Therefore, both the customer's lot number and the manufacturer's lot number need to be included on the sales sheet. This is done by writing the manufacturer's lot numbers directly on the sales sheets to the left of the invoice and then preparing the invoice as usual. This approach meets the customer's requirements and ensures there's always a comparison of lot numbers for the manufacturers on their sales sheets. Flat-bed machines need a wider invoice, see Fig. 15.

Goods Purchased Outside. It is possible to make a short cut in some lines of business where the goods sold are not kept in stock but are purchased from other firms in the same city. When placing the invoice in the billing machine over the sales sheet, requisition blanks in duplicate or triplicate can also be placed in the machine with the invoice, and the items which have to be ordered outside written first on the invoice. When all of these items have been entered on the invoice, the requisition blanks may be removed, and the invoice and sales sheet left in the billing machine, putting the remaining items which are to be shipped and charged on the invoice (sales sheet). This occurs where orders can be shipped complete.

Goods Purchased Outside. In some businesses, you can take a shortcut when the products sold aren’t kept in stock but bought from other companies in the same city. When you’re entering the invoice into the billing machine above the sales sheet, you can also place duplicate or triplicate requisition forms in the machine along with the invoice, writing the items that need to be ordered from outside at the top of the invoice. Once all those items are entered on the invoice, you can take out the requisition forms and leave the invoice and sales sheet in the billing machine, adding the remaining items that will be shipped and charged on the invoice (sales sheet). This is applicable when orders can be shipped all at once.

This plan can also be used when writing up the order, where the billing is done after the goods are shipped. It is to be remembered that there is a great distinction to be made in handling the billing work of firms who are able to fill their own orders complete, as contrasted with those firms who have to wait until goods are shipped in order to determine which items to bill. Some firms who always carry a complete stock are able to make up an invoice and order blank, a label for the express package, and a charge on sales sheet, simultaneously, because they know that they can ship every item called for, and consequently do not have to wait to see what items are shipped before billing them.

This plan can also be used when creating the order, where billing happens after the goods are shipped. It’s important to note that there’s a significant difference in how to handle the billing process for companies that can fulfill their own orders completely, compared to those that need to wait until goods are shipped to decide which items to bill. Some companies that always keep a full stock can create an invoice and order form, a label for the shipping package, and a charge on the sales sheet all at once, because they know they can ship every item requested, so they don’t have to wait to see what items are shipped before billing them.

259

Fig. 15. Form to Provide on Sales Sheet Information not on Invoice

Fig. 15. Form for Providing Information on Sales Sheet That's Not Included on the Invoice

260Unit Billing. The unit idea in billing has grown considerably in the last few years, notwithstanding that the size of the bills have to be uniform, and as large an invoice has to be used for one item as for a large bill. Many firms prefer the unit idea to the condensed sales sheet idea.

260Unit Billing. The concept of unit billing has expanded significantly in recent years, even though the bills need to be consistent in size, and the same large invoice format must be used for a single item as for a larger bill. Many companies favor the unit billing approach over the condensed sales sheet method.

This is due chiefly to the elasticity of the scheme. The duplicate, triplicate, or quadruplicate of the invoice can be sorted in any desirable way. It is especially convenient for bookkeepers to sort duplicates of the invoices alphabetically, and save a great deal of time in posting to loose-leaf ledgers arranged alphabetically, in the same manner. (In mentioning loose-leaf ledgers, card-ledgers are always included, as the same principles are applied to one as to the other, as far as accounting methods are concerned.) It is easier to handle unit billing forms on the typewriters with billing attachments, which is an added reason that many firms prefer to use them. Some of these forms are shown in Fig. 16.

This is mainly due to the flexibility of the system. The duplicate, triplicate, or quadruplicate copies of the invoice can be organized in any way desired. It's particularly helpful for bookkeepers to arrange duplicate invoices alphabetically, saving a lot of time when entering data into loose-leaf ledgers that are also set up alphabetically. (When we talk about loose-leaf ledgers, we also mean card-ledgers, as the same principles apply to both regarding accounting methods.) It's easier to work with unit billing forms on typewriters with billing attachments, which is another reason many companies prefer using them. Some of these forms are shown in Fig. 16.

Another idea to be recommended is the color scheme, whereby each copy of the invoice is manifolded onto a different-colored piece of paper. In sorting the various copies for different departments, different colors will greatly facilitate the recognition of various sheets, and the uses or departments for which each is intended.

Another idea worth recommending is the color scheme, where each copy of the invoice is printed on a different-colored piece of paper. When sorting the various copies for different departments, the different colors will make it much easier to identify each sheet and the specific uses or departments for which each is intended.

ORDER WORK OF WHOLESALE GROCERS

There are hardly two firms who handle their order work alike. The first consideration in treating order methods is to distinguish the classes of business in which the orders are made up ready for execution by the salesman, from those which are received from customers and transcribed on typewriters. The first class will be discussed separately from the second.

There are barely two companies that handle their order processes the same way. The first thing to consider when discussing order methods is to differentiate between the types of businesses where orders are prepared for execution by the salesperson and those that come from customers and are typed up. The first type will be discussed separately from the second.

Wholesale grocers, druggists, and similar lines receive the great majority of their orders from the salesmen in the field. After the orders are opened, the first step is to stamp on each order a number with an automatic numbering machine. After this is done they are copied into an order register as follows:

Wholesale grocers, pharmacists, and similar businesses get most of their orders from salespeople in the field. Once the orders are opened, the next step is to stamp each order with a number using an automatic numbering machine. After this, they are copied into an order register like this:

261

Fig. 16. Samples of Unit Billing. Remington Typewriter Co.

Fig. 16. Examples of Unit Billing. Remington Typewriter Co.

262
1012 John Smith & Co., Plainfield, N. J.
1013 A. B. Jones & Bro., Providence, R. I.
1014 U. J. Benedict, Elmira, N. Y.
1015 Grace Barnes & Co., Alliance, Ohio.

After the orders are filled and charged, they are checked on the order register. About once a week all of the unchecked numbers on the order register are compared with the unfilled orders. If an order should become lost, the fact would not remain unknown longer than one week's time.

After the orders are completed and billed, they are verified in the order register. About once a week, all the unchecked numbers in the order register are compared with the unfilled orders. If an order were to go missing, the issue would be discovered within a week.

It should always be remembered that in case an order is not completely filled and is "back ordered," the back order should always show the original order number in order to prevent confusion. A little practical experience will quickly show how wrong it is to use a new number for a back order.

It should always be kept in mind that if an order isn't completely filled and is "back ordered," the back order should always include the original order number to avoid confusion. Some practical experience will quickly demonstrate how mistaken it is to use a new number for a back order.

Back Orders. In the problem of systematizing any kind of business, the question of back orders and the proper method of handling them is one of the most troublesome. Some firms do not wish an order blank returned to the warerooms after it has once been there, because they do not wish the wareroom or factory to know the prices which are placed on order blanks in the office after they have been received there for pricing, extending, and billing. Many firms therefore make an entirely new order to be returned to the factory or wareroom with the letter A used in connection with the order number, as follows: 1013A. This of course delays the filling of the order until the back order is typewritten. If it is necessary to make a second back order, the same would read 1013B. Other firms use the color scheme. This is a very good idea, as it indicates clearly to the order fillers old orders which should receive attention first.

Back Orders. When it comes to organizing any type of business, dealing with back orders and the best way to manage them is often a major challenge. Some companies prefer not to send an order form back to the warehouse after it’s been there once, because they want to keep the warehouse or factory unaware of the prices that are added to the order forms in the office after they’ve been received for pricing, processing, and billing. As a result, many companies create a completely new order to send to the factory or warehouse, using the letter A with the order number, like this: 1013A. This, of course, delays the completion of the order until the back order is typed up. If another back order is needed, it would be marked 1013B. Other companies employ a color-coding system. This is a really effective approach, as it clearly indicates to the order fillers which old orders need to be prioritized.

Many important improvements in the order and billing methods have been inaugurated in recent years in the business of wholesale grocers. Formerly it was the custom, after the order had been numbered and recorded in the order register, to pass the orders out into the warehouse with the general understanding that they were to be filled as quickly as possible. The order fillers would generally start at the top floor and pick all of the items which were to be shipped, place them on a truck and take them to the next lower floor, and follow this plan until the order was entirely filled. In stores above a certain size this resulted in considerable delay.

Many significant improvements in ordering and billing methods have been introduced in recent years in the wholesale grocery business. Previously, it was standard practice, after numbering and recording an order in the order register, to send the orders to the warehouse with the general understanding that they should be filled as quickly as possible. The order pickers usually started on the top floor and gathered all the items to be shipped, placed them on a truck, and then moved them to the next lower floor, continuing this process until the order was completely filled. In larger stores, this often caused considerable delays.

263The first improvement was to send the orders to the shipping department, where they were split up by clerks known as Slippers, who wrote on slips the items which were to be taken out of stock, each slip representing the goods to be gotten out on a certain order from a certain floor. This idea allowed the order fillers on all floors to work simultaneously, and resulted in considerable saving of time.

263The first improvement was to send the orders to the shipping department, where clerks known as Slippers would separate them by writing on slips the items that needed to be taken out of stock. Each slip represented the goods to be retrieved for a specific order from a specific floor. This approach enabled the order fillers on all floors to work at the same time and significantly reduced the amount of time needed.

Another favorable result obtained through this system is that the shipping clerk retains an original copy of the order (the copy sent in by the salesman) and is enabled therefore to follow up all departments and hurry up any department which may be delinquent in the filling of a certain order. In planning work, it is always advisable to have one department act as a follow-up on some other department. In the grocery business, it is much more satisfactory for the shipping clerk to have a complete record of all the orders to be shipped that day, than to hand the original orders into the warehouse to be sent down to the shipping department after the order has been entirely filled, and then have the shipping clerk rushed at the last minute to plan his loads and do all of the clerical work, such as making up bills of lading, etc.

Another positive outcome from this system is that the shipping clerk keeps an original copy of the order (the one sent in by the salesperson) and can therefore follow up with all departments and speed up any department that might be lagging in fulfilling a specific order. When planning work, it’s always a good idea for one department to follow up with another. In the grocery business, it’s much more effective for the shipping clerk to have a complete record of all the orders scheduled for shipment that day, rather than handing the original orders over to the warehouse to be sent down to the shipping department after the order has been filled. This way, the shipping clerk isn’t rushed at the last minute to organize his loads and complete all the clerical tasks, such as creating bills of lading, etc.

The next improvement was necessitated by a desire on the part of those wholesale groceries which are located in cities having an efficient interurban electric car service to fill orders at different hours of the day. One western firm transcribed all of its orders on cylinder billing machines, giving the shipping clerk a full copy of the order, and each department a copy of the items which are to be filled from that department only. On the shipping clerk's copy, the notation 11 A.M., is marked, also on all of the department order slips. This indicates that the order is to be shipped on the 11 o'clock car. Other stationery is printed with the 1 P.M., 2 P.M., 3 P.M., 4 P.M., 5 P.M. to indicate the hours at which the orders are to be shipped. Many small retail merchants delay ordering until the last minute, and the wholesale house which can give the promptest service gets the business. The above plan advises the shipping department the time that the goods are to be delivered, and makes it responsible for results. All delays are noted, and a daily report made of the causes, which are promptly investigated and removed.

The next improvement came from the need of wholesale grocery stores located in cities with an efficient interurban electric car service to fulfill orders at various times throughout the day. One western company recorded all of its orders on cylinder billing machines, providing the shipping clerk with a complete copy of the order, and each department a copy of the items they need to fill. On the shipping clerk's copy, the note 11 A.M. is marked, as well as on all of the department order slips, indicating that the order should be shipped on the 11 o'clock car. Other stationery is printed with 1 P.M., 2 P.M., 3 P.M., 4 P.M., 5 P.M. to show the times when orders should be shipped. Many small retail merchants wait until the last minute to place their orders, and the wholesale house that can provide the quickest service wins the business. This system informs the shipping department when the goods need to be delivered and holds them accountable for the outcomes. Any delays are documented, and a daily report is made of the reasons, which are promptly investigated and resolved.

264Split Orders. Some wholesale drug houses have their stock arranged on different floors, of which their salesmen are fully advised. If the salesman takes an order for goods which are held in stock on four different floors, he sends in the order on four sheets of paper with the items for each floor written on the respective sheets which indicate the respective floors. Different-colored sheets of paper are used for the various floors. This scheme puts more clerical work on the salesmen, but it enables the office to quickly hand each department its part of the order without the delay of transcribing the department slips on the typewriter at the office. In all order schemes where an order is split up and written on several sheets of paper in order that each department may fill the order without delay, the term split orders is used. In all split-order schemes, the number of sheets in which the order has been divided is written on each sheet. For instance, if there are departmental order sheets for three different floors, the figure 3 is marked on each slip. In this way the biller, by counting the number of sheets attached to the complete order, will know that all of the split-order sheets have been returned to the office. Fig. 17 illustrates this system of orders. The three blank sheets at the top are departmental order sheets, and each contains only a part of the whole order. This is accomplished by removing one departmental sheet at a time from the billing machine, but allowing the three top sheets to remain in the machine until the entire order is written.

264Split Orders. Some wholesale drug companies have their inventory spread across different floors, and their salespeople are well-informed about this. When a salesperson takes an order for products stored on four different floors, they submit the order on four separate sheets of paper, listing the items for each floor on the corresponding sheets marked with the respective floors. Different colors of paper are used for each floor. This method adds more paperwork for the salespeople but allows the office to efficiently deliver each department its portion of the order without the need to retype the slips at the office. In all order systems where an order is divided and written on multiple sheets so that each department can fulfill the order promptly, the term split orders is used. In all split-order systems, the number of sheets the order has been divided into is noted on each sheet. For example, if there are departmental order sheets for three different floors, the number 3 is marked on each slip. This way, the biller can count the number of sheets attached to the complete order and confirm that all of the split-order sheets have been returned to the office. Fig. 17 illustrates this order system. The three blank sheets at the top are departmental order sheets, and each contains only a part of the entire order. This is done by removing one departmental sheet at a time from the billing machine while keeping the top three sheets in the machine until the complete order is prepared.

Some firms are willing to make four copies of an order, each copy containing all of the items of an order. Other firms do not wish the employes to know what a customer is buying outside of the goods relating to the department in which the employe is working. Further, sometimes two departments in the same factory are equipped to make the same class of goods, and if each department received a complete copy of the order there might be some confusion and duplication in the filling of the order.

Some companies are willing to create four copies of an order, with each copy including all of the items in the order. Other companies prefer that employees don't know what a customer is buying beyond the items related to the department where the employee is working. Additionally, sometimes two departments within the same factory are set up to produce the same type of goods, and if each department got a complete copy of the order, it could lead to confusion and duplication in fulfilling the order.

Some firms, instead of making split orders, make a summary of the goods to be delivered from each floor, giving each floor several of these summaries in the course of a day. The goods are delivered to the shipping department in large quantities, and are separated by the shipping clerk according to the quantities wanted for each order. Concerns which are using this idea claim that it takes less time for the shipper to separate goods than it does for the order department to make split orders for each individual.

Some companies, instead of placing split orders, compile a summary of the items to be delivered from each floor, providing each floor with several of these summaries throughout the day. The goods are sent to the shipping department in large batches and are sorted by the shipping clerk based on the quantities needed for each order. Businesses that use this method say that it takes less time for the shipper to sort the goods than it does for the order department to create split orders for each individual.

265

Fig. 17. Forms for Split-Order Schemes

Fig. 17. Forms for Split-Order Schemes

266In planning the clerical work in order billing and shipping methods, the volume of business being handled must be taken into consideration. A plan which is necessary with a large business would be considered as red tape in a smaller one. The larger a business grows, the more it is possible to "specialize" the work.

266When planning the clerical work for billing and shipping methods, it's important to consider the volume of business being managed. A plan that is essential for a large business might be seen as unnecessary bureaucracy in a smaller one. As a business expands, it becomes easier to "specialize" the work.

In a very small business, one man could fill all the orders and make out all of the bills. In a little larger business it would be necessary to devote one person's entire time to filling orders, another's to making out the bills. In a business twice as large as the one just mentioned, it would be necessary for one person to devote his entire time to filling the orders from one floor only. In an exceptionally large business, it might be necessary for one person to devote his entire time to filling orders for some particular class of goods on one floor. These examples are given to illustrate the meaning of the word specializing.

In a very small business, one person could handle all the orders and create all the invoices. In a slightly larger business, it would be necessary for one person to fully focus on filling orders, while another handles the invoices. In a business that's twice the size of the previous example, one person would need to spend all their time filling orders from just one floor. In a very large business, it might be necessary for one person to dedicate all their time to filling orders for a specific type of product on one floor. These examples are provided to explain the term specializing.

Simple Order Form. The majority of firms transcribe their customers' orders onto their own order forms from letters or requisitions. The simplest form of order is one containing an original for use of the warehouse or factory, a duplicate to be mailed to the customer as an acknowledgment of the order, and a third copy which is held in the office as a record of unfilled orders. The requisition form illustrated in Fig. 18 conveys the idea.

Simple Order Form. Most companies write down their customers' orders on their own order forms based on letters or requests. The simplest type of order includes an original for the warehouse or factory, a duplicate to be sent to the customer as confirmation of the order, and a third copy kept in the office as a record of unfulfilled orders. The requisition form shown in Fig. 18 illustrates this concept.

The practice of sending an exact copy of the order to the customer eliminates the necessity of acknowledging the order by letter, and gives the customer an opportunity of checking over the order as entered. It is customary to print on acknowledgment of order forms the sentence: This is an exact copy of the order as entered—if any errors are noted kindly advise us at once. One firm in Buffalo saved $300.00 the first week they installed this scheme, through the detection of an error by the customer.

The practice of sending an exact copy of the order to the customer eliminates the need to acknowledge the order with a letter and gives the customer a chance to review the order as entered. It’s common to print on acknowledgment of order forms the sentence: This is an exact copy of the order as entered—if you notice any errors, please let us know right away. One company in Buffalo saved $300.00 in the first week after implementing this system, thanks to a customer spotting an error.

A YACHT STORAGE BASIN AT THE SHIPBUILDING PLANT OF THE GAS ENGINE & POWER CO. AND CHARLES L. SEABURY & CO., CONSOLIDATED.

A YACHT STORAGE BASIN AT THE SHIPBUILDING PLANT OF THE GAS ENGINE & POWER CO. AND CHARLES L. SEABURY & CO., CONSOLIDATED.

267

Fig. 18. Simple Requisition Forms for Order Handling. Remington Typewriter Co.

Fig. 18. Simple Requisition Forms for Order Handling. Remington Typewriter Co.

268It is imperative that before a remedy or short-cut methods can be prescribed, it is necessary to thoroughly diagnose all of the conditions incident to the business. It should also be remembered that clerks and even department heads will see all of the imaginary difficulties of a new idea and overlook all of the benefits to be derived therefrom. It should be further remembered that if a new method shortens nine-tenths of any particular class of work and slightly increases one-tenth, the party involved will many times fail to see the net advantages accruing through the introduction of the new idea. If objections are raised to a suggested short-cut method it is always well to ascertain whether the objections apply to a majority of the work or a portion of it only. Most people in clerical positions rather resent new ideas, and seem to take a pleasure in trying to find some reason why a new idea will not succeed. This is one phase of human nature which requires the utmost tact and diplomacy to handle successfully. In advancing or suggesting new methods, it should be assumed as far as possible, that the idea has been suggested by the person to whom one is talking, for the reason that most people are willing to "father" their own ideas.

268Before recommending any remedies or shortcuts, it's essential to thoroughly understand all the conditions related to the business. It's important to keep in mind that clerks and even department heads often focus on the imaginary issues a new idea might bring while overlooking its potential benefits. Additionally, if a new method saves 90% of a specific type of work but slightly increases the other 10%, those involved may often miss the overall advantages of the new concept. If there are objections to a proposed shortcut, it's useful to determine if those objections apply to most of the work or just a part of it. Many people in clerical roles tend to resist new ideas and often seem to take pleasure in finding reasons why a new idea won't work. This aspect of human nature requires a lot of tact and diplomacy to manage effectively. When proposing or discussing new methods, it's best to assume that the person you’re talking to has already suggested the idea, as most people are more receptive to "owning" their own thoughts.

Simple Order Form with Copy for Shipping Department. The second short cut which was instituted in connection with order forms was the addition of a sheet on which was manifolded a copy of the order for the shipping department.

Simple Order Form with Copy for Shipping Department. The second shortcut that was introduced with the order forms was the addition of a sheet that had multiple copies of the order for the shipping department.

The idea is to give the shipper information in advance, in order that he may prepare his bills of lading and plan his work for his teams, order cars in advance from the railroad, call up express companies, and such other work as might be necessary to the proper shipment and delivery of the goods manufactured and sold, and to file the copy as his permanent record, in some cases.

The goal is to provide the shipper with information ahead of time so they can prepare their bills of lading, organize their teams' work, request cars from the railroad in advance, contact express companies, and handle any other tasks necessary for the proper shipping and delivery of the manufactured and sold goods, while also keeping a copy as a permanent record in some cases.

Some firms desire to prevent the shipper from knowing the prices at which their goods are sold. This is accomplished by using for the shipping department a short sheet of paper which reaches from the left edge of the order-blank to the price column only. Another method is to use a narrow sheet of carbon paper with a full-size sheet of paper. This plan is not as satisfactory as the former one, as the carbon paper sometimes slips to the right and allows the prices to manifold.

Some companies want to keep the shipper from knowing the prices at which their products are sold. They do this by using a short piece of paper for the shipping department that extends from the left edge of the order blank to the price column only. Another method is to use a narrow sheet of carbon paper along with a full-size sheet. However, this approach isn't as effective as the first one because the carbon paper can sometimes shift to the right and let the prices get copied over.

Acknowledgment of Order to Salesman. In some lines of business, it is desirable to add an additional sheet which is termed acknowledgment of order to salesman. This plan enables the salesman to know that the order has been received and properly entered for execution (in manufacturing lines it is necessary to transcribe orders on order forms which contain too many copies for a salesman to manifold by pencil), and gives him the opportunity of checking the 269order as entered. It should be remembered that in some lines of business there is such an enormous amount of detailed information in connection with an order that neither the customer nor a salesman would check over an exact copy of the order as entered. This should always be taken into consideration when considering the addition of this sheet.

Acknowledgment of Order to Salesman. In some industries, it’s useful to include an extra sheet called acknowledgment of order to salesman. This approach allows the salesman to confirm that the order has been received and properly logged for processing (in manufacturing contexts, it’s necessary to write orders on forms that have too many copies for a salesman to replicate by hand), and gives him a chance to verify the 269order as it was recorded. It's important to note that in some industries, there is such a huge amount of detailed information associated with an order that neither the customer nor a salesman would go over an exact duplicate of the order as recorded. This should always be kept in mind when considering whether to add this sheet.

STATIONERY

The various styles of loose-leaf sheets and binders should be fully understood in order to appreciate their importance in order and billing work.

The different types of loose-leaf sheets and binders need to be fully understood to recognize their significance in organization and billing tasks.

Loose-Leaf Sheets. The first loose-leaf sheets were punched with closed holes, as shown in the illustration of Kilby Mfg. Company forms in Fig. 18. The trouble with the closed-hole punching is that, when placed over the metal posts of the binder, it is impossible to remove a sheet in the center of the binder without removing all of the sheets immediately above the one desired.

Loose-Leaf Sheets. The first loose-leaf sheets had closed holes punched in them, as shown in the illustration of Kilby Mfg. Company forms in Fig. 18. The problem with closed-hole punching is that, when you place them over the metal posts of the binder, it's impossible to remove a sheet from the middle of the binder without taking out all the sheets directly above it.

To obviate this difficulty, the slotted hole was devised. This is illustrated in the forms of the Commercial Sash & Door Company, in Fig. 19. The slot from the edge of the paper to the punched hole permits the paper to be placed over the posts of the binder between any two sheets. Holes are punched in both the closed and slotted styles in various sizes, ranging generally from a ¼ to 5/16 of an inch in diameter. In late years, manufacturers have introduced punched holes of different shapes from that of a circle.

To solve this issue, the slotted hole was created. This is shown in the examples from the Commercial Sash & Door Company in Fig. 19. The slot from the edge of the paper to the punched hole allows the paper to be placed over the binder posts between any two sheets. Holes are punched in both the closed and slotted styles in various sizes, typically ranging from ¼ to 5/16 of an inch in diameter. In recent years, manufacturers have begun to introduce punched holes in shapes other than a circle.

For permanent records where the sheets are filed serially according to page number, order number, etc., the closed-hole loose-leaf sheet is perfectly satisfactory. For records which are to be removed from any given part of the binder and reinserted in another part, the slotted-hole loose-leaf sheet is the most satisfactory style to use.

For permanent records where the sheets are filed in order by page number, order number, etc., the closed-hole loose-leaf sheet works just fine. For records that need to be taken out of one section of the binder and placed back in another, the slotted-hole loose-leaf sheet is the best style to use.

Binders. Binders are generally made of two covers and a set of posts, which ordinarily are attached to one of the covers. The other cover is movable in order to accommodate the increased thickness of the binder as loose-leaf sheets are added. Great strides have been made in the manufacture of improved binders. There are so many styles of posts and other ingenious arrangements, where the two covers are held together and closed or opened by the use of a key, that only reference to catalogs of manufacturers will supply detailed information.

Binders. Binders are usually made up of two covers and a set of posts, which are typically attached to one of the covers. The other cover can move to make room for the added thickness as loose-leaf sheets are included. Significant advancements have been made in creating better binders. There are numerous styles of posts and various clever designs where the two covers are held together and can be opened or closed using a key, so for detailed information, it's best to check the catalogs from manufacturers.

270

Fig. 19. Two Styles of Punching for Loose-Leaf Sheets. Remington Typewriter Co.

Fig. 19. Two Styles of Punching for Loose-Leaf Sheets. Remington Typewriter Co.

271In buying binders and loose-leaf sheets, it is well to buy both of the same firm. Heretofore, trouble has been experienced where the punched holes of the loose-leaf sheets were probably 1/64 inch further apart or closer together than the metal posts in the binder in which they were to be used. The manufacturer of the binders will always claim that the sheets were punched incorrectly by the printer, and vice versâ.

271When buying binders and loose-leaf sheets, it's best to get both from the same brand. In the past, problems have occurred when the holes in the loose-leaf sheets were either 1/64 inch too far apart or too close together compared to the metal posts in the binder they were meant for. The binder manufacturer will always insist that the sheets were punched incorrectly by the printer, and vice versa.

It is pretty generally understood now that all punched holes should be placed with the center of the hole ½ in. from the edge of the paper. This allows enough margin to permit of the paper being held firmly over the posts. In all cases where the holes are punched too near the edge of the paper, the narrow margin between the edge of the paper and the hole becomes torn very quickly.

It’s pretty much understood now that all punched holes should be placed with the center of the hole ½ inch from the edge of the paper. This provides enough margin to let the paper be held securely over the posts. In cases where the holes are punched too close to the edge, the narrow margin between the edge of the paper and the hole tends to tear very quickly.

Stationery Printed for Typewritten Work. Very few people recognize the great value of properly designed stationery for typewritten work. The law of usage and custom is so strong that invariably invoices and order forms are printed the same as if they were to be hand-written. The headings are printed with the first letter of each word lined up vertically. This plan causes great waste of time on the part of an operator.

Stationery Printed for Typewritten Work. Very few people understand the significant value of well-designed stationery for typewritten documents. The conventions and habits are so ingrained that invoices and order forms are almost always printed as if they are meant to be handwritten. The headings are printed with the first letter of each word aligned vertically. This method leads to a considerable waste of time for the operator.

All billing and order work should be done on machines equipped either with a column stop or a decimal tabulator. A column stop is a device on a writing machine which automatically stops the carriage at any one of several predetermined points. A decimal tabulator is a device on a writing machine which automatically stops the carriage at the units, tens, hundreds, etc. place in any predetermined column.

All billing and order tasks should be done on machines with either a column stop or a decimal tabulator. A column stop is a feature on a typewriter that automatically halts the carriage at specific preset points. A decimal tabulator is a feature on a typewriter that automatically stops the carriage at the units, tens, hundreds, etc., in any preset column.

It should also be understood that all typewriters and billing machines are equipped with marginal stops. These stops are adjustable, and can be arranged on either side of the machine in such a manner that the carriage will always stop at any given point at either edge of the paper.

It should also be understood that all typewriters and billing machines come with marginal stops. These stops are adjustable and can be set up on either side of the machine so that the carriage always stops at any specific point at either edge of the paper.

It is vitally important that either a column stop or a decimal tabulator should be used in connection with marginal stops on writing machines, and these three points should be taken into consideration when designing stationery for use with a machine. The following illustrations show poorly designed and correct invoice headings.

It’s really important to use either a column stop or a decimal tab when working with marginal stops on typewriters, and these three points should be kept in mind when designing stationery for a machine. The following illustrations demonstrate poorly designed and properly designed invoice headings.

272
J. B. WILLIAMS & BRO.
NASSAU, N. Y.
 
NAME SALESMAN
SHIPPING ADDRESS ORDER NUMBER
P. O. ADDRESS REQUISITION NUMBER
VIA  

This blank form has purposely been shown in order to contrast it with an invoice printed in the same way with the headings properly filled in.

This blank form has been deliberately presented to contrast it with an invoice printed in the same format with the headings correctly filled in.

J. B. WILLIAMS & BRO.
NASSAU, N. Y.
 
NAME, Geo. Brown & Co. SALESMAN, Jenkins
SHIPPING ADDRESS, Flat Rock, W. Va. ORDER NUMBER 2246
P. O. ADDRESS, Wenonah, W. Va. REQUISITION NUMBER A341
VIA N. & W. R. R. Co. OUR ORDER NUMBER 9422

Contrast this heading with that of an invoice which has the last letters of each line lined up vertically. This makes it possible for the operator of the billing machine to draw the carriage to the extreme right, as the first letter to be written in every line of the heading starts at the same point.

Contrast this heading with that of an invoice where the last letters of each line are lined up vertically. This allows the billing machine operator to move the carriage all the way to the right since the first letter to be written in each line of the heading starts at the same point.

NAME Geo. Brown & Co. SALESMAN Jenkins
SHIPPING ADDRESS Flat Rock, W. Va. ORDER NUMBER 2246
P. O. ADDRESS Wenonah, W. Va. REQUISITION NUMBER A341
VIA N. & W. R. R. Co. OUR ORDER NUMBER 9422

The latter form does not have as good appearance before being typewritten as afterwards. However the change is made for the sake of utility and speed. In the first form it is necessary for the operator to position the carriage at a different starting point for each line, whereas in the last illustration it can be readily seen that all the operator has to do is to draw the carriage to the right to the marginal stop, and write without any loss of time.

The latter form doesn't look as good before being typed as it does afterward. However, the change is made for the sake of convenience and speed. In the first form, the operator has to position the carriage at a different starting point for each line. In the last illustration, it's clear that all the operator needs to do is move the carriage to the right until it hits the margin and write without wasting any time.

At one time a speed contest between pen billers and machine billers was held on one of the large railroads of this country, and permission was given the machine people to change the position of the headings of the freight bills. The salesman in charge of the test studied to eliminate certain wasted movements of the typewriter carriage. He succeeded in arranging the printed matter on the bill in a manner which permitted of three starting points in the heading and body of the bill. By pressing his tabulator stop after writing 273a name or figure, the machine would immediately jump to the next printing point on the line. This arrangement greatly facilitated the work, and enabled him to prove the superiority of machine over pen work. If he had endeavored to use the old stationery with its irregular headings, he would have made a failure of the test.

At one point, there was a speed competition between handwriters and machine operators on one of the major railroads in this country. The machine operators were allowed to change the layout of the freight bill headings. The salesman overseeing the test focused on eliminating unnecessary movements of the typewriter carriage. He managed to position the printed information on the bill in a way that allowed for three starting points in both the heading and the body of the bill. By pressing his tab stop after typing a name or number, the machine would immediately move to the next printing point on the line. This setup made the work much easier and helped him demonstrate that machines were superior to hand writing. If he had tried to use the old stationery with its uneven headings, he would have failed the test.

Designing Stationery. In designing invoices, order forms, and statistical forms, it should be always borne in mind that the ordinary typewriter or billing machine spaces ten letters to the inch, sometimes twelve spaces to the inch with elite type, and sometimes eight spaces to the inch with large Roman type. Therefore, all vertical lines separating various columns of the form should be ruled in multiples of tenths, twelfths, or eighths of inches, according to the spacing (escapement) of the machine to be used. The different styles of type are shown in Fig. 20.

Designing Stationery. When creating invoices, order forms, and statistical forms, it's important to remember that a standard typewriter or billing machine uses ten characters per inch, sometimes twelve with elite type, and occasionally eight with large Roman type. As a result, all vertical lines separating different columns of the form should be marked in increments of tenths, twelfths, or eighths of an inch, depending on the spacing of the machine being used. The various type styles are illustrated in Fig. 20.

In estimating the distance between lines, it should be borne in mind that all typewriters and billing machines are arranged for spacing one line, two lines, and three lines. By adjusting the spacing device, the paper can be advanced the width of one, two, or three lines. All headings on the invoice should be arranged so that the next writing point below, on the invoice or order, will be one, two, or three spaces, and the beginning of the body of the bill should be arranged for in the same manner. This prevents any waste of time, and eliminates the necessity of throwing off the ratchet spacing device of the machine and turning the carriage by hand.

When calculating the distance between lines, remember that all typewriters and billing machines are set up to space one line, two lines, or three lines. By adjusting the spacing mechanism, the paper can be moved down by the width of one, two, or three lines. All headings on the invoice should be positioned so that the next line of text below, whether on the invoice or order, will have a spacing of one, two, or three lines, and the start of the main body of the bill should be set up in the same way. This saves time and eliminates the need to disengage the ratchet spacing device of the machine and manually move the carriage.

The first printing point on an order or billing form should be placed in such a manner that the marginal stop of the typewriter carriage, instead of a tabulator stop, will be available for use. The second writing point on the form should be the first column stop (the column finder on the billing machine is the device which automatically stops the carriage at certain given points). The third writing point on the line should be the second column stop, or decimal tabulator stop, according to the one which is on the machine.

The first printing point on an order or billing form should be positioned so that the marginal stop of the typewriter carriage, rather than a tabulator stop, can be used. The second writing point on the form should be the first column stop (the column finder on the billing machine is the tool that automatically stops the carriage at specific points). The third writing point on the line should be the second column stop, or decimal tabulator stop, depending on which one is available on the machine.

In Fig. 21 is shown an illustration showing the top sheets of an order form designed to facilitate the work of the billing machine. In addition to having all of the printed headings aligned vertically on the last letter of each word, each line is either one space or two spaces of the billing machine platen (rubber roll). This eliminates any waste of time in spacing the order form through the machine.

In Fig. 21, there’s an illustration of the top sheets of an order form designed to make it easier for the billing machine to work. Besides having all the printed headings lined up vertically with the last letter of each word, each line is either one or two spaces of the billing machine platen (rubber roll). This cuts down on any wasted time when feeding the order form through the machine.

274

Fig. 20. Styles of Typewriter and Billing Machine Type

Fig. 20. Styles of Typewriter and Billing Machine Type

275The last sheet of the form of the McCaskey Register Co. is cardboard, with the numbers 1 to 31 printed along the top. A movable metal "spud," or tip, is used to show the due dates of each invoice, and to enable the collection clerks to quickly find the desired copies of charges for the purpose of sending out statements from three to five days ahead of due dates.

275The final sheet of the McCaskey Register Co. form is made of cardboard, with the numbers 1 to 31 printed across the top. A movable metal "spud" or tip is used to indicate the due dates of each invoice and helps the collection clerks quickly locate the necessary copies of charges to send out statements three to five days before the due dates.

Styles of Type. The size and style of type is a very important factor in all classes of work where legible manifolding results are wanted. There are several classes of type used in connection with billing machines. Different companies use different names in describing them. The four sizes of type used are as follows:

Styles of Type. The size and style of type are really important in any work where clear printed results are needed. There are several types of type used with billing machines, and different companies use different names for them. The four sizes of type used are as follows:

  • ELITE
  • PICA
  • Medium Roman
  • LARGE (or full) ROMAN

Elite. This style has come into general use in connection with correspondence. It gives a dignified style to a letter. It is the hardest type to keep clean—the most destructive to the rubber roll and typewriter ribbon of any type made. It also manifolds very poorly where a number of copies are used, as the type is so small that the sixth or seventh copy, and many times the third and fourth, are so blurred that it is impossible to tell an e from an a or an o.

Elite. This style is commonly used for correspondence. It gives a letter a dignified appearance. However, it's the hardest type to keep clean and the most damaging to rubber rolls and typewriter ribbons of any kind. It also reproduces poorly when making multiple copies, as the text is so small that the sixth or seventh copy, and often the third and fourth, become so blurred that it's impossible to distinguish between an e, an a, or an o.

This style of type is sometimes used for making up tabulated statements where it is desired to crowd a large number of figures to the inch.

This type of font is sometimes used for creating tables where there's a need to fit a lot of numbers in a small space.

Pica. This is the most generally used type of any. It manifolds quite well up to six and seven copies. It is possible to write only ten figures of this size to the inch.

Pica. This is the most commonly used type of any. It reproduces quite well up to six and seven copies. It's possible to print only ten characters of this size per inch.

Medium Roman. This is the next larger size type than the pica and, on account of it being larger, it gives better manifolding results. It also writes ten letters to an inch.

Medium Roman. This is the next larger type size after pica, and because it's larger, it provides better printing results. It also fits ten letters per inch.

Large Roman. This is the size type which is used by railroad and steamship companies for typewriting their way-bills. It is possible to write only eight letters to an inch.

Large Roman. This is the font size used by railroad and steamship companies for typing their way-bills. You can fit only eight letters to an inch.

276

Fig. 21. Forms Showing Properly Designed Stationery

Fig. 21. Examples of Well-Designed Stationery

277Gothic Type. The term Gothic indicates the style, and not the size of the type. If the small points at the top and bottom of the Roman type were removed (these points are called serifs) the effect would be that of Gothic type. A very pleasing combination on a billing machine is two different sizes of Gothic type, the larger size to be used for capital letters, the smaller size for the small (or lower case) letters. Recent practice has demonstrated the value of using capital Gothic letters of one size, as it increases the legibility of an order or an invoice.

277Gothic Type. The term Gothic refers to the style, not the size of the type. If you remove the small points at the top and bottom of the Roman type (these points are called serifs), the result would be similar to Gothic type. A very effective combination on a billing machine is using two different sizes of Gothic type, with the larger size for capital letters and the smaller size for lowercase letters. Recent practice has shown that using capital Gothic letters of the same size improves the readability of an order or invoice.

In manifolding, numerals should always be of the "open" kind, that is, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0, and not 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0, as the former are much the more legible.

In manifolding, numbers should always be the "open" type, that is, 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0, and not 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0, since the former are much more readable.

Carbon Paper. There is no article which is so generally misused in the commercial world and which is so little understood as carbon paper. In order that the correct usage may be clearly understood a brief description of its manufacture is given.

Carbon Paper. There is no item that is so commonly misused in the business world and so poorly understood as carbon paper. To clarify the correct usage, a brief description of how it’s made is provided.

The chief ingredients of carbon paper are oil, wax, paper, and color. Oils and waxes are used to give wearing surface, elasticity, and body to the color mixture. Tissue paper—generally of imported quality—with a fine, strong fiber is used. The quality must be first class in order to insure absence of holes and other imperfections in the sheets. Generally the sheets are cut 20 x 30 inches. A ream is regarded as containing 500 sheets. Three weights of paper are used, 4lb., 7lb., 10lb., respectively, meaning that 500 sheets of the above size of paper will weigh the number of pounds named, according to the thickness of the paper.

The main ingredients of carbon paper are oil, wax, paper, and color. Oils and waxes are used to provide a durable surface, flexibility, and density to the color mixture. Tissue paper—usually of imported quality—with fine, strong fibers is used. The quality must be top-notch to ensure there are no holes or other defects in the sheets. Typically, the sheets are cut to 20 x 30 inches. A ream is considered to contain 500 sheets. Three weights of paper are used: 4lb., 7lb., and 10lb., which means that 500 sheets of the specified size will weigh the corresponding number of pounds, depending on the thickness of the paper.

Color. The only really indelible color is black; that is because carbon is the basis of the color. The colors which are used are powders which have been ground as fine as possible. They are mixed in proper proportions with oils and waxes. Formerly the mixture was applied by hand, but great strides have been made in machinery for automatically applying the color evenly to the paper. It is important that the color or pigment be applied evenly to the paper and that it penetrates the fiber. Unless the paper retains the pigment, the carbon paper will not wear properly. The longer the color adheres to the paper, the longer it can be used.

Color. The only truly permanent color is black; that's because carbon is the foundation of that color. The colors used are powders that have been ground as finely as possible. They are mixed in the right amounts with oils and waxes. In the past, this mixture was applied by hand, but significant advances have been made in machinery that automatically applies the color evenly to the paper. It's crucial for the color or pigment to be applied evenly to the paper and to penetrate the fibers. If the paper doesn't hold the pigment, the carbon paper won't perform well. The longer the color sticks to the paper, the longer it can be used.

Finish. The finish of carbon paper is the factor which is so little understood by the public. Carbon papers are finished with soft, medium, and hard finishes. The first will hardly rub off on the hand under pressure, the next will rub some, and the soft finish will smudge if pressed against the hand. Each finish is intended for 278a definite use, which will be explained later. The manifolding power of carbon paper depends absolutely on the typewriter itself, the hardness of the rubber roll, the touch of the operator, and the weight of paper, and lastly, the finish of coating on the paper. Two operators on the same typewriter can secure totally different results because one will have light, and the other heavy, touch. The regular rubber rolls which are furnished with typewriters are medium hard—in six months or a year they gradually grow harder, eventually becoming as hard as slate. If a typewriter is to be used for regular work as well as heavy manifolding, it should have two different rolls, one for each kind of work. There is no reason for using a medium hard rubber roll on the machine, getting poor results, and then blaming the carbon paper. Use a hard rubber roll on the machine and there will be no difficulty. Some makes of machines have interchangeable rolls (known as platens) which are very useful. It is the work of a minute only, to remove one and place the other on the machine.

Finish. The finish of carbon paper is something the public doesn't understand well. Carbon papers come with soft, medium, and hard finishes. The soft finish barely leaves a mark on your hand when pressed, the medium will leave some residue, and the soft finish will smudge if it presses against your hand. Each finish is meant for a specific use, which will be explained later. The ability of carbon paper to create copies depends entirely on the typewriter, the hardness of the rubber roll, the operator's touch, the weight of paper, and finally, the finish of the coating on the paper. Two operators using the same typewriter can achieve completely different results because one may have a light touch while the other has a heavy touch. The standard rubber rolls provided with typewriters are medium hard; over six months to a year, they gradually become harder, eventually reaching slate hardness. If a typewriter is used for regular work as well as heavy copying, it should have two different rolls, one for each job. There's no point in using a medium hard rubber roll and getting poor results, then blaming the carbon paper. Use a hard rubber roll, and there will be no issues. Some types of machines have interchangeable rolls (known as platens), which are very convenient. It only takes a minute to remove one and put another on the machine.

Four-Pound Paper. This class of carbon paper has a heavy, sensitive coating, and is intended for heavy manifolding—for making from five to twenty copies. Soft-finish carbon papers are always used where heavy manifolding is to be done. The finish of the paper which is being written upon is also a factor. Papers with a hard finish—that is, a shiny surface—do not allow the color of the carbon paper to take hold, and yet a paper with the soft finish will allow the color to spread, and make a poor copy. This class of paper is also used for making a few copies on very light-stroke machines like the Hammond.

Four-Pound Paper. This type of carbon paper has a thick, sensitive coating and is designed for heavy use, producing between five to twenty copies. Soft-finish carbon papers are always used when a lot of copies need to be made. The finish of the paper being written on also matters. Papers with a hard finish—a shiny surface—don’t let the color from the carbon paper adhere well, while papers with a soft finish allow the color to spread too much, resulting in poor copies. This type of paper is also used for making a few copies on light-stroke machines like the Hammond.

Seven-Pound Paper. This weight of paper is adapted for making from one to five copies. Being heavier than the four-pound, it will wear longer. If coated heavily it will give more impressions than if lightly coated, but the impressions will not be as clear and clean.

Seven-Pound Paper. This weight of paper is suitable for creating one to five copies. Since it's heavier than the four-pound option, it lasts longer. If it's heavily coated, it will produce more impressions than if it's lightly coated, but the impressions won't be as clear and crisp.

Ten-Pound Paper. This weight of paper is intended for use where one or two copies are wanted. Its weight enables it to stand the hard usage to which it is put. On one or two copies, the additional weight or thickness of the carbon paper does not affect the imprint. This class of paper is used with billing machines of all kinds.

Ten-Pound Paper. This type of paper is designed for situations where one or two copies are needed. Its weight allows it to withstand the rough handling it may experience. When making one or two copies, the extra weight or thickness of the carbon paper doesn't impact the imprint. This kind of paper is used with billing machines of all types.

279Full Carbon Papers. This is a paper which is coated on both sides for making a multiplicity of copies on tissue. The pieces of carbon paper are placed between every other piece of tissue paper and manifold on the top of one sheet and the bottom of the next. This carbon paper is used to reduce the bulk of paper in the typewriter—one-half as much carbon paper being required. It is sometimes called double carbon paper, and is mostly used by railroads in making up way bills on yellow (dandelion grade) tissue paper.

279Full Carbon Papers. This is a type of paper coated on both sides to create multiple copies on tissue. The pieces of carbon paper are placed between every other piece of tissue paper, with one sheet on top and the next on the bottom. This carbon paper helps to reduce the amount of paper needed in the typewriter—requiring half as much carbon paper. It’s sometimes called double carbon paper and is primarily used by railroads for creating way bills on yellow (dandelion grade) tissue paper.

Copy Carbon Papers. This paper is for use where it is necessary or desirable to make a carbon copy from which to make a letter-press copy. Hektograph carbons are for making carbon copies to be used in a hektograph.

Copy Carbon Papers. This paper is used when it's necessary or preferred to create a carbon copy intended for making a letterpress copy. Hektograph carbons are for producing carbon copies that can be used in a hektograph.

Pencil Carbons. This class of carbon paper is made in the heavy grades of paper from seven-pound to twenty-pound and is made full carbon in the seven-pound weight.

Pencil Carbons. This type of carbon paper is produced in heavy grades ranging from seven pounds to twenty pounds, and it is made entirely of carbon in the seven-pound version.

Pen Carbon. This class of carbon paper is made in the seven-pound and ten-pound weights.

Pen Carbon. This type of carbon paper comes in seven-pound and ten-pound weights.

Troubles and Remedies. Carbon papers made in summer have different treatment in the matter of color mixture than those made in winter. Users should always remember that carbon paper which has lain unused all year has gradually dried out and depreciated in efficiency. The fresher a carbon paper the better—therefore it is not economy to buy too large a supply if it is liable to stand for more than six months. Never store carbon paper near heat, nor in the direct rays of the sun.

Troubles and Remedies. Carbon papers made in the summer are treated differently in terms of color mixing than those made in the winter. Users should always keep in mind that carbon paper that has been unused for a year has dried out over time and lost its effectiveness. The fresher the carbon paper, the better—so it's not cost-effective to buy a huge supply if it’s likely to sit unused for more than six months. Never store carbon paper near heat or in direct sunlight.

The one great difficulty experienced with carbon paper is the streaked effect called "treeing." This is caused by the carbon paper being inserted unevenly between the sheets of paper used with it. Once wrinkled, it remains so, and gives the streaked result as long as it lasts. To guard against this trouble, the operator should watch that the carbon paper is not wrinkled when inserting it between the sheets of paper, and should press the release lever on the typewriter to release the paper-feed rolls on the machine, after the paper is inserted in it, so that the unequal tension of the paper and carbon paper may adjust itself.

The main problem with carbon paper is the streaked effect known as "treeing." This happens when the carbon paper is not placed evenly between the sheets of paper it's being used with. Once it gets wrinkled, it stays that way and produces streaks for as long as it’s in use. To avoid this issue, the operator should ensure that the carbon paper is smooth when inserting it between the sheets and should press the release lever on the typewriter to free the paper-feed rollers after inserting the paper. This allows the uneven tension between the paper and carbon paper to adjust properly.

Durability of Color. Black paper made of carbon pigment is indelible and most durable. Blue or purple papers are next in the order of durability of color, and are made of aniline dyes. Green 280next, and red next. The fact is that red and green carbon papers should not be used for permanent records, as they will fade quickly.

Durability of Color. Black paper made from carbon pigment is permanent and very durable. Blue or purple papers follow in terms of color durability and are made from aniline dyes. Green comes next, and red follows after that. In fact, red and green carbon papers shouldn't be used for permanent records because they fade quickly.

Wearing Quality of Paper. Many times a typewriter will have a rubber roll (platen) which has become pitted and worn from age and the use of periods, commas, hyphens, and ditto marks. This is very destructive to carbon paper. New rubber rolls should be placed on the machine. It is not economy to use the cheap variety which can be purchased for 75 cents and which is nothing more than rubber hose drawn over a wooden core. The latter is not cylindrical and will give trouble. The type will print unevenly and cause bad alignment, for which the machine will be blamed.

Wearing Quality of Paper. Often, a typewriter will have a rubber roll (platen) that has become damaged and worn out over time due to the use of periods, commas, hyphens, and ditto marks. This is very harmful to carbon paper. New rubber rolls should be installed on the machine. It's not cost-effective to use the cheap kind that can be bought for 75 cents, which is basically just rubber hose over a wooden core. The latter isn't cylindrical and will cause issues. The type will print unevenly and lead to misalignment, which will be blamed on the machine.

Blinds. Blind is the name given to a sheet of paper used in connection with manifold work for preventing all of the information on the top sheets from being manifolded on certain of the sheets underneath.

Blinds. Blind refers to a sheet of paper used in manifold work to stop all the information on the top sheets from being transferred to specific sheets underneath.

For instance, in describing the scheme for providing the packing department with a description of the goods to be shipped, but with the quantity column blank, it will be remembered how a strip of paper of proper size wide enough to cover the quantity column was placed over the left side of the invoice from top to bottom. Therefore all quantities, instead of manifolding onto the packer's sheet, manifolded onto the strip of paper known as the blind.

For example, when explaining the method for supplying the packing department with a description of the goods to be shipped, but leaving the quantity column empty, it should be noted how a strip of paper wide enough to cover the quantity column was placed over the left side of the invoice from top to bottom. As a result, all quantities, instead of being transferred onto the packer's sheet, were recorded on the strip of paper known as the blind.

A blind may be of any given shape, and cut away at the top, side, or bottom; or, in some cases, irregular-shaped cuts are made in the middle of the sheet or near the edges. The cuts are made in order to allow certain information to be manifolded on the next sheet under the blind. The balance of the information on the top sheet is manifolded onto the blind, which is thrown away. It is reasoned that it is cheaper to use a sheet of paper for this purpose than it is to stop and make a separate sheet with part of the information only, typewritten thereon.

A blind can be any shape and can be cut at the top, side, or bottom; or sometimes, there are irregular cuts made in the middle of the sheet or near the edges. The cuts are made to allow certain information to be duplicated on the next sheet under the blind. The rest of the information on the top sheet is copied onto the blind, which is then discarded. It's believed that it's cheaper to use a sheet of paper for this purpose than to pause and create a separate sheet with just part of the information typed on it.

HOW TO HANDLE ORDERS AND BILLS ON BILLING MACHINES

Loose-Leaf Sheets with Invoices in Blanket Form. In some lines of business it is possible to use invoices of equal size. Some firms therefore have the invoices and sales sheets of equal size. The 281top sheet is perforated horizontally at equal distances, which permits the invoices to be torn apart so that one blanket of form invoices may be separated into three or four separate invoices. This plan can be used where the work is done on an ordinary letter-writing machine. In preparing the papers for billing, a sheet of carbon equal in size to the sales sheet is used. A heavy-weight carbon (10lb.) with hard finish is the best kind of carbon to use for this work. If an extra sales sheet is needed for any purpose, a duplicate sheet of paper, preferably of another color, can be used with another sheet of carbon interleaved between the two sales sheets. This method is wasteful of space as far as the sales sheet is concerned. If each invoice were loose and placed in the machine in such a manner that the first written line on the invoice would be two or three spaces only below the last item of the previous invoice manifolded on the sales sheet, generally one more invoice of average size could be manifolded onto the sales sheet.

Loose-Leaf Sheets with Invoices in Blanket Form. In some types of businesses, it's possible to use invoices that are all the same size. Because of this, some companies create invoices and sales sheets that are the same size. The 281top sheet is perforated horizontally at regular intervals, allowing the invoices to be torn apart so that one batch of form invoices can be split into three or four separate invoices. This approach works well when using a standard typewriter. To prepare the billing documents, a sheet of carbon that matches the size of the sales sheet is used. A heavy-weight carbon (10lb.) with a smooth finish is the best option for this job. If an extra sales sheet is required for any reason, a duplicate sheet of paper, ideally in a different color, can be used with another sheet of carbon placed between the two sales sheets. This method wastes space concerning the sales sheet. If each invoice were loose and positioned in the machine so that the first written line on the invoice is just two or three spaces below the last item of the previous invoice grouped on the sales sheet, generally one more average-sized invoice could be included on the sales sheet.

Loose-Leaf Sales Sheet with Separate Invoices. This combination is made possible by the billing machine, the flat-bed and the cylinder style. Cylinder billing machines are equipped with special carriages having special feed rolls which hold the sales sheet until it is fed entirely through the machine. Cylinder machines also have an independent feed roll which can be released by a special lever. This permits an invoice to be inserted in the machine, and then clamped into position by the intermediate feed roll and fed through the machine with the sales sheet until the invoice is completed. The intermediate feed roll is then released, and the invoice removed without disturbing the sales sheet. The next invoice is then placed in position, and the same operation is repeated. This allows one invoice to be manifolded very nearly under the previous invoice. Some firms having invoices of one or two items only, which permits of from seven to nine invoices being manifolded on each page, have the invoices made up in blanket form; that is, seven or eight invoices to a strip. After each invoice is manifolded they advance the next invoice into position and then tear the invoices apart as previously described.

Loose-Leaf Sales Sheet with Separate Invoices. This combo is made possible by the billing machine, both flat-bed and cylinder styles. Cylinder billing machines come with special carriages and feed rolls that hold the sales sheet until it’s fully processed through the machine. They also have a separate feed roll that can be released by a lever. This lets you insert an invoice into the machine, which is then held in place by the intermediate feed roll and fed through the machine alongside the sales sheet until the invoice is finished. After that, the intermediate feed roll is released, allowing the invoice to be removed without affecting the sales sheet. The next invoice can then be set up, and the same process is repeated. This setup allows one invoice to be printed almost directly under the previous one. Some companies that only have invoices with one or two items can fit from seven to nine invoices on each page and often use blanket forms, meaning seven or eight invoices are printed on a single strip. After each invoice is printed, they move the next invoice into position and then tear them apart as described earlier.

Carbon Paper Cut for this Class of Work. Some operators doing condensed billing work prefer to use carbon paper the same size as the invoice, and to remove the carbon paper each time an invoice 282is completed. This necessitates a great deal of handling of carbon paper. It is preferable to use a large sheet of carbon paper the same size as the sales sheet, feeding it through the billing machine with the sales sheets. This eliminates the necessity of picking up a piece of carbon paper each time an invoice is placed in the machine. With the former method, if one had four invoices to one page of a sales sheet, it required one to pick up the same piece of carbon paper four times, or once with each invoice. The latter plan necessitates handling the carbon paper once only, when the sales sheet is placed in the machine. The operator positions the second or third invoice on a sales sheet, in order to avoid writing over the previous invoice, by spacing the carriage three times after an invoice is completed.

Carbon Paper Cut for this Class of Work. Some operators doing condensed billing work prefer to use carbon paper that matches the size of the invoice and remove the carbon paper each time an invoice is completed. This requires a lot of handling of carbon paper. It's better to use a large sheet of carbon paper the same size as the sales sheet, feeding it through the billing machine along with the sales sheets. This way, you don't have to pick up a piece of carbon paper every time an invoice goes into the machine. With the first method, if you had four invoices per page of a sales sheet, you'd need to pick up the same piece of carbon paper four times, once for each invoice. The second approach means you only handle the carbon paper once when inserting the sales sheet into the machine. The operator lays the second or third invoice on a sales sheet to avoid writing over the previous invoice, spacing the carriage three times after an invoice is completed.

Using the Sheets Serially. All sales sheets should be serially numbered, in order that when placed in a binder the loss of any sheet may be detected by a missing number. Some firms prefer to use one side of a sales sheet only. In this case, a sales binder holding 375 sheets would have 375 pages. Where the sheets are numbered on both sides, the sales binder would have 750 pages. If the appearance of a page is marred by an invoice being spoiled, that sheet is not thrown away, and the fact that it is not is an incentive for the operator to do good work.

Using the Sheets Serially. All sales sheets should be numbered in sequence so that if any sheet goes missing from a binder, it can be easily identified by the missing number. Some companies prefer to use only one side of a sales sheet. In this case, a sales binder with 375 sheets would contain 375 pages. If the sheets are numbered on both sides, the sales binder would have 750 pages. If a page is damaged due to a spoiled invoice, that sheet isn’t discarded, which encourages the operator to maintain quality work.

Handling Credit Memoranda. Some firms prefer to handle their credit memoranda on different-colored paper (generally pink) for both invoices and the large sheets which correspond to sales sheets. All of the rules which govern the making of invoices and loose-leaf sales sheets apply to the execution of credit memoranda.

Handling Credit Memoranda. Some companies like to use different-colored paper (usually pink) for their credit memoranda, both for invoices and the large sheets that match the sales sheets. All the rules that apply to creating invoices and loose-leaf sales sheets also apply to making credit memoranda.

General Remarks Regarding Billing Machines. The flat-bed billing machine enlarged somewhat upon the idea of using special characters for certain abbreviations peculiar to various lines of trade. For instance, in the shoe business, the following abbreviations are some of those used:

General Remarks Regarding Billing Machines. The flat-bed billing machine expanded on the concept of using specific characters for certain abbreviations unique to different industries. For example, in the shoe business, some of the abbreviations used are:

WOM means Women's
CHI " Child's
BOYS' " Boys'
BAL " Balmorals
BLU " Bluchers
PR " Pair
PRS " Pairs
DOZ " Dozens

283The cylinder machines have adopted the same plan. In the cylinder machines there are two distinct classes—those having two type to a type-bar, such as the Remington and the Underwood, and those having one type to a type-bar, with double the number of bars, such as the Smith-Premier. Both classes of machines can use special characters, but the machines having one type only to a bar have a preference in that they have more room in which to place special characters.

283The cylinder machines follow a similar design. In these machines, there are two main types—those with two types per type-bar, like the Remington and the Underwood, and those with one type per type-bar, which have double the number of bars, like the Smith-Premier. Both types can utilize special characters, but the machines with only one type per bar have an advantage because they have more space to accommodate special characters.

There is considerable saving in the use of special characters, as evidenced by the following example:

There is a significant saving in using special characters, as shown by the following example:

OCT 14 09.

Oct 14, 2009.

This necessitates nine strokes where each letter is written separately. Had this been written by three special characters, it would have necessitated five strokes only. The special characters would be used as follows: OCT.-space-14-space-09.

This requires nine strokes since each letter is written individually. If it had been written using three special characters, it would only need five strokes. The special characters would be used like this: OCT.-space-14-space-09.

To the uninitiated, it would seem that a special character of three letters, such as the abbreviation OCT., would occupy three spaces on the machine, and consequently would overlap on the word at the right. This is obviated by placing the type on the type-bar in such a manner that the letter T of the abbreviation is in the printing point of the paper. The following illustration will show how the type are placed or aligned in order to secure the desired results:

To someone who doesn't know much about it, it might look like a three-letter abbreviation, like OCT., would take up three spaces on the machine and overlap with the word to the right. This is avoided by positioning the type on the type-bar so that the letter T of the abbreviation is aligned with the printing point on the paper. The following illustration will show how the types are placed or aligned to achieve the desired results:

OCT 14 09

As the month always precedes the next word, the abbreviation OCT is aligned so that the two first letters are to the left of the printing point. In case a machine were equipped with numbers for all the days of the month, the character 14 would be aligned to print either side of the printing point. As the abbreviation 09 would always follow and never precede, it would be aligned with the 0 in the printing point, with the 9 printing to the right of it. It is very important to have special characters properly aligned so that the abbreviations which always precede are aligned to print on the last letter, and the abbreviations which follow are aligned to print on the first letter.

As the month always comes before the next word, the abbreviation OCT is positioned so that the first two letters are to the left of the printing point. If a machine had numbers for all the days of the month, the character 14 would be aligned to print on either side of the printing point. Since the abbreviation 09 would always come after and never before, it would be aligned with the 0 at the printing point, with the 9 printing to its right. It’s crucial to have special characters properly aligned so that the abbreviations which always precede are aligned to print at the last letter, and the abbreviations which follow are aligned to print at the first letter.

It is impossible to print abbreviations in solid matter such as a letter. They are only to be used in connection with dates of invoices 284or orders, in connection with names of firms. For instance, the abbreviation Messrs., at the beginning of a firm name where such a term is desired, or the abbreviation Co. at the end of a firm name or the abbreviations Pr., Doz., Gro., and similar abbreviations, come in the body of a bill and, preferably, in the first column after the quantity.

It’s not possible to print abbreviations in solid text like in a letter. They should only be used with invoice or order dates, or with company names. For example, the abbreviation Messrs. can be used at the start of a company name when appropriate, or Co. at the end of a company name. Other abbreviations like Pr., Doz., Gro., and similar ones should appear in the body of a bill, preferably in the first column after the quantity. 284

It should be remembered that when the rubber platen of a billing machine becomes worn and cut with holes incident to the use of periods, commas, hyphens, etc., the special character type will sometimes print heavy at the top and light at the bottom of the letter, or vice versâ. This is remedied to some extent by placing a new rubber roll on a cylinder billing machine, or a new rubber covering on a flat-bed billing machine.

It should be noted that when the rubber platen of a billing machine gets worn and develops holes from using periods, commas, hyphens, etc., the special character type may sometimes print dark at the top and light at the bottom of the letter, or vice versa. You can fix this to some degree by putting a new rubber roll on a cylinder billing machine, or a new rubber covering on a flat-bed billing machine.

Special characters are used to a better advantage on the under-stroke (or blind machine) than on the visible machine. In the latter, the type-bars are all grouped in less than a half circle, which necessarily crowds the type-bars a little closer together, and therefore does not permit of special characters of a large size.

Special characters are used more effectively on the under-stroke (or blind machine) than on the visible machine. In the latter, the type bars are all arranged in less than a half circle, which crowds them a bit closer together, making it difficult to use large special characters.

Tabulators on Billing Machines. It is absolutely essential that every billing machine be furnished with either a single-stop (known as a column-stop) tabulator or a decimal tabulator, preferably the latter. A single-stop tabulator is used as follows:

Tabulators on Billing Machines. It's crucial that every billing machine is equipped with either a single-stop (called a column-stop) tabulator or a decimal tabulator, with the latter being preferred. A single-stop tabulator is used as follows:

On the billing machine frame rests a bar on which metal stops or pegs are placed at predetermined intervals. By pressing the column stop, the carriage holding the paper is released, and jumps automatically to the first stop. After the information is written, the stop is again pressed, and the machine jumps automatically to the next printing point. The following example shows the use of the column stop:

On the billing machine frame, there's a bar with metal stops or pegs set at specific intervals. By pressing the column stop, the carriage holding the paper is released and automatically jumps to the first stop. After the information is written, the stop is pressed again, and the machine automatically moves to the next printing point. The following example shows how the column stop is used:

John Jones Marion, Ind. XXV
A. B. Smith Washington, D. C. XXX
G. Barnes Seattle, Wash. XXX

The following example shows the use of the decimal tabulator:

The following example shows how to use the decimal tab stop:

10.50
.50
150.25
15560.65

With the decimal tabulator, the operator would press the tens key, which automatically places the carriage in a position to begin 285writing the amount 10.50. If the column stop were used for this purpose, it would have stopped the machine at the period point, and necessitated the operator pushing the carriage two points to the right in order to begin printing two points to the left of the decimal points. Some operators place the column stop so that the machine always stops at the tens point, and if an amount of 1.00 or less is to be written, they use the space key. This is quicker than to always stop at the decimal point and then position the carriage properly by hand. However, where any tabulated work involving figures which vary greatly is to be done, it is decided economy to use a decimal tabulator. Most operators do not see the advantage of using tabulators, and in many instances will continue to waste time spacing the machine with the space bar. If they would avail themselves of the tabulator device they would jump from one part of the line to the next desired point instantaneously. It should be remembered that billing work is a constant repetition of certain manual movements. If one movement in ten can be eliminated, it is equivalent to saving one hour in ten. To show the great advantage of, and it might be said, necessity for, time saving and short cuts in large establishments, a device used by Butler Bros., a large mail-order house with warehouses in several of the large cities, is an excellent illustration. This particular scheme is used in Jersey City, N. J. It consists of two rows of billing machine operators (sixty-five in number) placed in parallel positions with an endless belt running between them, and two checking clerks at the end of the row. As fast as the operators transcribe the orders onto the order forms, the original and typewritten order (with departmental copies) are placed on the belt and carried automatically to the checker's desk.

With the decimal tabulator, the operator would hit the tens key, which automatically positions the carriage to start writing the amount 10.50. If the column stop was used for this, it would stop the machine at the period point, requiring the operator to move the carriage two spaces to the right to start printing two spaces to the left of the decimal point. Some operators set the column stop so the machine always halts at the tens point, and if an amount of 1.00 or less needs to be written, they use the space key. This method is faster than always stopping at the decimal point and adjusting the carriage manually. However, when doing any tabulated work that involves figures that vary a lot, it’s more efficient to use a decimal tabulator. Most operators don’t see the benefits of using tabulators and often continue to waste time adjusting the machine with the space bar. If they took advantage of the tabulator device, they could jump from one part of the line to the next desired point instantly. It's important to remember that billing work involves repetitive manual movements. If one movement out of ten can be eliminated, it’s like saving one hour in ten. To illustrate the significant advantage and necessity of time-saving measures in large companies, Butler Bros., a major mail-order business with warehouses in several big cities, provides an excellent example. This specific setup is used in Jersey City, N. J. It features two rows of billing machine operators (sixty-five in total) arranged in parallel with an endless belt running between them and two checking clerks at the end of the row. As the operators write down the orders on the order forms, the original and typewritten order (along with departmental copies) are placed on the belt and automatically transported to the checker's desk.

The rubber belt passes over a pulley at the edge of the checker's desk, which allows the orders to fall from the belt to the desk. The belt returns to the end of the line, where it revolves around another pulley. The power is furnished by a small electric motor.

The rubber belt goes over a pulley at the edge of the checker's desk, letting the orders drop from the belt onto the desk. The belt then loops back to the end of the line, where it rotates around another pulley. A small electric motor provides the power.

Arrangement of Billing Machines in Large Business Houses. In large businesses in the wholesale dry goods, wholesale notions, and kindred lines, special arrangement enables a few billing machines to accomplish a large amount of billing. In these classes of business, it is the custom to call the lot number, class of goods, and the number of yards to the bill-clerk, who in turn enters it on the bill and duplicate. 286The system used will be described elsewhere. Here it is desired to touch upon the movable-platform idea only. The operator is seated on an elevated platform on which is placed the billing machine and the chair. This platform has rollers, and can be moved in the aisle between two rows of counters on which the goods to be shipped are placed. As soon as the callers call off the lot numbers, description, and quantities of one shipment, the billing machine operator moves the platform to the next lot of goods, which enables him to hear the caller clearly wherever the caller may be. If the bill clerk were permanently located in one portion of the room, he would be liable to make errors through misunderstanding the caller. A scheme which is largely used in those classes of business which demand the "call off system" or, as they term it, "billing from call" is to call off the word sixty-five as if it were sixity-five, and the word fifty-five as if it were fifity-five. This prevents confusion between these amounts which sound so much alike. Some firms for sixty-five use the term sticky-five.

Arrangement of Billing Machines in Large Business Houses. In large businesses like wholesale dry goods, wholesale notions, and similar areas, a special setup allows a few billing machines to handle a significant amount of billing. In these types of businesses, it’s common to call out the lot number, type of goods, and the number of yards to the bill clerk, who then records it on the bill and duplicate. 286The system used will be explained later. Here, we want to focus only on the movable platform concept. The operator is positioned on an elevated platform that holds the billing machine and their chair. This platform has rollers and can be moved down the aisle between two rows of counters where the goods to be shipped are placed. As soon as the callers announce the lot numbers, descriptions, and quantities for one shipment, the billing machine operator moves the platform to the next group of goods, allowing them to hear the caller clearly no matter where they are. If the bill clerk were stationed permanently in one spot, they could make mistakes from mishearing the caller. A common practice in businesses that use the "call off system," or as they call it, "billing from call," is to say the word sixty-five as if it were sixity-five, and the word fifty-five as if it were fifity-five. This prevents confusion between these amounts that sound so similar. Some firms use the term sticky-five for sixty-five.

Use of Computing Machines in Connection with Billing. Many firms use computing machines such as the comptometer for proving the extensions on invoices. With a machine of this character, it is possible to figure all of the extensions. The machine at the same time automatically adds the totals, and, if there are discounts to be taken off the bill, this operation can be performed without clearing the machine. For instance, in the following example:

Use of Computing Machines in Connection with Billing. Many companies use computing machines like the comptometer to verify the amounts on invoices. With this type of machine, it's possible to calculate all of the amounts. The machine also automatically adds up the totals, and if there are discounts to be applied to the bill, this can be done without resetting the machine. For example, in the following example:

12 yards lace   50 $6.00  
15 yards ruching   10 1.50  
24 doz. hdchfs.   12.00 288.00  
       
      $295.5  
  25%     221.63

By clearing the machine, is meant pulling the handle which returns all of the wheels to 0 for the beginning of a new computation. Without desiring to enter into the mechanical merits of adding machines, either listing or non-listing machines, it is important to touch upon the various arguments used in favor of billing machines with adding attachments and without them.

By clearing the machine, it means pulling the handle that resets all of the wheels to 0 for starting a new calculation. Without wanting to dive into the technical details of adding machines, whether listing or non-listing, it’s important to discuss the different arguments for billing machines with and without adding attachments.

The flat-bed machines were the first to use the combined machines. The plan in use was to place two recording registers on the billing machine and prove the total of each bill separately with one register, and accumulate the totals of all the bills for the day on the other 287register. Certain firms used extra recording registers for recording the totals of extra columns on the sales sheets in which they analyzed the sales according to classes of goods or some other classification. Some firms did not add the bills when making the extensions of the prices and quantities, but left the additions for the adding machine. The only draw-back to this plan was that if the operator copied a wrong total from the register dial it caused trouble. This fault, if fault it may be called, as it is not the fault of the machine, but of the operator, has been corrected by placing a subtracting device on the late models of combined billing and adding machines, whereby the subtracting device is thrown into action when the total of the bill is being written. If the correct amount of the bill is written on the invoice, the dial figures all turn to ciphers, which indicates that the amount has been correctly transcribed by the operator. Other improvements will likely follow in the many machines which are being placed upon the market. See Fig. 29 on Page 67.

The flat-bed machines were the first to utilize the combined machines. The plan was to have two recording registers on the billing machine: one to record the total of each bill separately and the other to accumulate the totals of all the bills for the day. Certain companies used additional recording registers to tally the totals of extra columns on the sales sheets, where they analyzed sales by product categories or other classifications. Some companies didn't add the bills when calculating the prices and quantities but left the additions for the adding machine. The only downside to this method was that if the operator copied an incorrect total from the register dial, it could lead to issues. This problem, if it can be called that—since it's not a machine fault but rather an operator mistake—has been addressed by introducing a subtracting device in the newer models of combined billing and adding machines. This device activates when the total of the bill is being written. If the correct bill amount is entered on the invoice, the dial figures reset to zero, indicating that the operator has accurately transcribed the amount. Further improvements are expected in the many machines being introduced to the market. See Fig. 29 on Page 67.

Some firms prefer to do all the billing as one operation, and use a separate or computing machine, as the case may be, for proving the additions at the end of the day. The reason is that by having two separate machines they can be used by different people during the day for different work.

Some companies prefer to handle all the billing in one go and use either a separate calculator or a computer for verifying the totals at the end of the day. The reason for this is that by having two separate machines, different people can use them throughout the day for various tasks.

If computing machines are needed for adding, multiplying, and taking off discounts, the non-listing machines are recommended, as they are key-driven. If adding machines are needed when printed lists are wanted of all additions, then listing machines are recommended. The general public has recognized that each class of machine has its separate use. Some firms check the totals of listing machines with non-listing machines, in order to save time and paper. Non-listing machines are used for taking a record of rolls and yards of cloth during inventory time, and later are used to multiply the extensions. Some dry goods firms hire expert operators at a dollar an hour to do this class of work, as it can be done in one-fifth the time that it would otherwise take. For instance, an example in multiplication, such as 432 × 235, would take approximately ten seconds to write down, multiply, and set down the figures. With a multiplying machine mentioned above, it can be done in two seconds.

If you need computing machines for adding, multiplying, and calculating discounts, non-listing machines are the way to go since they are key-driven. If you need adding machines that provide printed lists of all additions, then listing machines are the best choice. The general public recognizes that each type of machine has its own specific use. Some companies verify the totals from listing machines with non-listing machines to save time and paper. Non-listing machines are used to record rolls and yards of cloth during inventory, and then they are used to multiply the extensions. Some dry goods companies hire expert operators at a dollar an hour for this type of work, as they can complete it in one-fifth of the time it would normally take. For example, a multiplication problem like 432 × 235 would take about ten seconds to write down, calculate, and record the figures. With the multiplying machine mentioned above, it can be done in just two seconds.

With listing adding machines, equally valuable results can be obtained. In certain classes of work, such as collection letters in 288banks where there are rows of figures representing the various checks, and typewritten information, such as description of endorsements, it is much faster to place the sheets in the adding machine and list the amounts thereon and automatically print the total with the adding machine. This avoids the trouble due to operators printing wrong totals on the billing machine. The typewritten information is then put in on the typewriter or billing machine. There is this to be said, however, if an operator prints a wrong amount on a listing adding machine, the answer will be incorrect, but the machine will print a correct total of the figures printed by the machine. A listing machine can be equipped with a wide carriage and used for printing lists of figures just the same as a typewriter. Time should never be wasted printing a statement covering rows of tabulated figures on any typewriter, and then taking the statement to an adding machine and adding the columns to prove them, if it can possibly be arranged to make up the entire statement on the listing machine. Listing machines are now prepared to manifold at least two extra copies, and are equipped with column tabulators.

With listing adding machines, you can get equally valuable results. In some types of work, like collection letters in banks where there are rows of numbers representing different checks and typewritten info, such as the details of endorsements, it's much quicker to put the sheets in the adding machine, list the amounts, and automatically print the total. This helps eliminate the hassle of operators printing incorrect totals on the billing machine. The typewritten information can then be entered on the typewriter or billing machine. However, it's important to note that if an operator prints an incorrect amount on a listing adding machine, the final answer will be wrong, but the machine will still print a correct total of the figures it has processed. A listing machine can be equipped with a wide carriage and used to print lists of numbers just like a typewriter. Time should never be wasted typing out a statement of rows of tabulated figures on any typewriter and then taking that statement to an adding machine to add up the columns for verification, if you can manage to create the entire statement on the listing machine instead. Listing machines are now designed to make at least two extra copies and come with column tabulators.

For adding a number of columns, with or without a grand total column at either the right or left side of the book or sheet, and where the items are written one at a time in different columns, the combined typewriter and adding machine is recommended. One such is shown in Fig. 22.

For adding multiple columns, with or without a grand total column on either the right or left side of the book or sheet, and where the items are written one at a time in different columns, the combination typewriter and adding machine is recommended. One example is shown in Fig. 22.

COLORED SHEETS

The "colored sheet system" indicated below makes it unnecessary to refer to the written matter for distribution. A glance indicates the department or service for which every slip is intended. The distribution may be as follows:

The "colored sheet system" outlined below eliminates the need to look at the written materials for distribution. A quick look shows which department or service each slip is meant for. The distribution may be as follows:

  • The office record (register) may be filed numerically;
  • The order book copies alphabetically;
  • The requisitions by departments;
  • The shipping instructions, chronologically;
  • The salesman's records, territorially;
  • The cost sheets, according to classification.

One copy may also be filed geographically for comparison of results. This furnishes a complete record and makes reference easy.[6]

One copy can also be stored by location for results comparison. This provides a complete record and makes it easy to reference.[6]

6.  As a general rule, the "order acknowledgment" has been handled separately, although it is possible to include it in the one writing.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.Generally, the "order acknowledgment" has been managed separately, but it can also be included in the same document.

289This summary illustrates the use of the color scheme, and gives a brief hint of the plan usually followed in filing order sheets for various departments. It should be remembered that the best billing and order plan in the world can be made the most abject failure, if proper attention is not given to the proper filing of sheets.

289This summary shows how the color scheme is used and gives a quick overview of the typical process for organizing order sheets for different departments. It's important to keep in mind that even the most effective billing and order system can fail completely if the sheets aren't filed correctly.

Fig. 22. Combined Typewriter and Adding Machine. Elliott-Fisher Co.

Fig. 22. Combined Typewriter and Adding Machine. Elliott-Fisher Co.

For example, if clerks in looking for a certain order could always give the order number, but not the name of the customer, it would be wrong to file the orders alphabetically; in such cases, file the orders numerically. Always file papers according to the information which the clerk or executive will have at hand when looking up the same. Sometimes, papers will be just as easily found when filed numerically as alphabetically.

For instance, if clerks are searching for a specific order and can always provide the order number but not the customer's name, it wouldn't be appropriate to file the orders alphabetically; in these cases, file the orders numerically. Always organize documents based on the information that the clerk or executive will have available when they need to look them up. Sometimes, documents can be just as easily located when filed numerically as they can be when filed alphabetically.

Reference Information. One very important feature to remember in designing forms is to place all reference information on the right-hand side of the sheet. In leafing loose sheets held in binders, it will be easy to find the desired sheet if this plan is followed; but, if the reference numbers are placed on the left side of the sheet, it will be necessary to open the binder relatively wide to see each number.

Reference Information. One really important thing to keep in mind when designing forms is to put all reference information on the right-hand side of the page. When flipping through loose sheets in binders, it will be much easier to find the sheet you need if you stick to this plan; however, if the reference numbers are on the left side of the page, you'll have to open the binder wider to see each number.

In the illustration, Fig. 23, it will be noted that the order number is properly placed, and that the printed headings are aligned 290horizontally at the back, which permits all typewritten matter to be started evenly. The value of this point was touched upon in a previous chapter, as to saving of time in the execution of the work. In this particular form, however, there is typewritten matter to the left of the headings, such as account of, ship to, etc. The marginal stop on the billing machine should be set for the first typewritten matter, and tabulator stops used for all matter to the right on each line.

In the illustration, Fig. 23, you'll see that the order number is correctly positioned, and the printed headings are aligned horizontally at the back, which allows all typed content to start evenly. The importance of this was mentioned in a previous chapter regarding time saved in completing the work. In this specific format, however, there's typed content to the left of the headings, like account of, ship to, etc. The marginal stop on the billing machine should be set for the first typed content, and tabulator stops should be used for all content to the right on each line.

COMPOUND FORMS

One of the most effective means of short-cutting work, where the nature of the business will permit, is through the use of compound forms. These forms derived their name from the combination of order and billing work on one set of sheets and accomplish in one operation, sometimes in two, all the clerical work incident to the receipt, registering, acknowledgment, billing, charging, and shipping of an order.

One of the best ways to streamline work, where the nature of the business allows, is by using compound forms. These forms get their name from combining order and billing tasks into one set of sheets, completing all the clerical work related to receiving, registering, acknowledging, billing, charging, and shipping an order in one operation, sometimes in two.

It can be readily seen that if a firm can fill its orders completely, or almost so, that there is no use to wait until the order is filled before billing it. It is a great deal easier to place another sheet along with the order forms and use it for an invoice. It is generally placed as the top sheet of the set, and therefore it is the original.

It’s clear that if a company can fulfill its orders completely, or nearly so, there’s no need to wait until the order is completed before sending an invoice. It’s much simpler to include another sheet along with the order forms and use that for the invoice. It’s usually placed as the top sheet of the set, making it the original.

Goods Shipped for Entire Order. If the nature of the business is such that the firm can always fill its orders completely, it is perfectly safe to enter prices, make the extensions, and complete the invoice, with the possible exception of the date when the goods are finally shipped, if they cannot be sent out the same day. In such cases, a printed heading is provided on the invoice, opposite which the shipping date is typewritten. This then becomes the date of invoice.

Goods Shipped for Entire Order. If the business is set up to always fulfill its orders in full, it’s completely fine to input prices, calculate totals, and finish the invoice, except for the date the goods are actually shipped, if they can’t go out on the same day. In these situations, a printed heading is included on the invoice, and the shipping date is typed in next to it. This date then serves as the invoice date.

291

Fig. 23. The Colored-Sheet System. A Different-colored Sheet is Used for Each Department
Underwood Typewriter Co.

Fig. 23. The Colored-Sheet System. A different-colored sheet is used for each department
Underwood Typewriter Co.

Goods Almost Completely Shipped. If it is possible that one, two, or three items cannot be shipped at all, or in part only, it is the custom to hold the invoice (and copy, or copies, when there are any) in the office, arranged alphabetically according to customers, pending receipt of information from the shipping department as to quantities, weights, etc., of goods shipped. This invoice is an exact typewritten duplicate of the balance of the order forms, and has the heading for quantities to be shipped and, usually, prices for each article. Neither the extensions of the items nor the footing of the bill have been made. Generally, a copy of the order showing the quantities, weights, or measures marked thereon is handed to the office. The copy of the invoice is then placed in the machine, and the prices, extensions, and footings made to correspond with the items which have been shipped. The question arises in regard to the items which have not been shipped. Some firms print on the bottom of each invoice the sentence: All items which are not priced nor extended have been "back-ordered" and will be shipped later. Other firms typewrite an X in the price column, 292or number the items which have not been shipped. They then make a written explanation on the bottom of the invoice regarding the date at which the balance of the goods will be shipped. In some lines of business this plan tells the customer not only what he ordered, but what has been shipped and when the balance will be shipped. The memo on the bottom of the invoice also saves the writing of letters to customers.

Goods Almost Completely Shipped. If one, two, or three items can't be shipped at all or can only be partially shipped, the usual practice is to keep the invoice (and any copies) in the office, organized alphabetically by customer, while waiting to receive information from the shipping department about the quantities, weights, etc., of goods shipped. This invoice is a typed duplicate of the remaining order forms, with headings for quantities to be shipped and usually includes prices for each item. The item totals and the final amount haven't been calculated yet. Typically, a copy of the order showing the quantities, weights, or measures marked on it is given to the office. The invoice copy is then entered into the system, and the prices, totals, and final amount are updated to match the items that have been shipped. There is a question regarding the items that haven’t been shipped. Some companies print the phrase at the bottom of each invoice: All items which are not priced nor extended have been "back-ordered" and will be shipped later. Other companies type an X in the price column, or number the items that weren't shipped. They then provide a written note at the bottom of the invoice explaining when the remaining goods will be shipped. In some industries, this method informs the customer not only of what they ordered but also what has been shipped and when the rest will be sent. The note at the bottom of the invoice also eliminates the need for additional letters to customers.

In other lines of business, this plan would be absolutely unfit—for the reason that certain firms do not wish to call the customer's attention to the items which have been omitted.

In other lines of business, this plan would be completely inappropriate—because some companies don't want to draw the customer's attention to the items that have been left out.

Compound forms generally have two columns at the left—one for the goods ordered, the other for the goods shipped. If this were not provided, it would be necessary to erase quantities in all instances where a different quantity were shipped from the quantity ordered.

Compound forms usually have two columns on the left—one for the items ordered and the other for the items shipped. If this weren't provided, it would be necessary to delete quantities in every case where a different amount was shipped from what was ordered.

Fig. 24 is a good illustration of forms for a line of business which always has the goods in stock. The various brands of goods are printed in the body of the invoice. All that is necessary is to write the quantities, prices, extensions, and footings. Four copies are manifolded—invoice, warehouse order, house record, and collection record.

Fig. 24 is a helpful example of forms for a type of business that always keeps products in stock. The different brands of products are listed in the main section of the invoice. All that needs to be done is to fill in the quantities, prices, totals, and final amounts. Four copies are created—invoice, warehouse order, house record, and collection record.

RETAIL DRY GOODS BILLING

The retail dry goods houses and department stores use a form of billing which is different from any other, in that the bills are rendered to the customer once a month only. There are other lines of business which render their bills monthly, and which use the same style of billing.

The retail dry goods stores and department stores use a billing method that's different from others, as they only send bills to customers once a month. There are other types of businesses that also bill monthly and use the same billing style.

A folded form is used, the top sheet when completed at the end of the month is mailed to the customer. The second or duplicate is retained for the record of purchases.

A folded form is used; the top sheet, when completed at the end of the month, is mailed to the customer. The second or duplicate is kept for the purchase record.

When a customer makes a purchase, the saleslady makes the charge in her sales book. One copy goes with the goods to the wrapping desk, the other goes to the cashier's desk. The wrapper cannot handle a package without a duplicate sales slip. The packer removes from his duplicate slip a stub bearing the same number as the slip. This is to prevent goods being removed from the house without proper authority. The cashier retains the slip if cash has been paid, but passes the slip on to the auditing department, if the slip is marked by the saleslady charge.

When a customer makes a purchase, the sales associate records the transaction in her sales book. One copy goes with the items to the wrapping station, and the other goes to the cashier’s desk. The wrapper can’t handle a package without a duplicate sales slip. The packer removes a stub from his duplicate slip that has the same number as the original slip. This is to ensure that goods aren’t taken out of the store without proper authorization. The cashier keeps the slip if cash has been paid but sends the slip to the auditing department if it’s marked by the sales associate as charge.

293

Fig. 24. Compound Forms, Showing Invoice and Office Records
Remington Typewriter Co.

Fig. 24. Compound Forms, Showing Invoice and Office Records
Remington Typewriter Co.

294In large stores like John Wanamaker's, the customers are given by the credit man a brass check with their number marked thereon. This shows each clerk with whom they deal that they are entitled to credit, without having them identified each time they make a purchase. In smaller cities, the clerks become familiar with all the charge customers, and any plan of this character is not needed.

294In big stores like John Wanamaker's, customers receive a brass check with their number on it from the credit manager. This lets each clerk know that they can charge their purchases without needing to identify themselves every time. In smaller towns, clerks get to know all the charge customers, so this kind of system isn't necessary.

The sales slips are all numbered from 1 to 50, and the auditing department checks back each day all the slips of the different sales-people to see if all the slips have been accounted for. Some stores have a chart on the cashier's desk with the clerk's number at the top of each column, and the check numbers listed serially in each column, as shown in Table I.

The sales slips are numbered from 1 to 50, and the auditing department checks all the slips from different salespeople each day to ensure that all slips have been accounted for. Some stores have a chart on the cashier's desk with the clerk's number at the top of each column, and the check numbers listed in order in each column, as shown in Table I.

Table I
CHART FOR CHECKING RETAIL SALES SLIPS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

As fast as the checks are received at the cashier's desk they are checked. If one of the clerks should sell goods to a friend, and send one slip to the packer, but destroy the cashier's copy, the fraud would be detected, as the next slip which would be sent in would show by the number that the previous one was missing. The matter could be investigated immediately. The auditing departments of different stores handle the detail of the work in various ways—which, however, are about the same. Some stores, after they prove that there are no slips missing by checking the slips by the serial numbers, add them up on adding machines. As some stores do not care for a list of the slips, they use a non-listing machine, such as the comptometer. Other stores add the sales of each clerk separately, and add the totals of all the clerks to secure the total sales. The 295total sales of each clerk are then entered on a statistical sheet which shows a comparison of the total daily sales of each clerk for the month, as shown in Table II.

As soon as the checks arrive at the cashier's desk, they are verified. If one of the clerks sells items to a friend and sends one slip to the packer while destroying the cashier's copy, the fraud would be caught because the next slip sent in would show by the number that the previous one is missing. The issue could be investigated immediately. The auditing departments of different stores handle this work in various ways, but they’re generally similar. Some stores, after confirming there are no missing slips by checking the serial numbers, total them up using adding machines. Other stores that don't require a list of the slips use a non-listing machine, like the comptometer. Some stores track each clerk's sales separately and then sum the totals of all the clerks to get the overall sales. The 295 totals for each clerk are then recorded on a statistical sheet that compares the total daily sales for each clerk throughout the month, as shown in Table II.

The slips are then sorted according to departments, then added again, and similar information written on statistical sheets with the department numbers at the top, instead of the clerk numbers. The grand totals must agree to prove the work.

The slips are then sorted by department, added up again, and similar information is recorded on statistical sheets with the department numbers at the top instead of the clerk numbers. The grand totals must match to verify the work.

The slips are then sorted according to customers. If Mrs. J. B. Jackson has bought goods in three different departments, the auditing department will pin the three slips together and mark the total of the slips to be charged to her account on the back of the under slip. If there are twelve bill clerks and twelve billing machines, all the slips will then be assorted into twelve lots, each lot representing the number of accounts taken care of by each bill clerk.

The slips are then sorted by customers. If Mrs. J. B. Jackson bought items from three different departments, the auditing department will attach the three slips together and write the total amount to be charged to her account on the back of the bottom slip. With twelve billing clerks and twelve billing machines, all the slips will then be divided into twelve batches, with each batch representing the accounts handled by each billing clerk.

TABLE II
COMPARISON OF DAILY SALES OF CLERKS
Clerk No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Total Days                
335 38 1 30 50 55 45 47 70 35 35 56 78 34 25 40 56 34 79
492 53 2 56 74 87 55 9 76 87 23 54 09 19 89 86 75 90 52
etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.
                   

Each bill clerk receives the slips in alphabetical order. The monthly folded bills are arranged in the same order. These are held in binders—a special kind, such as the Tengwall, being used—from which the bills can be easily and quickly removed. Some firms prefer to file daily in vertical files the current monthly bills, upon which the charges are being made.

Each bill clerk gets the slips in alphabetical order. The monthly folded bills are organized in the same way. These are kept in binders—a specific type, like the Tengwall, is used—so that the bills can be easily and quickly taken out. Some companies prefer to store the current monthly bills, on which the charges are being made, in vertical files on a daily basis.

Some machines, such as the Smith Premier and the Elliott-Fisher, have a carbon roll on their machines for manifolding these duplicate folded bills without handling the carbon paper. These attachments were especially designed for this particular work.

Some machines, like the Smith Premier and the Elliott-Fisher, come equipped with a carbon roll that allows them to replicate these duplicate folded bills without needing to deal with the carbon paper. These attachments were specifically designed for this task.

After the operator has entered the charges of the three slips for Mrs. J. B. Jackson, or any other customer having more than one 296slip for the previous day's purchases, she compares the total she has placed on the bill with the total marked on the back of the slips by the auditing department.

After the operator has entered the charges from the three slips for Mrs. J. B. Jackson, or any other customer with more than one 296 slip for the previous day's purchases, she checks the total she's put on the bill against the total noted on the back of the slips by the auditing department.

Fig. 25 shows samples of folded monthly retail bills. The black showing under the top sheet, which is turned over, is the carbon paper used with the bills when made on machines not equipped with the carbon-roll attachment. Some firms place the carbon paper between the sheets at the beginning of the month, and leave it there; others place the carbon paper between the sheets for every charge which is made to the bill.

Fig. 25 shows examples of folded monthly retail bills. The black marks under the top sheet, which is flipped over, are from the carbon paper used with the bills when produced on machines that don't have the carbon-roll attachment. Some companies put the carbon paper between the sheets at the start of the month and keep it there; others insert the carbon paper between the sheets for each charge that goes on the bill.

After all the charges have been made, the operator adds up on the adding machine the totals of all the last charges on the various bills to which charges have been made that day. This total must agree with the amount which the auditing department handed over to each bill clerk to be entered upon these bills. The Smith Premier and Elliott-Fisher have tally-strip devices which automatically record the total of each charge made to all the various bills each day. This paper strip, when added up, must agree with the total of the auditing department figures.

After all the charges have been entered, the operator uses the adding machine to total up all the last charges on the various bills for that day. This total needs to match the amount that the auditing department provided to each bill clerk for these bills. The Smith Premier and Elliott-Fisher machines have tally-strip devices that automatically record the total of each charge made to all the different bills each day. This paper strip, when totaled, must correspond with the figures from the auditing department.

At the end of the month, about the 26th, most firms begin to total the columns of the bill. The final total of each bill added to the total of every other bill must give a grand total equal to all the charges for the month. This proves that each bill has been correctly added. The balance due from the previous bills is then brought forward, and any payments made during the month deducted, and the bill footed. All credits for returned goods are entered during the month the same as the charges, excepting that they are placed in a separate column provided for that purpose, and deducted at the end of the month from the charges.

At the end of the month, around the 26th, most companies start to add up the figures on the bills. The final amount of each bill, when added together with all the other bills, should equal a grand total that reflects all the charges for the month. This ensures that each bill has been accurately calculated. The balance owed from previous bills is then carried over, and any payments made during the month are subtracted, resulting in the final amount. All credits for returned items are recorded during the month just like the charges, except they go into a separate column designated for that purpose, and are deducted from the charges at the end of the month.

Some firms post the total charges and credits for the month to the ledger in two lump sums. Other firms prefer to post the total of each day's charges to the ledger daily, instead of letting the posting go until the end of the month. This is a matter to be decided from a bookkeeping standpoint. If the bookkeepers have the current month's charges in the ledger, it saves referring to the bills at the bill clerk's desk for information or the current month's charges.

Some companies record the total charges and credits for the month in two lump sums in the ledger. Other companies prefer to update the ledger daily with the total charges from each day, rather than waiting until the end of the month. This decision should be made from a bookkeeping perspective. When the bookkeepers have the current month's charges recorded in the ledger, it eliminates the need to refer to the bills at the bill clerk's desk for information about the current month's charges.

297

Fig. 25. Monthly Statements of Retail Dry Goods Houses
Remington Typewriter Co.

Fig. 25. Monthly Statements of Retail Dry Goods Houses
Remington Typewriter Co.

298

Fig. 26. Smith Premier Device for Inserting Dry Goods Billing Forms Evenly

Fig. 26. Smith Premier Device for Evenly Inserting Dry Goods Billing Forms

299After the bills have been sent out, the duplicates are filed away. The best known way to file them is alphabetically; each customer's bill for the various months together. This is in contrast to the plan of filing each month's bills away separately. If it is wished to refer to any one person's charges for a given number of months it is necessary, under the latter plan, to refer to several binders.

299After the bills are sent out, the duplicates are organized. The most common method is to file them alphabetically, grouping each customer's bills for the different months together. This is different from the method of filing each month's bills separately. If you want to look up one customer's charges for several months, you would need to check multiple binders using the latter method.

Fig. 27. Remington Billing Machines

Fig. 27. Remington Billing Machines

One of the devices which did more to permit cylinder machines to do billing successfully is shown in Fig. 26. Formerly, when two or more sheets of paper were inserted in a cylinder machine, the small feed roll which rests against the large rubber platen, fed the under papers at a different speed than those sheets which rested against the large roll. The result was that the papers were fed unevenly into the machine. When removed, it was impossible to replace them in the same relation in which they were before.

One of the devices that helped cylinder machines successfully handle billing is shown in Fig. 26. In the past, when two or more sheets of paper were loaded into a cylinder machine, the small feed roll that presses against the large rubber platen fed the bottom sheets at a different speed than the sheets resting against the large roll. This led to uneven feeding of the papers into the machine. Once removed, it was impossible to put them back in the same order they were in before.

The device illustrated furnishes a resting place for evenly placing all the sheets in the machine by pressing a release lever which draws the feed rolls away from the large roll until the papers or sheets are 300properly placed in the machine. Started evenly, they will invariably feed evenly.

The device shown provides a resting spot for evenly positioning all the sheets in the machine by pressing a release lever, which pulls the feed rolls away from the large roll until the papers or sheets are 300properly positioned in the machine. If started evenly, they will consistently feed evenly.

Fig. 28. Smith Premier Dry Goods Billing Machine

Fig. 28. Smith Premier Dry Goods Billing Machine

This is of particular advantage in retail dry goods billing, where a sheet is placed in and out of a machine as many as thirty times a month. If the top of the bill is each time started from the same starting point, namely, the top of the statement, it will feed correctly to the next writing point on the statement without any adjustment. The Remington, Fig. 27, and Underwood machines are equipped with devices for the same purpose. The Smith Premier, Fig. 28, and the Elliott-Fisher machines are equipped with rolls of carbon which automatically manifold folded monthly bill forms.

This is especially beneficial in retail dry goods billing, where a sheet is inserted and removed from a machine up to thirty times a month. If the top of the bill always starts from the same point, specifically the top of the statement, it will feed correctly to the next writing point on the statement without needing any adjustments. The Remington, Fig. 27, and Underwood machines have devices designed for this purpose. The Smith Premier, Fig. 28, and the Elliott-Fisher machines come with rolls of carbon that automatically create multiple copies of folded monthly bill forms.

DEVICES OF THE FUTURE

One of the successful devices which is being perfected at this time is a combination of an adding machine and a cylinder billing machine which can be operated as a combined machine or separately as two machines, and may be actually removed, one from another. The idea is to have a platen or roll which can act as shuttle between the typewriter and the adding machine. By pressing a button, the roll travels from the typewriter to the adding machine. This scheme has the same advantage as has the farmer who can operate his horses singly or in pairs.

One of the successful devices currently being refined is a combination of an adding machine and a cylinder billing machine that can be used together as a single unit or separately as two distinct machines, and can actually be separated from one another. The concept is to have a platen or roll that operates like a shuttle between the typewriter and the adding machine. By pressing a button, the roll moves from the typewriter to the adding machine. This setup offers the same benefit as a farmer who can work his horses individually or in pairs.

The adding machine people have been experimenting and gradually increasing the printing capacity of their machines. They are now able to print the different months of the year and some other 301abbreviations for monthly statement work. Further developments can be expected along this line. Adding machines which list are a very important factor in office work and their capacity is so large for certain classes of work that space does not permit of detailed treatment here.

The people building adding machines have been testing and steadily increasing the printing capacity of their machines. They can now print the different months of the year and some other abbreviations for monthly statements. Further advancements can be anticipated in this area. Adding machines that list are a crucial part of office work, and their capacity is so significant for certain types of tasks that there isn't enough space here for a detailed discussion. 301

Fig. 29. Adding and Subtracting Machine Combined with Cylinder Billing Machine
Remington Typewriter Co.

Fig. 29. Combined Adding and Subtracting Machine with Cylinder Billing Machine
Remington Typewriter Co.

While marvelous improvements have been made in the last decade, the next one promises equally well, especially in the adding-machine line.

While amazing advancements have been made in the last decade, the next one looks equally promising, especially in the area of adding machines.

303

REVIEW QUESTIONS.
 
PRACTICAL TEST QUESTIONS.

In the foregoing sections of this Cyclopedia numerous illustrative examples are worked out in detail in order to show the application of the various methods and principles. Accompanying these are examples for practice which will aid the reader in fixing the principles in mind.

In the previous sections of this Cyclopedia, many detailed examples have been provided to demonstrate the application of different methods and principles. Alongside these, there are practice examples that will help the reader remember the principles.

In the following pages are given a large number of test questions and problems which afford a valuable means of testing the reader's knowledge of the subjects treated. They will be found excellent practice for those preparing for Civil Service Examinations. In some cases numerical answers are given as a further aid in this work.

In the following pages, there are many test questions and problems that provide a helpful way to assess the reader's understanding of the topics discussed. They are great practice for anyone getting ready for Civil Service Examinations. In some instances, numerical answers are included as an additional resource in this effort.

305

REVIEW QUESTIONS
REGARDING
COMMISSION AND STORAGE

1. What advantages are derived from a division of the ledger? Name the three most common subdivisions of the ledger.

1. What are the benefits of dividing the ledger? Name the three most common divisions of the ledger.

2. What accounts are kept in the purchase ledger; in the sales ledger; in the general ledger? Under what circumstances should accounts with an individual be kept in both purchase and sales ledgers?

2. What accounts are included in the purchase ledger, the sales ledger, and the general ledger? In what situations should accounts for an individual be maintained in both the purchase and sales ledgers?

3. What is a controlling account? What do the balances of sales and purchase controlling accounts represent? From what sources are the debits and credits to these accounts derived?

3. What is a controlling account? What do the balances of sales and purchase controlling accounts indicate? Where do the debits and credits for these accounts come from?

4. When loose-leaf order blanks are used, what is the customary routine followed in filling and charging orders?

4. When using loose-leaf order forms, what is the usual process for completing and billing orders?

5. For what purposes are special distribution columns in a sales book used?

5. What are special distribution columns in a sales book used for?

6. To what accounts in the general ledger are total purchases, as shown by the invoice register, posted? In what way are these two accounts distinguished?

6. To which accounts in the general ledger are total purchases, as indicated by the invoice register, recorded? How are these two accounts differentiated?

7. Describe briefly the cash journal, and explain how it is used? What, if any, objection can be raised to making entries which do not involve an exchange of cash, or its equivalent, in the cash journal?

7. Briefly describe the cash journal and explain how it is used. What objections, if any, can be raised to making entries in the cash journal that don't involve an exchange of cash or its equivalent?

8. Why is the expense account divided? Name some of the accounts representing different classes of expense.

8. Why is the expense account split up? Name some of the accounts that represent different types of expenses.

9. What is meant by petty cash, and how should the account with petty cash be handled?

9. What is petty cash, and how should the petty cash account be managed?

30610. The check of Martin Mason for $164.20 went to protest, and was returned by our bank with a protest fee of $2.50. What entry is necessary to record this on our books?

30610. The check from Martin Mason for $164.20 was rejected, and our bank returned it with a protest fee of $2.50. What entry do we need to make in our records for this?

11. Prepare trading and profit and loss accounts representing the transactions listed in Art. 16, Pages 28 to 31, inclusive.

11. Prepare trading and profit and loss accounts reflecting the transactions mentioned in Art. 16, Pages 28 to 31, inclusive.

12. How can an order record be used as a sales record? Why is an abstract of sales used in connection with such sales records? Explain how this abstract is made up.

12. How can an order record be used as a sales record? Why is a summary of sales used in connection with these sales records? Explain how this summary is created.

13. If goods are sold at f. o. b. prices, but the freight is prepaid as an accommodation to the customer, how should it be treated on the books? Why?

13. If goods are sold at f.o.b. prices, but the freight is paid in advance as a favor to the customer, how should it be recorded in the books? Why?

14. Name three or more subdivisions of sales expense, and explain what items are properly included in each.

14. Name three or more categories of sales expenses, and explain what items should be included in each one.

15. Why are check registers taking the place of the old style check book? When a check register is used, how are the checks kept?

15. Why are check registers replacing the old-fashioned checkbook? When you use a check register, how do you keep track of your checks?

16. What is a cash received book, and for what purpose is it used?

16. What is a cash receipts journal, and what is it used for?

17. Complete the exercise given at the end of Art. 29, Page 42.

17. Finish the exercise provided at the end of Art. 29, Page 42.

18. What is your understanding of the meaning of the terms commission and brokerage? What is the distinction between a commission merchant and a merchandise broker?

18. What do you understand by the terms commission and brokerage? What’s the difference between a commission merchant and a merchandise broker?

19. What is a manufacturer's agent, and how does his business differ from that of a commission merchant or broker?

19. What is a manufacturer's agent, and how is their business different from that of a commission merchant or broker?

20. By what term is a consignment of goods to a broker known on the books of the shipper? In what name is an account opened to represent the consignment?

20. What do we call a shipment of goods sent to a broker in the shipper's records? Under what name is an account created to represent the shipment?

21. How is the above account made up? When is the account closed, and to what account is the balance transferred?

21. How is the account detailed above created? When does the account get closed, and where is the balance transferred to?

22. What is an account sales? When an account sales is received without a remittance, what account should be opened, and what does it represent?

22. What is an account sales? When an account sales is received without payment, what account should be created, and what does it signify?

23. When a broker receives a shipment of goods to be sold on commission, by what name is it known on his books? In what name is an account opened?

23. When a broker gets a shipment of goods to sell on commission, what is it called in their records? Under what name is an account created?

24. If a broker renders an account sales without a remittance, to what account should he credit the net proceeds? Why?

24. If a broker provides an account of sales without sending a payment, to which account should he credit the net proceeds? Why?

30725. If a broker has on hand any unsold consignments when his books are closed, do the accounts represent assets or liabilities? How would you determine the broker's liabilities on account of consignments?

30725. If a broker has any unsold consignments left when his books are closed, do the accounts show assets or liabilities? How would you figure out the broker's liabilities related to consignments?

26. Name the books used by a produce shipper, and explain how each is used.

26. List the books used by a produce shipper and describe how each one is utilized.

27. What is a shipment ledger account, and how is it made up? What is a profit and loss on shipments account?

27. What is a shipment ledger account, and what does it consist of? What is a profit and loss on shipments account?

28. In what way does the journal used by a shipper differ from the one used by the average merchant?

28. How does the journal used by a shipper differ from the one used by a typical merchant?

29. How is the trading account of a shipper made up?

29. How is a shipper's trading account structured?

30. Prepare trading and profit and loss accounts called for in Art. 48.

30. Prepare the trading and profit and loss accounts required in Art. 48.

31. Name and describe the uses of the books used by a commission merchant.

31. Name and describe the uses of the records used by a commission merchant.

32. Prepare trading and profit and loss accounts, and balance sheet called for in Art. 57.

32. Prepare the trading and profit and loss statements, as well as the balance sheet required in Article 57.

33. What is a storage business, and for what purpose is it conducted?

33. What is a storage business, and why is it done?

34. What is a warehouse receipt, and what does it represent?

34. What is a warehouse receipt, and what does it signify?

35. Explain what is meant by simple storage, and average storage.

35. Explain what is meant by simple storage and average storage.

308

REVIEW QUESTIONS
REGARDING
SINGLE ENTRY—COMPARATIVE STATEMENTS

1. What is the distinctive feature of single entry bookkeeping? In what respect does single entry fail to fulfil the functions of bookkeeping?

1. What is the unique characteristic of single entry bookkeeping? How does single entry fail to meet the functions of bookkeeping?

2. What books are usually used in single entry? How does the single entry cash book differ from that used in double entry?

2. What books are typically used in single entry? How does the single entry cash book differ from the one used in double entry?

3. In posting, what features distinguish single entry from double entry?

3. In posting, what are the differences between single entry and double entry?

4. How can the accuracy of single entry books be proved?

4. How can we prove the accuracy of single entry books?

5. To determine the profits of a business whose books are kept by single entry, what steps are necessary? What are the steps in closing single entry books?

5. What steps are needed to figure out the profits of a business that uses single entry bookkeeping? What are the steps to close single entry books?

6. On a certain date the assets and liabilities of Henry Lamson are as follows:

6. On a specific date, the assets and liabilities of Henry Lamson are as follows:

ASSETS
 
Cash $452.00
Due from sundry debtors 77.20
Merchandise per inventory 764.50
 
LIABILITIES
 
Due sundry creditors 142.00

The following transactions are recorded:

The following transactions are noted:

Sales to sundry persons on account $46.71
Bought from sundry persons on account 339.54
Sales for cash 96.90
Received cash on account 64.00
Paid cash on account 133.50
Paid cash for rent 37.50
Paid cash for clerk hire 8.00

309Record these transactions in single entry books; prepare proof of ledger and statements of assets and liabilities, the merchandise inventory at end of period being $983.75. Do the books show a profit or a loss, and how does it affect the account of the proprietor?

309Record these transactions in single-entry books; prepare proof of the ledger and statements of assets and liabilities, with the merchandise inventory at the end of the period being $983.75. Do the books indicate a profit or a loss, and how does it impact the owner's account?

7. Explain, briefly, the necessary routine followed in changing single entry books to double entry.

7. Briefly explain the necessary routine for converting single-entry books to double-entry.

8. H. P. Hayes established a small factory upon a borrowed capital of $10,000. The undertaking was a success, and at the close of the first year his financial condition was disclosed by the following particulars:

8. H. P. Hayes set up a small factory with borrowed capital of $10,000. The venture was a success, and at the end of the first year, his financial situation was revealed by the following details:

Bills payable $4,000.00
Accounts payable 6,574.50
Cash 1,752.50
Accounts receivable 12,694.18
Inventory 4,765.90
Salaries 3,500.00
Sundry expenses 435.50
Manufacturing expenses 11,759.50

Mr. Hayes kept his own books during his first year in business, but did not keep them by double entry. His sales for the year amounted to $35,643.25, and his total purchases amounted to $16,076.07. At this point Mr. Hayes admitted as a partner, A. B. Andrews, who contributed $10,000.00 to the partnership upon the agreement that the partners should share equally in the business. A bookkeeper was engaged to keep the books by the double entry system. From the particulars given, make a trial balance and the necessary journal entries to complete the change to the double entry method. Ascertain the interest of Mr. Hayes in the business, and credit his account with the same.

Mr. Hayes managed his own accounts during his first year in business, but he didn't use double-entry bookkeeping. His annual sales totaled $35,643.25, while his total purchases came to $16,076.07. At this point, Mr. Hayes welcomed A. B. Andrews as a partner, who invested $10,000.00 into the partnership with the understanding that they would share the business equally. A bookkeeper was hired to maintain the accounts using the double-entry system. Based on the information provided, prepare a trial balance and the necessary journal entries to transition to the double-entry method. Determine Mr. Hayes's interest in the business and credit his account accordingly.

9. Foster, Harvey, and Morton—a copartnership—wish to change their method of bookkeeping from single to double entry. The partnership agreement provides that each partner shall share in the profits in proportion to his investment. Separate investment and withdrawal accounts have been kept with each partner. In the following statement of ledger accounts, partners' investment accounts show the same balances as at the last adjustment, no additional investments having been made:

9. Foster, Harvey, and Morton—a partnership—want to switch their bookkeeping method from single-entry to double-entry. The partnership agreement states that each partner will share in the profits based on their investment. Separate investment and withdrawal accounts have been maintained for each partner. In the following statement of ledger accounts, the partners' investment accounts show the same balances as at the last adjustment, with no additional investments made:

310
Foster, Investment Credit Balance $1,600.00
Harvey, Investment Credit Balance 1,200.00
Morton, Investment Credit Balance 1,200.00
Personal Accounts Credit Balance 900.00
Personal Accounts Debit Balance 1,900.00
Foster, Withdrawals Debit Balance 315.00
Harvey, Withdrawals Debit Balance 240.00
Morton, Withdrawals Debit Balance 155.00
Bank Debit Balance 2,050.00
Cash in Office   45.00

An inventory shows merchandise $1,775.00, fixtures $300.00.

An inventory lists merchandise at $1,775.00 and fixtures at $300.00.

Show all entries necessary to make the partnership adjustment and change the books to double entry, indicating by check √ the accounts to be posted.

Show all entries needed to adjust the partnership and update the records to double entry, marking with a check √ the accounts to be posted.

10. The books of the Star Coal Company, a corporation with a paid-up capital of $10,000.00, have been kept by single entry. The following facts are gathered from the books:

10. The records of the Star Coal Company, a corporation with a paid-up capital of $10,000.00, have been maintained using a single-entry system. The following information is taken from the records:

Cash in Bank   $3,500.00
Personal Accounts Debit Balances 6,500.00
Cash in Office   200.00
Personal Accounts Credit Balances 2,500.00

An inventory results as follows:

Inventory results are as follows:

Coal 3,750.00
Horses and Wagons 800.00
Furniture and Fixtures 300.00

Make necessary journal entries to change to double entry. Provide a reserve of 5% for uncollectible accounts, 10% for depreciation of horses and wagons, 10% for depreciation of furniture and fixtures. Declare a dividend of 10% and transfer balance of profits to surplus, making all journal entries to record these transactions.

Make the required journal entries to switch to double entry. Set aside 5% for uncollectible accounts, 10% for depreciation on horses and wagons, and 10% for depreciation on furniture and fixtures. Declare a dividend of 10% and transfer the remaining profits to surplus, making all journal entries to document these transactions.

11. Prepare a model trial balance of an imaginary business, or one with which you are familiar, giving special attention to the proper grouping of the accounts. Explain the benefits of your grouping of the accounts.

11. Create a sample trial balance for a fictional business or one you're familiar with, focusing on the correct organization of the accounts. Describe the advantages of your account grouping.

12. What is a working balance sheet? From the trial balance, which you have prepared, make up a working balance sheet, supplying such additional figures as may be necessary.

12. What is a working balance sheet? From the trial balance that you've prepared, create a working balance sheet, providing any additional figures that may be needed.

13. What are the fundamental advantages of comparative statements? On what basis should percentages be figured in on analysis of the manufacturing account? of the trading account?

13. What are the main benefits of comparative statements? How should percentages be calculated when analyzing the manufacturing account? What about the trading account?

31114. To prove the accuracy of the ledger without a trial balance, what steps are necessary? What test is applied to determine whether the ledger balances?

31114. What steps are needed to prove the accuracy of the ledger without using a trial balance? What test is used to check if the ledger is balanced?

15. What is meant by a book inventory? How can the receipts be determined? the disbursements or quantities sold?

15. What does book inventory mean? How can we figure out the receipts and the expenses or the number of items sold?

16. What is the reverse or slip posting system? How is it operated?

16. What is the reverse or slip posting system? How does it work?

17. Describe, briefly, the loose-leaf ledger. Describe the principal methods of indexing. Name some of the advantages of the loose-leaf ledger.

17. Briefly describe the loose-leaf ledger. Outline the main methods of indexing. List some advantages of the loose-leaf ledger.

18. For what classes of accounts is the card ledger specially desirable? What are the principal methods of indexing the card ledger?

18. For what types of accounts is the card ledger especially useful? What are the main ways to index the card ledger?

19. What is a tabular ledger? Describe the Boston Bank Ledger. Is a tabular ledger well adapted for commercial accounts?

19. What is a tabular ledger? Describe the Boston Bank Ledger. Is a tabular ledger suitable for business accounts?

20. What is meant by a balance ledger? What are its advantages?

20. What does a balance ledger mean? What are its benefits?

21. Prepare a form of cash journal segregating administrative, selling, and manufacturing expense for an imaginary business, or one with which you are familiar.

21. Create a cash journal form that separates administrative, selling, and manufacturing expenses for a fictional business, or one you are familiar with.

22. Prepare a form of sales journal for a business having five departments.

22. Create a sales journal template for a business with five departments.

312

REVIEW QUESTIONS
ABOUT
TRUSTEES' ACCOUNTS; STOCK
BROKERS' ACCOUNTS

1. From an accounting standpoint, into what two classes can business be divided? What is the position of the trustee of an estate, as against the public?

1. From an accounting perspective, what are the two categories that businesses can be split into? What is the role of the trustee of an estate in relation to the public?

2. Describe the essential features of the accounting of an executor.

2. Describe the key aspects of the accounting of an executor.

3. In what two forms may an executor's accounts be kept? By what term are his accounts with properties known?

3. In what two ways can an executor keep their accounts? What is the term used for their accounts related to properties?

4. What are the proper classifications of an executor's accounts?

4. What are the correct classifications for an executor's accounts?

5. Two trustees collect in one year an income of $50,000.00 for a beneficiary, at an expense of $3,100.00. If each trustee receives an equal share, what commission should each receive, and what amount will be paid to the beneficiary, under the New York law? Prepare a complete solution of this problem.

5. Two trustees earn an income of $50,000.00 in one year for a beneficiary, with an expense of $3,100.00. If each trustee gets an equal share, what commission should each receive, and how much will be given to the beneficiary, according to New York law? Prepare a complete solution for this problem.

6. Prepare a solution of the following: Four trustees collect and pay out of an estate the sum of $416,000.00, the total debts of the estate being $201,000.00. What commission will each trustee receive?

6. Prepare a solution of the following: Four trustees collect and pay out of an estate the sum of $416,000.00, with the total debts of the estate being $201,000.00. How much commission will each trustee receive?

7. Prepare a statement of the executor's accounts—from the particulars given on Pages 17 and 18—showing the balance due each legatee.

7. Prepare a statement of the executor's accounts—from the details provided on Pages 17 and 18—showing the balance owed to each legatee.

8. What is a realization and liquidation account? How is it made up?

8. What is a realization and liquidation account? How is it created?

9. What is a statement of affairs? In what respect does it differ from a balance sheet?

9. What is a statement of affairs? How is it different from a balance sheet?

31310. How does a statement of affairs of a bankrupt differ from that of a going concern?

31310. How does the financial statement of a bankrupt person differ from that of a business that's still operating?

11. What is the purpose of a deficiency account?

11. What is the purpose of a deficiency account?

12. Wm. Andrews, finding himself on July 1st unable to meet his obligations, asks you to make up his statement of affairs for submission to his creditors, and a deficiency account for his own information. You find from his books and other sources the following facts regarding his business:

12. Wm. Andrews, realizing on July 1st that he can't meet his obligations, asks you to prepare his statement of affairs for his creditors, along with a deficiency account for his own reference. You discover from his books and other sources the following information about his business:

Unsecured creditors $9,000.00
Fully secured creditors 2,300.00
Holding securities of the value of $3,000.00  
Partly secured creditors 35,000.00
Holding securities of the value of $20,000.00  
Preferred claims 800.00
Bills payable 20,000.00
Accounts receivable, home office (good) 1,000.00
"         " (doubtful) $200.00, estimated to  
realize 75.00
"         " (bad) $300.00  
Stock, Home Office, cost $1,500.00, estimated to  
realize 1,200.00
Stock and accounts receivable, less sundry liabilities,  
at branches 36,000.00
Of which it is estimated there will be a loss  
on realization of stock $6,000.00, of accounts  
receivable $9,000.00.  
Buildings and equipment at branches, cost $40,000.00,  
estimated to realize 20,000.00
Office furniture $300.00, estimated to realize 200.00
Cash in office 4.00
Cash in bank 80.00
Bonds held by fully secured creditors 3,000.00
Stocks held by partly secured creditors 20,000.00

Six years ago Andrews' capital was $42,000.00. The profits for the first three years appear to have been $3,000.00, $4,000.00, and $5,284.00, and the losses for the three subsequent years $1,500.00, 314$2,500.00, and $3,000.00, after allowing $2,000.00 a year for interest on capital. His withdrawals have been at the rate of $4,000.00 a year. From these particulars, prepare a statement of affairs and a deficiency account.

Six years ago, Andrews had a capital of $42,000.00. The profits for the first three years were $3,000.00, $4,000.00, and $5,284.00, and the losses for the next three years were $1,500.00, $2,500.00, and $3,000.00, after accounting for $2,000.00 a year in interest on capital. His withdrawals have been $4,000.00 a year. Based on this information, please prepare a statement of affairs and a deficiency account.

13. What differences exist between a transaction for the purchase or sale of stock, and the purchase or sale of grain?

13. What are the differences between buying or selling stocks and buying or selling grain?

14. Explain a ring settlement.

14. Explain a ring settlement.

15. What is necessary to post to the customer's ledger account, and from what sources do you post?

15. What do you need to post to the customer's ledger account, and where do you get the information to post?

16. Show form of margin book and explain how it is kept.

16. Show the format of the margin book and explain how it's maintained.

17. In what cases should interest be charged? What is it charged for?

17. When should interest be charged? What is it charged for?

18. What should be entered in the general cash book?

18. What should be included in the general cash book?

19. Explain fully the handling of office cash.

19. Explain in detail how to manage office cash.

20. If A bought 5,000 bushels of wheat at $1.20, and sold 12,000 bushels at $1.21, how much cash would he be obliged to deposit to secure the fulfillment of his orders?

20. If A bought 5,000 bushels of wheat for $1.20 and sold 12,000 bushels for $1.21, how much cash would he need to deposit to secure the fulfillment of his orders?

21. What is the cash which he deposits called?

21. What is the cash that he deposits called?

22. Write an order form for the sale of 25,000 bushels of corn @ 76¼c made upon the orders of Mr. D.

22. Create an order form for the sale of 25,000 bushels of corn at 76¼ cents, placed on behalf of Mr. D.

23. Show what acknowledgment must be made to Mr. D.

23. Show what acknowledgment needs to be made to Mr. D.

24. What is the daily record sheet? For what purpose is it used? Explain the entries in this book.

24. What is the daily record sheet? What is it used for? Describe the entries in this book.

25. Explain how stock purchases should be handled, what records should be kept, and what information in regard to them is necessary.

25. Explain how to manage stock purchases, what records need to be maintained, and what information is required regarding them.

26. What is the difference between a bull and a bear?

26. What’s the difference between a bull and a bear?

27. Explain the meaning of a buying order and state how it should be treated in the accounting department.

27. Explain what a buying order means and describe how it should be handled in the accounting department.

28. On July 5th James Robinson sold 25,000 bushels of September wheat at 1.04½; on July 10th he purchased 10,000 bushels wheat at 1.02¼, and on July 11th he purchased 15,000 bushels of wheat at 1.02. Make a statement of this account for Mr. Robinson.

28. On July 5th, James Robinson sold 25,000 bushels of September wheat at $1.04½; on July 10th, he bought 10,000 bushels of wheat at $1.02¼, and on July 11th, he bought 15,000 bushels of wheat at $1.02. Create an account statement for Mr. Robinson.

29. What is the difference between listed and unlisted stock?

29. What’s the difference between listed and unlisted stock?

30. What is a debit or credit slip and for what purpose is it used?

30. What is a debit or credit slip and what is it used for?

31. Show the ruling of the stock ledger and explain the necessity of each column. Rule a sample page.

31. Display the stock ledger ruling and describe the purpose of each column. Create a sample page.

31532. For what purpose is the journal used in connection with the brokerage business?

31532. What is the purpose of the journal in relation to the brokerage business?

33. Explain the meaning of buyer's option.

Explain what buyer's option means.

34. Explain the meaning of carrying charges.

Explain what carrying charges mean.

35. Explain the meaning of a put and a call.

35. Explain the meaning of a put and a call.

316

REVIEW QUESTIONS
REGARDING
BILLING AND ORDER RECORDING

1. Explain the difference in principle between the cylinder billing machine and the flat-bed billing machine.

1. Explain the difference in principle between the cylinder billing machine and the flat-bed billing machine.

2. Explain the meaning of manifolding.

2. Explain the meaning of manifolding.

3. Explain in your own language why the plan of copying invoices in tissue books with a letter press is inferior to the billing-machine method of typewriting the invoice and sales sheet simultaneously.

3. Explain in your own words why using tissue books with a letterpress to copy invoices is worse than using a billing machine to type the invoice and sales sheet at the same time.

4. If an office boy mailed a pen-written invoice without copying same in the tissue book, what method would enable the firm to detect such oversight?

4. If an office boy sent out a handwritten invoice without making a copy in the tissue book, what method would help the company catch that mistake?

5. What is the difference between the style of invoice used on flat-bed machines and on cylinder machines?

5. What’s the difference between the invoice style used on flat-bed machines and cylinder machines?

6. When a concern uses two ledgers on account of having too many customers to be conveniently held in one ledger, what change is advisable in ruling the columns of the sales sheet?

6. When a business uses two ledgers because it has too many customers to fit in one, what changes should be made to the columns on the sales sheet?

7. What plan is used in classifying sales according to territory, salesmen, etc.; and what means is used to prove the footings of each page?

7. What method is used to classify sales by territory, salespeople, etc.; and what approach is taken to verify the totals on each page?

8. How much of the left side of the sales sheet do you understand is covered by the invoice when they are both in the machine for the purpose of making the bill and charge?

8. How much of the left side of the sales sheet do you realize is covered by the invoice when both are in the machine to create the bill and charge?

9. How do you classify with the machine the amounts of the bills in the columns to the right of the total column?

9. How do you use the machine to categorize the amounts of the bills in the columns to the right of the total column?

10. Name all of the reasons you can, whether included in the textbook or not, for making duplicate invoices.

10. List all the reasons you can think of, whether they're mentioned in the textbook or not, for creating duplicate invoices.

11. Explain why some firms are enabled to make their invoices (and, of course, sales sheets) before the goods are shipped, and give 317reasons why other firms are forced to wait until after the order has been shipped, or at least partially shipped, before making invoices.

11. Explain why some companies can create their invoices (and sales sheets) before the products are shipped, and give 317 reasons why other companies have to wait until after the order has been shipped, or at least partially shipped, before creating invoices.

12. Explain what plan you would use to inform the packer of the description of the goods to be shipped, but prevent him from knowing the quantities, in order to further prevent him from double-checking the figures showing quantities and at the same time neglecting to count the articles.

12. Describe the plan you would use to inform the packer about the description of the goods to be shipped, while keeping the quantities a secret. This way, he won't be able to double-check the numbers showing the quantities and may overlook counting the items.

13. Where the firm sells three or four classes of goods and wishes to keep a continuous record of the tonnage sold, that is, weight of the various classes of goods, how would you rule the invoice and sales sheet in order to shorten the billing?

13. If a company sells three or four types of products and wants to maintain an ongoing record of the total weight sold for each type of product, how would you structure the invoice and sales sheet to streamline the billing process?

14. If you were forced to substitute one size of an article in place of another size ordered (without injury to the customer), how would you design your forms in order to enable you to typewrite the size shipped and size ordered on the sales sheet, and size ordered, only, on the invoice?

14. If you had to replace one size of an item with another size that was ordered (without harming the customer), how would you set up your forms to allow you to type the size shipped and size ordered on the sales sheet, and just the size ordered on the invoice?

15. If you wish to typewrite a requisition for goods ordered at the time the invoice and sales sheet are written, how would you arrange it?

15. If you want to type up a request for goods that were ordered when the invoice and sales sheet are created, how would you set it up?

16. What is the difference between the terms unit billing and condensed billing? Under what conditions would you recommend unit billing and when condensed billing?

16. What’s the difference between the terms unit billing and condensed billing? In what situations would you recommend unit billing, and when would you suggest condensed billing?

17. What is the best plan of facilitating the filling of orders where there are a large number of floors or departments and where each day's orders are supposed to be filled upon the day the orders are received?

17. What is the best way to make it easier to fill orders when there are many floors or departments, and when each day's orders are expected to be filled on the same day they come in?

18. Why should a plan which is highly satisfactory in a small concern prove to be an absolute failure in a large one?

18. Why should a plan that works really well in a small business end up being a total failure in a larger one?

19. What is meant by split orders?

What does split orders mean?

20. Describe the different forms of punched holes of loose-leaf sheets and why the closed-hole punching is not adapted for use with records which are to be removed and replaced in binders from time to time.

20. Describe the various types of punched holes in loose-leaf sheets and explain why closed-hole punching isn't suitable for records that need to be taken out and put back into binders regularly.

21. Describe the different forms of binders with which you are familiar.

21. Describe the various types of binders you know about.

22. In printing invoices what is the best plan of designing the headings in order to facilitate the execution of the invoice on billing machines? Would you pay any attention to the space between the 318lines of the heading and to the distance between the last line to be typewritten on the heading and the first line to be typewritten on the invoice?

22. When printing invoices, what's the best way to design the headings to make it easier to use billing machines? Should you consider the space between the 318 lines of the heading and the gap between the last line to be typed on the heading and the first line to be typed on the invoice?

23. Explain the mistakes made in using carbon paper, and under what conditions you would use the various weights of carbon paper.

23. Describe the errors made when using carbon paper, and under what circumstances you would use the different weights of carbon paper.

24. Explain what is meant by a blind.

24. Explain what is meant by a blind.

25. Explain what is meant by credit memoranda, and tell how to use them in connection with a sales book instead of having to use a separate credit sheet.

25. Explain what is meant by credit memoranda, and describe how to use them in conjunction with a sales book instead of needing a separate credit sheet.

26. Explain the use of special characters on the billing machine, and what is meant by aligning them in order to prevent one abbreviation being printed over the top of another.

26. Explain how to use special characters on the billing machine, and what it means to position them correctly to avoid one abbreviation being printed over another.

27. Explain the difference between a single-stop tabulator and a decimal-stop tabulator.

27. Explain the difference between a single-stop tabulator and a decimal-stop tabulator.

28. What is the advantage of having a billing operator on a platform on wheels in a wholesale dry goods house?

28. What’s the benefit of having a billing operator on a mobile platform in a wholesale dry goods store?

29. Under what conditions would you recommend the use of the separate billing machine and separate computing machine for the same work?

29. When would you suggest using a separate billing machine and a separate computing machine for the same job?

30. Explain the benefits to be derived from the use of the color scheme.

30. Explain the benefits of using the color scheme.

31. What is meant by compound forms, and under what conditions can they be used?

31. What are compound forms, and when can they be used?

32. In what general way does retail dry goods billing differ from condensed billing and what is the difference in the general style of stationery used?

32. How does retail dry goods billing generally differ from condensed billing, and what are the differences in the overall style of stationery used?

33. What is the best plan of filing the duplicate monthly retail dry goods bill?

33. What is the best way to organize the duplicate monthly retail dry goods bill?

34. What is the plan used in retail dry goods billing to prevent goods from being shipped out of the store without a charge being made?

34. What is the procedure used in retail dry goods billing to stop goods from being shipped out of the store without charging for them?

35. What is the advantage of a subtracting device on the billing machine with adding attachment?

35. What’s the benefit of having a subtracting feature on the billing machine with an adding function?

319

INDEX

The page numbers of this volume will be found at the bottom of the
pages; the numbers at the top refer only to the section.
A
 
Abstract of sales 1
 
Accounting forms, special 146-161
cash books 155
ledgers 147
balance 152
card 148
loose-leaf 147
tabular 152
pay-roll records 160
tabular sales book 157
 
Accounts with trust provisions 180
 
Adding machine and cylinder billing machine combined 301
 
Adding machine and typewriter combined 289
 
 
B
 
Back orders 262
 
Balance ledgers 152
with two balance columns 154
with two credit columns 154
for installment accounts 155
 
Bearing the market 229
 
Bid price 229
 
Billing machine  
development of 242
how to handle orders and bills on 280
Smith Premier 300
 
Billing and order recording 235-301
acknowledgment of order to salesman 268
analysis of quantities and amounts 257
back orders 262
billing machine 241
carbon paper 277
colored sheets 288
compound forms 290
computing machines in connection with 286
duplicate invoices 253
320goods purchased outside 258
information on sales sheet not on invoice 257
loose-leaf sales sheets and invoices 244
manifolding, machines for 239
order form 266
reference information 289
retail dry goods billing 292
split orders 264
stationery 269
traffic department records 256
unit billing 260
 
Blinds 280
 
Board of trade terms, glossary of 229-232
 
Book inventories 134
 
Borrowing stock 229
 
Boston bank ledger 152
 
Break in the market 229
 
Broken lot 229
 
Brokerage concern, legitimate 198
 
Broker's commission 197
 
Bucket shops 197, 229
 
Bulls and bears 196
 
Buy at market 229
 
Buyer's option 229
 
Buying order 230
 
 
C
 
Cables 230
 
"Call" 230
 
Card ledgers 148
 
Carbon paper 277
color 277
copy 279
finish 277
four-pound 278
full 279
pen 279
pencil 279
seven-pound 278
ten-pound 278
troubles and remedies 279
wearing quality 280
 
Carrying charges 230
 
Cash book 15, 155
 
Cash grain 230
 
Cash received book 49
 
Check register 45, 227
 
321Clearing house 199
 
Colored sheet system for billing and order recording 288
 
Commission accounts 60-83
actual sales, treatment of 68
cash book 77
consignment 62
consignment ledger 77
exercise 76
manufacturer's agent 60
merchandise broker 60
produce shipper's books 63
receiving book 77
sales book 77
sample transactions 69, 78
shipments 61
shipper's trading account 68
 
Commission, executor's 168
 
Commissions 230
 
Commodities handled by brokers 200
 
Comparative statements 129
book inventories 134
proof without trial balance 131
reverse or slip posting 143
trial balance 129
 
Computing machines, use of, in connection with billing 286
 
Consignment 62
commission account 63
principal's account 62
 
Controlling accounts 12
 
"Cornering the market" 200
 
"Curb" 230
 
Curbstone broker 230
 
Customers' ledger 220
 
Customer's statement 224
 
Cylinder billing machines 241
 
 
D
 
Debit and credit rules 93
 
Debit and credit slip 206
 
"Delivery" 230
 
Designing stationery 273
 
"Dividend" 230
 
"Dump" 230
 
 
E
 
"Even" 230
 
Executor's accounts 163
classification 168
commissions 168
form of 166
sample accounts 169
schedules 164
 
322Expense account, subdivision of 16
 
 
F
 
Flat-bed billing machines 241
 
"Flurry" 230
 
Forms  
abstract of sales, departmental 43, 57
accounting of an executor 186
balance form for general ledger 222
balance form of ledger card 151
balance ledger for installment accounts 155
balance ledger with two balance columns 154
balance sheet and trial balance of general ledger 37
billing of invoicing loose-leaf sales book 249
Boston bank ledger 153
broker's general cash book 213
broker's statement to a customer 223
cash journal 156
columnar 27
for commission business 66, 72
cash received book 48
check register 228
check register and cash expenditure book 47, 58
colored sheet system for billing and order recording 291
commercial tabular ledger 153
commission merchant's  
cash journal 81
consignment and sales ledger 82
general ledger 83
journal 80
receiving book 80
sales book 80
compound forms showing invoice and office records 293
credit slip given to customer by broker 206
customers' ledger, variety of rulings for 219
daily advice of purchase or sale rendered to customers 210
daily sales journal or record of grain sales 208
daily sales journal or record of stock sales 207
deficiency account which shows causes of loss 191
departmental pay-roll record for piece work and day workers 159
executor's account of cash receipts and disbursements 173
executor's accounts with trust provisions 181-185
323executor's journal 172
general ledger 33-35, 227
information on sales sheet not on invoice 259
invoice for use on billing machine 247
journal entries, adjusting 25
journal entries to change to double entry 119
ledger with accounts classified 139-143
ledger after changing to double entry 120
ledger with two credit columns 154
ledger account of each stock handled 218
ledger account of an executor, classified 174
ledger card for dentists 149
ledger card for publishers 150
ledger proof without a trial balance 144
loose-leaf ledger 148
loose-leaf sales sheet 248
loose-leaf sales sheet and invoices 246
loose-leaf sales sheet and invoices with columns for distribution of labor and stock 254
loose-leaf stock ledger 136
memorandum of deposit with broker to secure contracts 203
monthly posting proof sheet 145
monthly statements, retail dry goods houses 297
office cash disbursements, detailed record of 215
opening entry in journal 24
order blank 14
order and sales record 53-56
order and sales record combined 42
pay-roll and check register combined 161
petty cash voucher 17
proof of single entry ledger 107
purchase book and journal, columnar 71
purchase and general ledgers 32
record of loans payable during each month 225
record of margin balances to protect customer's account 216
record of stocks in hands of broker 211
requisition forms for order handling 267
sales book and invoice register 26
sales ledger 29
sales and purchase ledgers 31
sales journal with adjustment column 158
sales journal arranged for distribution to two ledgers 251
sales recapitulation sheet 158
sales sheet for analyzing quantities and amounts of goods 257
sales sheet for condensed billing 255
schedule filed by an executor 177
shipment book 63, 70
324shipment ledger for commission business 65
shipper's cash journal 59
shipper's general ledger 74
shipper's purchase and shipment ledger 73
single entry cash book 103
single entry journal 100-102
single entry ledger 104-106
single entry partnership ledger 113-117
single entry profit and loss statement 108
special journal used by grain commission company 209
split-order schemes, forms for 265
statement of affairs of a bankrupt 189
statement of sales and purchase ledger 36
stationery properly designed 276
stock ledger card 136
stock ledger card and indexes 137
storage charges statement 88
storage record 87
tabular ledger 153
tabular sales book 157
telegraphic buying and selling orders 205
trial balance book 46
typewriter type, styles of 274
unit billing, samples of 261
working balance sheet 127
 
"Futures" 231
 
 
G
 
General ledger 12, 222
 
Gothic type 275
 
Grain commission journal sheet 209
 
Grain purchases 195
 
 
I
 
"In sight" 231
 
Invoice register 15
 
 
L
 
Legitimate brokerage concern 198
 
"Limit" 231
 
Listed securities 231
 
"Long" 231
 
Loose-leaf ledgers 147
 
Loose-leaf sales sheets and invoices 244
 
 
325M
 
Manifolding, machines for 239
 
"Margin" 231
 
Merchandise broker 60
 
 
O
 
"Open market" 231
 
"Open order" 231
 
"Option" 231
 
Order blanks 13
 
Order and sales record combined 41
 
Order work of wholesale grocers 260
 
Out freight 42
 
 
P
 
Pay-roll records 160
 
Petty cash voucher 17
 
Pit 232
 
Pool 231
 
Posting 93
 
Produce shipper's books 63
cash book 64
journal 67
purchase book 63
shipment book 64
shipment ledger 64
 
Protested paper, treatment of 18
 
Purchase controlling account 13
 
Purchase ledger 11
 
"Put" 231
 
"Put and call" 231
 
 
R
 
Realization and liquidation accounts 188
 
Reference information 289
 
"Remargin" 231
 
Remington standard typewriter 299
 
Retail dry goods billing 292
 
Reverse or slip posting 143
 
"Ring" 231
 
"Ring settlement" 199
 
 
S
 
Sales book 14
 
Sales expense 44
advertising 44
packing and shipping 44
326salaries of salesmen 44
traveling expenses of salesmen 44
 
Sales ledger 12
 
Sales recapitulations 158
 
Securities 197
 
"Sell at market" 231
 
"Sell at opening" 231
 
"Selling order" 231
 
"Settlement" 231
 
Shipments 61
 
Shipper's trading account 68
 
"Short" 232
 
Single entry bookkeeping 91-122
books used 92
bill book 92
cash book 92
ledger 92
order book 92
changing corporation books to double entry 118
changing to double entry 110
changing partnership books to double entry 110
closing the books 109
debit and credit rules 93
determining profit 108
distinctive features of 92
posting 93
proprietor's account 93
proving the work 93
sample transactions 94
statement of assets and liabilities 111
statement of ledger 112
 
"Sky rocketing" 232
 
"Slump" 232
 
Smith Premier carbon roll billing machine 300
 
Special accounting forms 146-161
 
Split orders 264
 
"Spread" 232
 
Statement of affairs 188
of a bankrupt 188
 
Stationery 269
binders 269
designing 273
loose-leaf sheets 269
printed for typewritten work 271
 
327Stock brokers' accounts 195-232
bookkeeping for 196
books and forms used 204
advice of purchase of sale 211
bills payable record 224
cash book 212
check register 227
customer's statement 224
daily record sheet 208
debit and credit slip 206
grain commission journal sheet 209
journal 226
ledgers 218
margin book 217
office cash disbursement sheet 214
order blank 205
stock record 212
broker's commission 197
bucket shops 197
bulls and bears 196
capital required 195
clearing house 199
commissions allowed by board to brokers 204
commodities handled 200
cornering the market 200
deposits to secure fulfillment of time contracts 203
glossary of board of trade terms 229-232
grain purchases 195
legitimate dealers 198
office cash disbursements 214
ring settlement 199
securities 197
settlement of contracts by offset 201
value of the wire 200
 
Stock ledger 218
 
"Stop loss order" 232
 
Storage 84
 
Storage accounts 85
special records required 86
 
"Straddle" 232
 
"Sweeten" 232
 
 
T
 
Tables  
chart for checking retail sales slips 294
daily sales of checks, comparison of 295
 
Tabular ledger 152
 
Tabular sales book 157
 
Tabulators on billing machines 284
 
328"Ticker" 232
 
Traffic department records 256
 
Trial balance book 45
 
Trial balances and comparative statements 123-128
balance sheet 125
profit and loss statement 126
trading statement 125
trial balance 124
working balance sheet 128
 
Trustees' and executors' accounts 163-192
 
Type, styles of 275
elite 275
Gothic 275
large Roman 275
medium Roman 275
pica 275
 
Typewriter and adding machine combined 289
 
 
U
 
Underwood billing machine 241
 
Underwood special roll machine 239
 
Unit billing 260
 
 
W
 
Wash sale 232
 
Wholesale accounts 11-59
cash book 15
cash received book 49
check register 45
controlling accounts 12
exercises 38-40
expense account 16
expense book, traveler's 45
general ledger 12
invoice register 15
order blanks 13
order and sales record combined 41
out freight 42
petty cash voucher 17
protested paper 18
purchase ledger 11
sales book 14
sales expense 44
sales ledger 12
sample transactions 18-23, 49
trial balance book 45

TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES

  1. Many pages had section page numbers as well as book page numbers. Footnote 2 on page 10 refers to the book page numbers. Ignored the section page numbers.
  2. Changed 22.50 to 30.50 on page 95 since both 244×.125=30.50 and 30.50+15.08=45.58.
  3. Opening but no close quotes for next few pages beginning on p. 201.
  4. Silently corrected simple spelling, grammar, and typographical errors.
  5. Retained anachronistic and non-standard spellings as printed.

Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!